JP7734390B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Typical examples of conventional gaming machines include pachinko machines and slot machines. Some gaming machines of this type are equipped with decorative components that have light-emitting areas (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

See JP 2012-100905 A (pages 4 to 8, figures 3 to 8)

However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, in conventional pachinko machines, for example, there is a problem in that it is difficult to suitably change the light-emitting area.

The present invention was made in consideration of these circumstances, and aims to provide an amusement machine that can optimally change the illuminated area.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention has the following configuration.
That is, the invention described in claim 1 is as follows:
A gaming machine comprising a front frame attached to the inner frame so as to be openable and closable ,
The gaming machine includes:
a cover portion disposed forward of the irradiating means so as to cover the irradiating means and capable of transmitting the irradiated light;
The light is irradiated from the irradiating means onto the cover portion, and the irradiated light is transmitted through the cover portion and is visible to a player positioned on the front side of the front frame,
The gaming machine includes:
a driving means capable of moving at least the cover portion between a first position and a second position;
In a situation where the cover portion is moved to the first position, the cover portion moved to the first position by the light irradiated from the irradiating means is irradiated in a first irradiated manner, and in a situation where the cover portion is moved to the second position, the cover portion moved to the second position by the light irradiated from the irradiating means is irradiated in a second irradiated manner different from the first irradiated manner,
The first position and the second position are different positions when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

[Actions and Effects] According to the invention described in claim 1, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed.

The gaming machine of this invention can provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the light-emitting area.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, showing the state in which the illumination cover is attached, taken along the line AA in FIG. 1. FIG. This is a left side view of the pachinko machine, showing the state in which the illumination cover is attached, along the cross section BB of Figure 1. FIG. 1 is a plan view of a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. (a) shows the display content of the third pattern display device, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the hold display. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of various counters used in game control. (a) is a table for drawing the jackpot for special chart 1, and (b) is a table for drawing the jackpot for special chart 2. This is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the main decorative pattern. (a) is an example of the variable display effects for a normal jackpot reach and a normal miss reach, and (b) is an example of the variable display effects for a super jackpot reach and a super miss reach. (a) is an example of a variable display effect for a jackpot super reach and a miss super reach, and (b) is an example of a variable display effect for a jackpot super reach and a miss super reach. 10 is a table for determining an ending performance pattern. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing the first pattern change processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 10 is a flowchart showing the next game state setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the large prize opening. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. A flowchart showing the start winning processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a lottery process for advance reading. 10 is a flowchart showing a launch control process. 10 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing the main processing by the dispensing control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a dispensing control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a prize ball control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a ball lending control process. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing by the sub-control device. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the sub-control device. 10 is a flowchart showing customer waiting effect processing by the sub-control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a frame button input monitoring and performance process performed by the sub-control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a process of monitoring decision button input and performing a presentation by the sub-control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a selection button input monitoring and performance process performed by the sub-control device. 10 is a flowchart showing the performance execution management process performed by the sub-control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a process of receiving a read-ahead fluctuation pattern designation command by the sub-control device. 10 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing mode (jackpot) display setting process performed by the sub-control device. 10 is a flowchart showing the variable display mode setting process performed by the sub-control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting the next game status display mode by the sub-control device. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a process of switching a display mode or the like by a display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a pattern row variation display process performed by a display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a specific operation screen display process performed by the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a jackpot opening round display process performed by a display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing the big win ending display process performed by the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a high probability/support state transition display process performed by a display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a low probability/support state transition display process performed by a display control device. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a specific operation period notification process performed by the display control device. A figure explaining the display mode during a specific operation period in the third pattern display device. A figure explaining the display mode during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation of the main decorative pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a display mode during a specific operation period after a reach is achieved. 53 , which follows FIG. 53 , and explains the display mode during the specific operation period after the reaching is achieved. A figure explaining the display mode when the decision button is left pressed during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation. A figure explaining the display mode when the decision button and selection button are pressed during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation. (a) is a table for drawing the jackpot for special chart 1 in Example 2, and (b) is a table for drawing the jackpot for special chart 2. This is a table for setting ending performance patterns. (a) is a table for drawing the jackpot for special chart 1 in Example 3, and (b) is a table for drawing the jackpot for special chart 2. This is a table for setting ending performance patterns. (a1) to (a3) are figures explaining the display mode of the information on the approach of the end of a specific operation period in Example 4, and (b1) to (b3) are figures explaining a display mode different from (a1) to (a3). (a1) to (a3) are figures explaining the display mode of the next game state approach information in Example 5, and (b1) to (b3) are figures explaining a display mode different from (a1) to (a3). 10A to 10E are diagrams illustrating the display mode of the next game state approach information in Example 6. FIG. 10A to 10F are diagrams illustrating the display mode of the next game state approach information in the seventh embodiment. 13A to 13F are diagrams illustrating the display mode of the next game state approach information in the eighth embodiment. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period after the end of a jackpot round game in Example 9. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period after the end of a jackpot round game in Example 10. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period after the end of a jackpot round game in Example 11. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period during a jackpot round game in Example 12. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period during the reach display performance of Example 13. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period during the reach display performance of Example 14. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period after the end of a jackpot round game in Example 15. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period after the end of a jackpot round game in Example 16. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period after the end of a jackpot round game in Example 17. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period after the end of a jackpot round game in Example 18. A figure explaining the display mode of a specific operation period during the reach display performance of Example 19. A figure explaining a display mode different from that of Figure 76 during a specific operation period during a reach display presentation. (a) is a table for the special chart 1 jackpot lottery in Example 20, and (b) is a table for the special chart 2 jackpot lottery. This is a table for selecting the main decorative pattern variation pattern of special chart 1 in Example 20. 20 is a table for determining an ending effect pattern according to the twentieth embodiment. A diagram explaining the display modes from the reach display effect to the big win round display effect. 23 is a flowchart illustrating the auxiliary performance determination process performed by the display control device 45 of the twenty-first embodiment. 10A is a flowchart illustrating the one-shot announcement lottery processing by the display control device 45, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart illustrating the one-shot announcement display processing by the display control device 45. FIG. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an ending effect pattern determination table. A diagram explaining the display mode from the reach display effect to the big win ending display effect. A figure explaining a table for determining an ending performance pattern in Example 22. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating another display mode of the big win ending display effect. This is a front view of a pachinko machine of Example 23 with an illumination cover of a size different from that shown in Figure 1 attached. This is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 88, showing the CC cross section with different sizes of illuminated covers attached. This is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 88, showing the state in which different sizes of illuminated covers are attached in DD cross section. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating adjustment of the light-emitting area when different sized illumination covers are attached. 23( a ) and 23 ( b ) are diagrams illustrating adjustment of a light-emitting region in Example 24. FIG. 25 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a twenty-fifth embodiment. This is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 93, showing the state in which the illuminated cover is attached in EE cross section. This is a front view of a pachinko machine with different sized illumination covers attached. This is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 95, showing the FF cross section with different sizes of illuminated covers attached. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating adjustment of the light-emitting area when different sized illumination covers are attached. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the sub-control device. FIG. 26 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a twenty-sixth embodiment. This is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 99, showing the state in which the illuminated cover is attached at the GG cross section. This is a front view of a pachinko machine with an illuminated cover attached that has a different light-emitting area. This is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 101, showing the state in which different sizes of illuminated covers are attached in HH cross section. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the sub-control device. FIG. 27 is a front view of the game board of Example 27. This is a cross-sectional view II of the game board shown in Figure 104, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illumination part. A front view of the game board with the movable illumination part protruding. A JJ cross-sectional view of the game board shown in Figure 106, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illumination part. A diagram showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illumination part in Example 28. FIG. 29 is a front view of the game board of Example 29. This is a KK cross-sectional view of the game board shown in Figure 109, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illumination part. This is a KK cross-sectional view of the game board shown in Figure 109, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area when the movable illumination section is protruding. FIG. 30 is a front view of the game board of Example 30. This is an LL cross-sectional view of the game board shown in Figure 112, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illumination part. A front view of the game board with the movable illumination part protruding. This is an MM cross-sectional view of the game board shown in Figure 114, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illumination part. 3(a) and (b) are diagrams explaining the mounting direction of the decorative illumination cover and the separate decorative illumination cover of Example 31. 3(a) and (b) are diagrams illustrating the change in the light-emitting area of the illuminated cover of Example 32 before and after the change. 3A and 3B are diagrams illustrating the state before and after the change in the light-emitting area of the third decorative cover of Example 33.

This specification also discloses the following gaming machine invention and the problem that the invention aims to solve:

<First task>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines of this type that execute transition display effects, such as a jackpot ending effect that displays a jackpot ending image on a display device when the gaming state transitions from a predetermined gaming state, such as a jackpot round gaming state, to the next gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2013-230281 (pages 28-29, Figures 9 and 10)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, although this transition display effect is included in the predetermined game state when this effect is started, in conventional gaming machines, this transition display effect may be mistakenly recognized as being included in the next game state. In this case, the player may start an operation required for the next game state (for example, an operation to launch a game ball) even while the ending effect is in progress. In this case, various disadvantages may occur due to the player mistaking the current time when the transition display effect is being executed for the next game state. For example, when a game state transitions to a support game state after a jackpot round, if the player launches a game ball before the transition to the support game state, the player will not receive the benefit of the support game state and the ball will be wasted.
The invention relating to (A1) below has been made in consideration of these circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the disadvantages that arise from mistaking the current time when the transition display effect is being executed for the next gaming state.
The invention according to (A1) below has the following configuration to achieve this object.

(A1) When a game state transitions from a predetermined game state (e.g., a jackpot round game state) to a next game state (e.g., a support game state), an execution means executes a transition display effect (e.g., a jackpot ending effect) that displays a predetermined image on a display means from a predetermined timing at the end of the predetermined game state (e.g., after the end of the final round) to a start timing of the next game state (e.g., the start timing of the support game state);
and a notification means for notifying the player of non-arrival suggestion information (for example, right-hit information 44k during ending, information 44l approaching the next game state, and information 44v about ending, which will be described later) that suggests to the player that the timing for starting the next game state has not yet arrived while the transition display performance is being executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (A1) above, when the gaming state transitions from a predetermined gaming state to the next gaming state, the execution means executes a transition display effect that displays a predetermined image on the display means from a predetermined timing at the end of the predetermined gaming state to the start timing of the next gaming state. While this transition display effect is being executed, the notification means notifies the player of pending indication information that indicates to the player that the start timing of the second gaming state has not yet arrived. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is the predetermined gaming state; in other words, the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is not yet the next gaming state. This reduces the disadvantages that arise from mistaking the current time when the transition display effect is being executed for the next gaming state.

(A2) In the gaming machine described in (A1),
The predetermined gaming state is a first gaming state (for example, a jackpot round gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
the next gaming state is a second gaming state (e.g., a high probability/support state, a low probability/support state) that is a different advantageous gaming state from the first gaming state and allows the player to acquire a different advantageous gaming value while operating the operating means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information suggesting that the advantageous game state has not yet arrived includes information suggesting that the timing to start the second game state has not yet arrived (for example, right-hit information 44k during ending, information 44l about approaching the next game state, and ending countdown information 44v, which will be described later) while the transition display performance is being executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (A2), the next gaming state (second gaming state) to which a predetermined gaming state (first gaming state) transitions is a different advantageous gaming state from the first gaming state, including a gaming state in which a different advantageous gaming value can be acquired while the player is operating the operating means. Therefore, a player may easily operate the operating means to acquire the different advantageous gaming value, mistakenly believing that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is the second gaming state. However, because this operation is performed during the first gaming state, the player is unable to acquire the different advantageous gaming value. However, during the execution of the transition display effect, information indicating that the timing for starting the second gaming state has not yet arrived is presented to the player, making it difficult to mistakenly believe that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is the second gaming state. Furthermore, by preventing the player from operating the operating means under the mistaken belief that the different advantageous gaming value can be acquired, wasted operations can be reduced. This reduces the disadvantages that can arise from mistaking the current state, during which the transition display effect is being executed, for the second gaming state.

(A3) In the gaming machine described in (A2),
The first game state is a round game state in which, based on the result of a lottery by the lottery means triggered by a ball entering the ball entry means being a specific result, a round game is played a predetermined number of times, with one round being the time from when the specific ball entry means is opened to when it is closed,
The transition display effect is an effect at the end of a round game state in which a predetermined image is displayed on a display means from a predetermined timing after the specific ball entry means is closed in the final round of the round game state until the start timing of the next game state (the start timing of the support game state).

According to the gaming machine described in (A3) above, the first gaming state is a round gaming state in which, based on the result of a lottery by the lottery means triggered by a ball entering the ball entry means being a specific result, a predetermined number of round games are played, with one round consisting of the time from when the specific ball entry means is opened to when it is closed. The transition display effect is a round gaming state end effect that displays a predetermined image on the display means from a predetermined timing after the specific ball entry means is closed in the final round of the round gaming state until the start timing of the next gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantages that arise from mistaking the current time when the round gaming state end effect is being executed for the next gaming state.

(A4) In the gaming machine described in (A3),
a variable ball entry means that changes between an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the game and a closed state in which a game ball cannot easily enter the game, and the entry of the ball triggers a lottery by the lottery means;
and an actuation ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter the game, the actuation ball entry being an opportunity for an actuation lottery to activate the variable ball entry means.
The second game state is a support game state in which the result of the activation lottery based on the ball entering the activation ball entering means is likely to be a specific result that activates the variable ball entering means,
The information indicating that the advantageous game state has not yet arrived indicates to the player that the timing for starting the support game state has not yet arrived while the transition display effect is being executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (A4) above, the variable ball entry means is a ball entry means that changes between an open state, which makes it easier for a game ball to enter, and a closed state, which makes it more difficult for a game ball to enter, and this entry triggers a lottery by the lottery means. The activated ball entry means is a ball entry means through which a game ball enters, and this entry triggers an activation lottery to activate the variable ball entry means. The second game state is a support game state in which the result of the activation lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the activated ball entry means is more likely to result in a specific result that activates the variable ball entry means. The information suggesting that the advantageous game state has not yet arrived indicates to the player that the timing to start the support game state has not yet arrived during the execution of the transition display effect. As a result, in order to have the game ball enter the activated ball entry means as soon as possible in the support game state, the player is likely to accidentally launch the game ball during the execution of the transition display effect before transitioning to the support game state. In this regard, by viewing the information suggesting that a favorable gaming state has not yet arrived while the transition display effect is being executed, it is possible to reduce the disadvantages that can arise from mistakenly believing that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is in a support gaming state.

(A5) In the gaming machine described in (A3),
the second gaming state is a high-probability gaming state in which the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be the specific result is higher than in a normal gaming state;
The information indicating that the advantageous gaming state has not yet arrived indicates to the player that the timing for starting the high probability gaming state has not yet arrived during the execution of the transition display effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (A5) above, the second gaming state is a high-probability gaming state in which the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will result in a specific outcome is higher than in the normal gaming state. The information suggesting that a favorable gaming state has not yet arrived indicates to the player that the timing to start the high-probability gaming state has not yet arrived while the transition display effect is being executed. This reduces the disadvantages that arise from mistaking the current time when the transition display effect is being executed as a high-probability gaming state.

(A6) In the gaming machine described in (A4),
The second gaming state is a supported high-probability gaming state in which the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be a specific result and the probability that the result of the activation lottery by the activation lottery means will be a specific result are higher than in a normal gaming state, and the information suggesting that the advantageous gaming state has not yet arrived suggests to the player that the timing to start the supported high-probability gaming state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (A6) above, the second gaming state is a specific high-probability gaming state in which the probability that the result of the lottery drawn by the lottery means will be a specific result and the probability that the result of the activation lottery drawn by the activation lottery means will be a specific result are higher than in the normal gaming state. The information suggesting that an advantageous gaming state has not yet arrived indicates to the player that the timing to start the supported high-probability gaming state has not yet arrived while the transition display effect is being executed. This reduces the disadvantages that arise from mistaking the current time when the transition display effect is being executed for the supported high-probability gaming state.

(A7) In the gaming machine described in (A1),
The transition display effect is a display effect in which a plurality of types of images are displayed in succession in a predetermined combination,
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination depending on the type of the specific result;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the timing to start the next game state has not arrived until the multiple types of images have finished being displayed in succession in the specified combination.

According to the gaming machine described in (A7) above, the transition display effect involves multiple types of images being displayed in succession in a predetermined combination. If the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, the predetermined combinations are displayed in different combinations depending on the type of specific result. Therefore, in the past, if a player mistakenly believed that the end of the display time of a certain image in a transition display effect was the end of the series of transition display effects, they might mistakenly believe that the display time of the subsequent image was a transition to the next game state, which could result in a disadvantage. However, in the present invention, the not-yet-arrival suggestion information indicates to the player that the start time of the next game state has not yet arrived until the multiple types of images have been displayed in succession in the predetermined combination. As a result, during the transition display effect, the not-yet-arrival suggestion information indicates that the start time of the next game state has not yet arrived until the multiple types of images have been displayed in succession in the predetermined combination, thereby reducing the risk of suffering the above-mentioned disadvantage.

(A8) In the gaming machine described in (A7),
the transition display effects have a plurality of combination patterns formed by combining predetermined images from the plurality of types of images,
The combination pattern differs depending on the type of the specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (A8) above, the transition display effects have multiple combination patterns made up of combinations of predetermined images from multiple types of images, and the combination patterns differ depending on the type of specific gaming state, so that the player can be shown a combination of images that is preferable to the player depending on the type of specific gaming state as the transition display effects.

(A9) In the gaming machine described in (A8),
The transition display effect corresponding to the specific game state of a predetermined type has a predetermined combination pattern in which the plurality of types of images are combined in a predetermined combination,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the transition display effect corresponding to the specific game state of another type is formed by reducing one or more images from the plurality of types of images included in the predetermined combination pattern.

According to the gaming machine described in (A9) above, the transition display effects corresponding to a predetermined type of specific gaming state have a predetermined combination pattern in which multiple types of images are combined in a predetermined combination, and the transition display effects corresponding to another type of specific gaming state have a different combination pattern constructed by removing one or more of the multiple types of images included in this predetermined combination pattern. This reduces the processing burden on the gaming machine when determining the transition display effects corresponding to the type of specific gaming state. Furthermore, because the combination patterns of transition display effects are set for each type of specific gaming state, it becomes easier to provide the player with transition display effects associated with the type of specific gaming state.

(A10) In the gaming machine described in (A1),
The transition display effect is a display effect in which a plurality of types of images are displayed in succession in a predetermined combination,
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination depending on the type of identification information variable display effect corresponding to the specific result,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the timing to start the next game state has not arrived until the multiple types of images have finished being displayed in succession in the specified combination.

According to the gaming machine described in (A10) above, the transition display effect involves successively executing multiple types of images in a predetermined combination. If the result of the lottery by the lottery means results in a specific result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination depending on the identification information variable display effect corresponding to that specific result. This reduces the disadvantage caused by the same transition display effect being displayed when a specific result that generates a certain type of specific game state is reached but the type of identification information variable display effect leading up to that specific result is different. Furthermore, during the transition display effect, the non-arrival suggestion information indicates that the timing to start the next game state has not yet arrived until the successive execution of multiple types of images in the predetermined combination has ended. Therefore, even if the same specific result is reached but a different transition display effect is displayed, the risk of suffering the disadvantage described above is reduced.

(A11) In the gaming machine described in (A9),
the transition display effects have a plurality of combination patterns formed by combining predetermined images from the plurality of types of images,
The combination pattern varies depending on the length of time during which the variable identification information display effect is performed.

According to the gaming machine described in (A11) above, the transition display effect has multiple combination patterns made up of combinations of predetermined images from multiple types of images, and the combination patterns vary depending on the length of time the identification information variable display effect is performed, so that the player can be shown a combination of images that is preferred by the player as the transition display effect depending on the length of time the identification information variable display effect is performed.

(A12) In the gaming machine described in (A9),
the transition display effects have a plurality of combination patterns formed by combining predetermined images from the plurality of types of images,
The combination pattern varies depending on the expectation of the specific result occurring in the identification information variation display performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (A12) above, the transition display effect has multiple combination patterns made up of combinations of predetermined images from multiple types of images, and the combination patterns vary depending on the expectation of a specific result occurring in the identification information variable display effect, so that the player can be shown a combination of images that is preferable to the player depending on the expectation of a specific result occurring in the identification information variable display effect as the transition display effect.

(A13) In the gaming machine described in (A9),
the transition display effects have a plurality of combination patterns formed by combining predetermined images from the plurality of types of images,
The combination pattern differs depending on the number of times the identification information variable display effect is executed from the occurrence of the specific game state last time until the occurrence of the specific game state next time.

According to the gaming machine described in (A13) above, the transition display effects have multiple combination patterns made up of combinations of predetermined images from multiple types of images, and the combination patterns differ depending on the number of times the identification information variable display effects are executed from the occurrence of the previous specific gaming state until the occurrence of the next specific gaming state. This makes it possible to show the player a combination of images that is preferable to the player as the transition display effects depending on the number of times the identification information variable display effects are executed from the occurrence of the previous specific gaming state until the occurrence of the next specific gaming state.

(A14) In the gaming machine described in (A1),
The combination pattern of the gaming machine is characterized in that the combination of the multiple types of images in the transition display performance differs depending on whether the result of the lottery by the lottery means triggered by the ball entering the ball entry means is a specific result, or whether the result of the lottery by the lottery means triggered by the ball entering the variable ball entry means is a specific result.

According to the gaming machine described in (A14) above, the combination pattern of the multiple types of images in the transition display effect differs depending on whether the result of the lottery by the lottery means triggered by a ball entering the ball entry means is a specific result, or whether the result of the lottery by the lottery means triggered by a ball entering the variable ball entry means is a specific result. This makes it possible to show the player a combination of images that is preferable to the player as the transition display effect, depending on the trigger of the lottery.

(A15) In the gaming machine described in (A3),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the timing for starting the next gaming state has not arrived immediately after the end of the final round in the round gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (A15) above, the non-arrival indication information indicates to the player that the timing for starting the next game state has not yet arrived immediately after the end of the final round in the round game state, thereby reducing the disadvantages that may arise as a result of the player mistakenly believing that the transition to the next game state has occurred immediately after the end of the final round in the round game state.

(A16) In the gaming machine described in (A3),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the non-arrival suggestion information indicates to the player that the timing to start the next gaming state has not arrived at the same time as the transition display effect is executed.

The gaming machine described in (A16) above indicates to the player that the timing to start the next game state has not yet arrived at the same time as the transition display effect is executed, thereby reducing the disadvantages that may arise as a result of the player mistakenly believing that the game state is being transitioned to at the same time as the transition display effect is executed.

(A17) In the gaming machine described in (A3),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the timing to start the next game state has not arrived while the transition display effect is being executed and after a predetermined time has passed since the execution of the transition display effect.

The gaming machine described in (A17) above indicates to the player that the timing to start the next gaming state has not yet arrived when a predetermined time has passed since the execution of a transition display effect while the transition display effect is being executed. This reduces the disadvantages that can arise as a result of the player mistakenly believing that the transition to the next gaming state has occurred after the predetermined time has passed since the execution of a transition display effect, even though the transition display effect is being executed.

(A18) When the game state transitions from a predetermined state (for example, a jackpot round game state, a player's character selection state in a battle-type reach development effect) to the next state (for example, a support game state, a battle execution state in a battle-type reach development effect), an execution means executes a transition display effect (for example, a jackpot ending effect, a player's character selection effect in a battle-type reach development effect) that displays a predetermined image on the display means from a predetermined timing of the predetermined state (for example, after the end of the final round, when the player's character selection starts) to a predetermined timing of the next state (for example, the start timing of the support game state, the start timing of the battle in a battle-type reach development effect);
and a notification means for notifying the player of non-arrival suggestion information (e.g., specific operation period end approach information 44e, right-hit during ending information 44k, next game state approach information 44l, ending countdown information 44v) that suggests to the player that the timing to start the next state has not arrived while the transition display performance is being executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (A18) above, when the gaming state transitions from a predetermined state (e.g., a jackpot round gaming state, a state in which one's own character can be selected in a competition-type reach development effect) to the next state (e.g., a support gaming state, a competition execution state in a competition-type reach development effect), the gaming machine is equipped with an execution means for executing a transition display effect (e.g., a jackpot ending effect, a competition-type reach development effect) that displays a predetermined image on the display means from a predetermined timing of the predetermined state (e.g., after the end of the final round, when one's own character selection begins) to a predetermined timing of the next state (e.g., the start timing of the support gaming state, the start timing of the competition in a competition-type reach development effect), and a notification means for notifying the player of non-arrival suggestion information (e.g., specific operation period end approach information 44e, right-hit information during ending 44k, next gaming state approach information 44l, ending countdown information 44v) that indicates to the player that the start timing of the next state has not yet arrived during the execution of the transition display effect. This makes it easier for players to recognize that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is a predetermined state; in other words, the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is not yet the next state. This reduces the disadvantages that can arise from mistakenly believing that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is the next state.

(A19) In the gaming machine described in (A18),
The predetermined state is a predetermined game state (for example, a jackpot round game state), the next state is the next game state that occurs after the predetermined game state (for example, a support game state), the predetermined timing of the predetermined state is the end of the predetermined game state (for example, the timing after the final round ends), and the predetermined timing of the next state is the start timing of the next game state (the start timing of a support game state), and the gaming machine is characterized by notifying the yet-to-arrive suggestion information (for example, information 44e indicating approach to the end of a specific operation period, information 44k indicating right-hit during ending, information 44l indicating approach to the next game state, and information 44v indicating countdown to ending).

The gaming machine described in (A19) above can realize the gaming machines described in (A1) to (A17) above.

(A20) In the gaming machine described in (A18),
The predetermined state is a predetermined display state (a state in which one's own character can be selected) in a predetermined display presentation (for example, a showdown-type reach development presentation), the next state is the next display state (a showdown execution state) that occurs after the predetermined display state in the predetermined display presentation, the predetermined timing of the predetermined state is a predetermined timing in a predetermined display presentation (for example, the timing at which one's own character selection starts in a reach development presentation), and the predetermined timing of the next state is a predetermined timing in the next display state (for example, the timing at which the showdown starts in a showdown-type reach development presentation), and the gaming machine is characterized in that it notifies the yet-to-arrive suggestion information (for example, information 44e about the approach of the end of a specific operation period).

According to the gaming machine described in (A20), the predetermined state is a predetermined display state (a state in which the player's character can be selected) in a predetermined display presentation (e.g., a battle-type reach development presentation), the next state is the next display state (a battle execution state) that occurs after the predetermined display state in the predetermined display presentation, the predetermined timing of the predetermined state is a predetermined timing in the predetermined display presentation (e.g., the timing when the player's character selection begins in a reach development presentation), the predetermined timing of the next state is a predetermined timing in the next display state (e.g., the timing when the battle begins in a battle-type reach development presentation), and information suggesting the upcoming event (e.g., specific operation period end approach information 44e) is notified. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the current time when the transition display presentation is being executed is the predetermined display state in the predetermined display presentation; in other words, the current time when the transition display presentation is being executed is not yet the next display state in the predetermined display presentation. This reduces the disadvantages that can arise from mistaking the current time when the transition display presentation is being executed for the next display state in the predetermined display presentation.

(A21) In the gaming machine described in (A20),
The transition display effect (for example, a player's character selection effect in a battle-type reach development effect) is a display effect in which a plurality of types of images (for example, first player information PYA, second player information PYB, third player information PYC, and fourth player information) are displayed in succession in a predetermined combination,
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination depending on the type of the specific result (for example, in the case of a probability jackpot, the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD are displayed, and in the case of a normal jackpot, the first player information PYA to the third player information PYC are displayed),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the not-yet-arrival suggestion information (e.g., specific operation period end approach information 44e) suggests to the player that the timing to start the next display state has not arrived until the timing at which the multiple types of images have been displayed in succession in the predetermined combination has finished (e.g., until the display of the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD has been completed twice).

According to the gaming machine described in (A21), the transition display effect (for example, the player's character selection effect in a showdown-type reach development effect) is a transition display effect in which a plurality of types of images (for example, first player information PYA, second player information PYB, third player information PYC, and fourth player information PYD) are successively executed in a predetermined combination, and when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination depending on the type of specific result (for example, in the case of a special jackpot, the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD are displayed, and in the case of a normal jackpot, the first player information PYA to the third player information PYC are displayed), and the information suggesting the next display state (for example, the information 44e indicating the approach of the specific operation period end) suggests to the player that the start timing of the next display state has not yet arrived until the successive execution of a plurality of types of images in the predetermined combination has finished (for example, in the case of a special jackpot, until the display of the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD has gone around twice). As a result, in the past, if a player mistakenly believed that the end of the display time of a certain image in a transition display effect was the end of the series of transition display effects, he or she might mistakenly believe that the display time of the subsequent image was a transition to the next game state, which could result in a disadvantage. However, in the present invention, during the transition display effect, the not-yet-arrival suggestion information suggests that the start time of the next game state has not yet arrived until the multiple types of images have been displayed in succession in the predetermined combination, thereby reducing the risk of the player suffering the disadvantage described above.

<Second task>
Conventionally, this type of gaming machine has, for example, a gaming machine that, when the player operates the operating means within a predetermined period during which the identification information is displayed to change (for example, during a period during which the symbols are rapidly changing), displays an image for volume adjustment operation to allow the player to perform setting operations such as volume adjustment using the operating means, but does not display the image for volume adjustment operation when the operating means is operated outside the predetermined period during which the identification information is displayed to change (for example, during a reach display period) (for example, JP 2016-193546 A (page 43, FIG. 28)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
In other words, even though the specified period during which the identification information is displayed variably has passed, it is easy to mistakenly believe that this specified period has not passed, and the period for volume adjustment operation passes without the player being able to perform the volume adjustment operation, meaning that the player cannot enjoy the identification information display variably at a comfortable volume.
The invention relating to (B1) below has been made in consideration of these circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the disadvantages that arise from the mistaken belief that the current time during the display of changing identification information is capable of displaying an image for a specific operation.

(B1) An execution means for, when a player operates an operation means (for example, the decision button 81) within a predetermined period (for example, the display period of the normal screen 43a, the demo screen 43b, or the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c), displaying an image for a specific operation (for example, displaying the specific operation screen 44b with a volume adjustment display) to allow the player to perform at least a specific operation (volume adjustment operation) using the operation means, and not displaying the image for the specific operation when the operation means is operated outside the predetermined period (for example, during the reach display period);
and a notification means for notifying the player of non-arrival suggestion information (for example, specific operation period information 44a and specific operation period end approach information 44e, which will be described later) that suggests to the player that the end timing of the period in which the image for specific operation can be displayed has not yet arrived during the specified period.

According to the gaming machine described in (B1) above, when the player operates the operation means within a predetermined period, the execution means executes displaying an image for a specific operation that causes the player to perform at least a specific operation using the operation means, and when the operation means is operated outside the predetermined period, the execution means does not execute displaying the image for the specific operation. During this predetermined period, the notification means notifies the player of pending indication information that indicates to the player that the end of the period during which the image for the specific operation can be displayed has not yet arrived. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the end of the period during which the image for the specific operation can be displayed has not yet arrived, in other words, that the image for the specific operation can currently be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantages that arise from mistakenly believing that the image for the specific operation can currently be displayed.

(B2) In the gaming machine described in (B1),
The gaming machine, characterized in that the non-arrival suggestion information includes a specific operation possible period notification image that notifies that it is a period in which the specific operation image can be displayed.

According to the gaming machine described in (B2) above, the upcoming indication information includes a specific operation possible period notification image that notifies the player that it is a period during which an image for a specific operation can be displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a specific operation can be performed during a predetermined period during which the indicator information is displayed variably.

(B3) In the gaming machine described in (B1),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the non-arrival indication information includes a remaining time notification image that notifies the remaining time of the display period of the specific operation image or a remaining time indication image that indicates the remaining time of the display period of the specific operation image.

According to the gaming machine described in (B3) above, the upcoming indication information includes a remaining time notification image that notifies the player of the remaining time during which the image for a specific operation can be displayed, or a remaining time indication image that indicates the remaining time during which the image for a specific operation can be displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the remaining time during which the specific operation can be performed during the specified period during which the indicator information is displayed variably.

(B4) A gaming machine characterized in that, if the image for a specific operation is displayed within the predetermined period, a non-notification period is provided thereafter in which the non-arrival suggestion information is not notified.

According to the gaming machine described in (B4) above, if an image for a specific operation is displayed within a predetermined period, a non-notification period is set during which the image for a specific operation is not displayed. This reduces the likelihood of the player not being able to fully enjoy the effects within the predetermined period due to images for a specific operation being displayed too frequently within the predetermined period (i.e., the player performing an operation to display an image for a specific operation).

(B5) In the gaming machine described in (B1),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the non-arrival suggestion information continues to be notified even if the image for the specific operation is displayed within the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine described in (B5) above, the non-arrival suggestion information continues to be notified even if an image for a specific operation is displayed within the specified period. This makes it easy for a player to correct the content of a specific operation that causes an image for a specific operation to be displayed, as long as it is within the specified period.

(B6) In the gaming machine described in (B1),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the non-arrival suggestion information is displayed even while the specific operation image is being displayed.

According to the gaming machine described in (B6) above, the non-arrival indication information is displayed even while the specific operation image is being displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the end of the display period for the specific operation image even when looking at the specific operation screen after viewing the non-arrival indication information and operating the operating means.

(B7) In the gaming machine described in (B1),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the image being displayed during the predetermined period is visible even while the image for the specific operation is being displayed.

According to the gaming machine described in (B7) above, the image being displayed during the specified period can be viewed even while the image for a specific operation is being displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize what the image being displayed during the specified period will look like even while the screen for a specific operation is being displayed.

(B8) In the gaming machine described in (B1),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the non-arrival suggestion information can be displayed during a high-speed fluctuation period during the identification information fluctuation display period, and cannot be displayed after the high-speed fluctuation period even during the identification information fluctuation display period.

According to the gaming machine described in (B8) above, the information suggesting a future event can be displayed during the high-speed fluctuation period during the identification information fluctuation display period, and cannot be displayed after the high-speed fluctuation period, even during the identification information fluctuation display period. As a result, even during the identification information fluctuation display period, the period after the high-speed fluctuation period is when the player wants to see/see the information (displaying the results of the fluctuation display or a reach effect), thereby reducing the inconvenience caused by the display of an image for a specific operation.

(B9) In the gaming machine described in (B1),
A gaming machine characterized in that the information suggesting the arrival of an upcoming event can be displayed during a transition presentation from the specific gaming state to the next gaming state when the specific gaming state transitions to the next gaming state and the specific operation image cannot be displayed in the next gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (B9) above, when a specific gaming state transitions to the next gaming state and the image for a specific operation cannot be displayed in the next gaming state, the non-arrival suggestion information can be displayed during the transition presentation from the specific gaming state to the next gaming state. This reduces the inconvenience caused by not being able to perform a specific operation after the specific gaming state transitions to the next gaming state.

<Third task>
Conventionally, this type of gaming machine has, for example, a gaming machine in which a jackpot round gaming state and a gaming state with a subsequent support state are played by right-hand play (for example, JP 2013-255733 A (pages 2-3)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, this type of gaming machine needs to notify the player that it is a right-hand play during the jackpot round game state or during the game state with the subsequent support state, so it notifies the player that it is a right-hand play by the main display screen or LED. This right-hand play notification is also made during the ending performance that takes place after the end of the final round in the jackpot round game state. Therefore, even though the jackpot round game has ended and the support state has not yet begun during the ending performance period, the player is tempted by the right-hand play notification to play a right-hand play, resulting in the problem of wasting balls.
The invention related to (C1) below was made in consideration of these circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the disadvantages that arise from mistaking the current time for the timing to execute a right-hand play.
The invention according to (C1) below has the following configuration to achieve this object.

(C1) a first notification means for notifying a player that a game will be played by hitting the ball to the right in a predetermined game state;
A second notification means for notifying a player that a game will be played by hitting the right hand in the next game state that occurs after the end of the predetermined game state;
When the predetermined game state is transitioned to the next game state, an execution means is provided for executing a transition display effect that displays a predetermined image on a display means from the end timing of a right-hand hit game in the predetermined game state to the start timing of the next game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first notification means issues a right-hit notification in a first mode during right-hit play in the specified gaming state, and issues a right-hit notification in a second mode that has changed to a mode different from the first mode while the transition display performance is being executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (C1) above, the first notification means issues a right-hit notification to notify the player that a game will be played by hitting the right hand in a predetermined gaming state. The second notification means issues a right-hit notification to notify the player that a game will be played by hitting the right hand in the next gaming state that occurs after the predetermined gaming state has ended. The execution means, when transitioning from the predetermined gaming state to the next gaming state, executes a transition display effect that displays a predetermined image on the display means from the end timing of right-hit play in the predetermined gaming state to the start timing of the next gaming state. The first notification means issues a right-hit notification in a first manner during right-hit play in the predetermined gaming state, and issues a right-hit notification in a second manner that has changed to a manner different from the first manner during the execution of the transition display effect. This makes it easier for players to realize that the current time is not during right-hit play in a specified gaming state, but during the execution of a transition display effect, and that it is not the right time to play right-hit play, due to the difference in notification mode between the right-hit notification that occurs until the execution of a transition display effect in a specified gaming state and the right-hit notification while the transition display effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantages that arise from mistaking the current time during the execution of a transition display effect as the right time to play right-hit play.

(C2) In the gaming machine described in (C1),
The predetermined game state is a round game state in which, based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a specific result, a round game is performed a predetermined number of times, with one round being the time from when the specific ball entry means is opened to when it is closed,
the next gaming state is an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player and occurs after the end of the round gaming state based on the result of the lottery being the specific result,
The transition display effect is executed from the end timing of the final round in the round game state to the start timing of the advantageous game state when transitioning from the round game state to the advantageous game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first notification means performs a right-hit notification in the first mode during the round of play, and performs a right-hit notification in the second mode while the transition display performance is being executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (C2), the predetermined gaming state is a round gaming state in which, based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a specific result, a predetermined number of round games are played, with one round consisting of the time from when the specific ball entry means is opened to when it is closed. The next gaming state is an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player and occurs after the round gaming state ends, based on the result of the lottery being a specific result. The transition display effect is executed from the end of the final round in the round gaming state to the start of the advantageous gaming state when transitioning from the round gaming state to the advantageous gaming state. The first notification means issues a right-hit notification in a first manner during round gaming, and issues a right-hit notification in a second manner while the transition display effect is being executed. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the current time is not during round gaming but when the transition display effect is being executed, and that it is not the time to execute right-hit gaming, due to the difference in notification manner between the right-hit notification during round gaming and the right-hit notification while the transition display effect is being executed. This reduces the disadvantages that can arise from mistaking the current time during the transition display effect for the timing to execute a right-hand hit in a favorable gaming state.

(C3) In the gaming machine described in (C1),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second mode is a mode that makes it more difficult for a player to perform a right-hit operation than the first mode.

According to the gaming machine described in (C3) above, the second mode of the right-hit notification is a mode that makes it more difficult for the player to perform a right-hit operation than the first mode of the right-hit notification. This reduces the awareness that the timing to perform a right-hit operation is low while the transition display effect is being executed, thereby reducing the disadvantage that arises from mistaking the current time while the transition display effect is being executed for the timing to perform a right-hit operation in an advantageous gaming state. Modes that make it more difficult to perform a right-hit operation include, for example, an image that discourages a right-hit operation or an image that is less noticeable, as described below.

(C4) In the gaming machine described in (C1),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second mode is less noticeable to a player than the first mode.

According to the gaming machine described in (C4) above, the second mode of the right-hit notification is less noticeable to the player than the first mode of the right-hit notification. This reduces the recognition that the timing to execute a right-hit game is low while the transition display effect is being executed, thereby reducing the disadvantages that arise from mistaking the current time while the transition display effect is being executed for the timing to execute a right-hit game in an advantageous game state. An example of a less noticeable mode is that if the right-hit notification is an image, the image is small in size or has a light color. The right-hit notification image may gradually become smaller, or the color of the image may gradually become lighter.

(C5) In the gaming machine described in (C1),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first notification means issues a right-hit notification in a third mode at the end of the transition display performance, suggesting a return from the second mode to the first mode.

In the gaming machine described in (C5) above, the first notification means issues a right-hit notification in a third mode, which indicates a return from the second mode to the first mode, at the end of the transition display effect. This allows the right-hit notification to be quickly resumed when the transition display effect transitions to the next game state.

(C6) a first notification means for notifying a player that a game will be played by hitting the ball to the right in a predetermined game state;
A second notification means for notifying a player that a game will be played by hitting the right hand in the next game state that occurs after the end of the predetermined game state;
When the predetermined game state is transitioned to the next game state, an execution means executes a transition display effect that displays a predetermined image on a display means from the end timing of a right-hand hit game in the predetermined game state to the start timing of the next game state;
and a next game state approaching information informing means for informing the player of next game state approaching information indicating that the start timing of the next game state is approaching during the transition display performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (C6) above, the next game state approaching information notification means notifies the player of next game state approaching information during the transition display effect, indicating that the timing to start the next game state is approaching. This reduces the disadvantages that can arise from mistaking the current time during the transition display effect for the timing to execute right-hand play in the next game state.

(C7) a first notification means for notifying a player that a game will be played by hitting the ball to the right in a predetermined game state;
A second notification means for notifying a player that a game will be played by hitting the right hand in the next game state that occurs after the end of the predetermined game state;
When the predetermined game state is transitioned to the next game state, an execution means executes a transition display effect that displays a predetermined image on a display means from the end timing of a right-hand hit game in the predetermined game state to the start timing of the next game state;
and a next game operation start time approaching information notification means for notifying next game operation start time approaching information indicating that the timing for starting the right-hit operation for the next game state is approaching.

According to the gaming machine described in (C7) above, the next gaming operation start time approaching information notification means notifies the next gaming operation start time approaching information, indicating that the start timing of the next gaming state is approaching. This makes it easier to grasp the start timing of the right hit operation for the next gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantages caused by not being able to properly grasp the start timing of the right hit operation for the next gaming state.

(C8) In the gaming machine described in (C7),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the next gaming operation start time approaching information notifying means notifies the next gaming operation start time approaching information from the transition display performance to the next gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (C8) above, the next gaming operation start time approaching information notification means notifies the next gaming operation start time approaching information from the transition display effect to the next gaming state. This allows the player to be aware of the right hit operation for the next gaming state during the transition display effect, and to quickly execute the right hit operation at the appropriate timing after entering the next gaming state.

(C9) In the gaming machine described in (C7),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the next game operation start time approaching information notifying means notifies the next game operation start time approaching information during the transition display performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (C9) above, the next game operation start time approaching information notification means notifies the player of the next game operation start time approaching information during the transition display effect. This allows the player to perform a right-hit operation for the next game state at the appropriate timing during the transition display effect.

<4th task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, there is, for example, a gaming machine in which the player can change the volume (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-089649 (pages 41-42)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, this type of gaming machine has the problem that the operation of the player to change the volume is not very interesting.
The invention related to (D1) below was made in consideration of these circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of the player's operation to change the volume.
The invention according to (D1) below has the following configuration to achieve this object.

(D1) a display means capable of displaying display effects relating to games;
a sound output means for outputting a sound in accordance with the display performance;
an operating means operable by a player;
a volume change control means for changing the volume of the sound output from the sound output means based on an operation on the operation means;
The volume change control means is capable of changing the operation sound when changing the volume to a sound related to the display effect being displayed during a period when the volume can be changed.

The gaming machine described in (D1) above includes display means capable of displaying display effects, sound output means for outputting sound in accordance with the display effects, operation means operable by the player, and volume change control means for changing the volume of the sound output from the sound output means based on operation on the operation means, and the volume change control means is capable of changing the operation sound when changing the volume to a sound related to the display effects displayed during the period when the volume can be changed. This allows the player to change the volume while listening to the sound related to the display effects, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the player's operation when changing the volume.

(D2) In the gaming machine described in (D1),
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the display presentation is changed to a different display presentation upon volume change, the operation sound is a sound related to the changed display presentation.

According to the gaming machine described in (D2) above, if the display effect changes to a different display effect when the volume is changed, the operation sound is a sound related to the changed display effect. This allows the player to change the volume while listening to the sound related to the display effect being displayed at the time of the change operation, allowing the player to set the optimal volume when changing the volume.

(D3) In the gaming machine described in (D1),
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation sound is a sound related to the display effect when the display effect when the volume is changed is a predetermined display effect that can be associated, and is a sound unrelated to the display effect when the display effect when the volume is changed is a predetermined display effect that cannot be associated.

According to the gaming machine described in (D3) above, the operation sound is a sound related to the display effect when the display effect when the volume is changed is a predetermined display effect that can be associated, and is a sound unrelated to the display effect when the display effect when the volume is changed is a predetermined display effect that cannot be associated. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable or inconvenienced by forcibly associating the display effect with an inappropriate display effect when the display effect when the volume is changed is a predetermined display effect that cannot be associated.

(D4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D3),
The display means is capable of displaying the display effects and volume information when the volume is changed.

According to the gaming machine described in (D4) above, the display means can display both the display effect and the volume information when changing the volume. This allows the player to change the volume while watching the display effect and listening to the sound related to the display effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in changing the volume.

(D5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (D1) to (D4),
The game machine is characterized in that the image of the display effect displayed during the volume change operation is displayed in a smaller size than the image of the display effect displayed before the volume change operation.

According to the gaming machine described in (D5) above, the image of the display effect displayed during the volume change operation is displayed in a smaller size than the image of the display effect displayed before the volume change operation. This makes it easier to change the volume because the image of the display effect is reduced during the volume change operation. Furthermore, since the player can check the currently displayed display effect in the reduced image while changing the volume, the player can change the volume with confidence without worrying that the display effect will end while they are changing the volume.

(D6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (D1) to (D4),
A gaming machine characterized in that the image of the display effect displayed during the volume change operation is superimposed behind the image for the volume change operation in a manner that makes at least a portion of it visible.

According to the gaming machine described in (D6) above, the image of the display effect displayed during the volume change operation is superimposed behind the image for the volume change operation in a manner that makes at least a portion of it visible. This ensures sufficient area for displaying the image for the volume change operation, making it easier to change the volume. Furthermore, since the player can check the display effect being displayed in the image superimposed behind it while performing the volume change operation, the player can perform the volume change operation with confidence without worrying that the display effect will end while they are performing the volume change operation.

<5th task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, there is, for example, a gaming machine that performs a display effect to display information that can be seen by a player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2006-081588 (pages 44 to 46)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, this type of gaming machine has a problem in that the patterns in which information is displayed are fixed, and therefore the display presentation lacks interest.
The invention relating to (E1) below has been made in consideration of these circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the entertainment value of display presentations.
The invention according to (E1) below has the following configuration to achieve this object.

(E1)
A display means capable of displaying display effects relating to games;
a display control means for controlling the display of the display performance on the display means in a predetermined pattern;
The predetermined pattern is
a first pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed for a predetermined display time in a predetermined display manner;
and a second pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed for a display time shorter than the predetermined display time and in a display manner different from the predetermined display manner.

The gaming machine described in (E1) above is equipped with display means capable of displaying game-related display effects, and display control means for controlling the display of the display effects on the display means in a predetermined pattern, where the predetermined pattern includes a first pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed for a predetermined display time and in a predetermined display mode, and a second pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed for a display time shorter than the predetermined display time and in a display mode different from the predetermined display mode. This makes it possible to execute display effects with a wide variety of different display times and display modes for displaying the predetermined display information. As a result, the entertainment value of the display effects can be improved.

(E2) In the gaming machine described in (E1),
the first pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order,
The second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in the predetermined order but in a shortened state with the predetermined display time shortened.

According to the gaming machine described in (E2) above, the first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order, and the second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in the predetermined order but for a shortened predetermined display time. This allows for increased variation in display effects without compromising the consistency of the content and appearance of the display effects between the first and second patterns.

(E3) In the gaming machine described in (E1),
the first pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined information displayed in the predetermined order is displayed in a combined state.

According to the gaming machine described in (E3) above, the first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order, and the second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined information displayed in the predetermined order is displayed in a combined state. This allows for an increase in the variety of display effects without compromising the consistency of the content of the display effects between the first and second patterns.

(E4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (E1) to (E3),
A gaming machine characterized in that the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the second pattern.

According to the gaming machine described in (E4) above, the length of the display period for the display effects executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the display period for the display effects executed in the second pattern. This shortens the display time for displaying the specified display information in the display effects executed in the second pattern, allowing the extra time to be used to increase the variety of display effects.

(E5) In the gaming machine described in (E1) to (E4),
The predetermined display information is ending presentation information after a big win round of play.

According to the gaming machine described in (E5) above, the predetermined display information is ending presentation information after a jackpot round. This allows for increased variety in the ending presentation after a jackpot round.

(E6) In the gaming machine described in (E1) to (E4),
The predetermined display information is suggestive performance information displayed during a reach performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (E6) above, this is suggestive performance information that is displayed during reach performance. This can increase the variety of suggestive performances that are displayed during reach performance.

<6th task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, there is, for example, a gaming machine that performs a display effect that displays information that can be seen by a player (for example, JP 2006-081588 A (pages 44 to 46)). Even in this type of gaming machine, there are cases where a display that requires operation of an operating means is performed during the display effect.
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, this type of gaming machine has a problem in that a part of the display effects is replaced with a display that requires the operation of the operating means, which reduces the interest of the display effects.
The invention relating to (F1) below has been made in consideration of these circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the entertainment value of display presentations.
The invention according to (F1) below has the following configuration to achieve this object.

(F1)
a display means for displaying display effects relating to games;
an operation means operable by a player in response to the display effects;
a display control means for controlling the display of the display performance on the display means;
The display control means
an operation request execution means for controlling the display of an operation request image requesting the player to operate the operation means during the display performance;
and an operation display effect execution means for controlling the display of an operation display effect using the operation means during the display effect, in response to an operation by a player in response to the operation request image,
The predetermined pattern is
a first pattern in which, when the operation request image is displayed and the player does not perform an operation in response to the operation request image, predetermined display information is displayed for a predetermined display time in a predetermined display manner;
a second pattern in which, when the operation request image is displayed and the player performs an operation in response to the operation request image, the predetermined display information is displayed for a shorter display time than the first pattern and in a display manner different from the first pattern, and the operation display presentation is executed after the display of the predetermined display information has ended.

The gaming machine described in (F1) above comprises a display means for displaying display effects related to the game, an operation means operable by the player in accordance with the display effects, and a display control means for controlling the display of the display effects on the display means. The display control means comprises an operation request execution means for controlling the display of an operation request image requesting the player to operate the operation means during the display effects, and an operation display effect execution means for controlling the display of an operation display effect using the operation means during the display effects in response to the player's operation on the operation request image. The predetermined patterns include a first pattern in which, when an operation request image is displayed and the player does not operate the operation request image, predetermined display information is displayed for a predetermined display time and in a predetermined display format, and a second pattern in which, when an operation request image is displayed and the player operates the operation request image, the predetermined display information is displayed for a shorter display time than the first pattern and in a display format different from the first pattern, and the operation display effect is executed after the display of the predetermined display information has ended. This allows the entertainment value of the display presentation to be enhanced by making the operation display presentation enjoyable without significantly compromising the entertainment value of the display presentation when the operating means is effectively operated in response to the operation request image.

(F2) In the gaming machine described in (F1),
the first pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order for the predetermined display time,
The second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in the predetermined order but in a shortened state with the predetermined display time shortened.

According to the gaming machine described in (F2) above, the first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order for a predetermined display time, and the second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in the predetermined order but for a shortened predetermined display time. This allows for increased variation in the operation display effects without compromising the consistency of the content and appearance of the display effects between the first and second patterns.

(F3) In the gaming machine described in (F1),
the first pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order for the predetermined display time,
The second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information that was displayed in the predetermined order is displayed in a composite state in which the predetermined display time is shortened.

According to the gaming machine described in (F3) above, the first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order for a predetermined display time, and the second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information that was displayed in the predetermined order is displayed in a composite state in which the predetermined display time is shortened. This allows for an increase in the variety of operation display effects without compromising the consistency of the content of the display effects between the first and second patterns.

(F4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (F1) to (F3),
A gaming machine characterized in that the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the second pattern.

According to the gaming machine described in (E4) above, the length of the display period for the display effects executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the display period for the display effects executed in the second pattern. This shortens the display time for displaying the specified display information in the display effects executed in the second pattern, allowing the extra time to be used to increase the variety of operation display effects.

(F5) In the gaming machine described in (F1) to (F4),
The predetermined display information is ending presentation information after a big win round of play.

In the gaming machine described in (F5) above, the specified display information is ending presentation information after a jackpot round. This allows for increased variety in the operation display presentations that are displayed during the ending presentation after a jackpot round.

(F6) In the gaming machine described in (F1) to (F4),
The predetermined display information is suggestive performance information displayed during a reach performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (F6), the predetermined display information is suggestive effect information displayed during reach effects. This increases the variety of operation display effects that are performed during suggestive effects displayed during reach effects.

<7th task>
Conventionally, as an example of this type of gaming machine, there is a gaming machine that displays an ending image after the end of a jackpot round game (for example, JP 2017-205375 A (pages 89-90)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
In other words, this type of gaming machine has the problem that it is difficult to further improve the entertainment value of the ending presentation.
The invention of (G1) below was made in consideration of these circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the entertainment value of the ending presentation.
The invention according to (G1) below has the following configuration to achieve this object.

(G1)
a display means capable of displaying a display effect triggered by a lottery based on the establishment of a start condition;
a display control means for controlling the display of the display performance on the display means;
The display control means
A specific effect execution means for controlling execution of a specific effect during the display effect;
and an ending performance execution means for controlling the display of an ending performance that displays predetermined information during an ending period from the end of a round game that is executed a predetermined number of times, with one round being the period from when the variable ball entry means is set to an open state where the game ball can be entered until when the variable ball entry means is set to a closed state where the game ball cannot be entered, based on the result of the lottery being a specific result, to the start of the next game,
The ending performance execution means is capable of controlling the display of information related to the specific performance executed during the display performance in the ending performance.

The gaming machine described in (G1) above comprises display means capable of displaying a display effect triggered by a lottery based on the establishment of a start condition, and display control means for controlling the display of the display effect on the display means. The display control means comprises specific effect execution means for controlling the execution of a specific effect during the display effect, and ending effect execution means for controlling the display of an ending effect that displays specified information during the ending period from the end of a predetermined number of rounds of play, each round consisting of the period from when the variable ball entry means is set to an open state allowing the game ball to enter until it is set to a closed state preventing the game ball from entering, based on the result of the lottery being a specific result, to the start of the next round of play. The ending effect execution means is capable of controlling the display of information related to the specific effect executed during the display effect in the ending effect. This associates the ending effect with the display effects leading up to the ending effect through the specific effect, and the excitement of the display effects continues into the ending effect through the specific effect, thereby increasing the interest of the ending effect.

(G2) In the gaming machine described in (G1),
A gaming machine characterized in that the information related to the specific effect is information indicating components of the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (G2) above, the information related to the special effect is information that indicates the components of the special effect. This makes it easier to remember the displayed effect by displaying the components of the special effect, further increasing the interest of the ending effect.

(G3) In the gaming machine described in (G1),
A gaming machine characterized in that the information related to the specific effect is information indicating the impact that the specific effect has had on the player.

In the gaming machine described in (G3) above, the information related to the special effect is information indicating the impact that the special effect had on the player. This makes it possible to appeal to players who have been affected by the special effect, further increasing the interest of the ending effect.

(G4) In the gaming machine described in (G1) to (G3),
A gaming machine characterized in that the display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a variable display effect of identification information that makes it possible to identify whether the result of the lottery will be the specific result.

In the gaming machine described in (G4) above, the display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a variable display effect of identification information that makes it possible to identify whether the result of the lottery will be a specific result. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect along with the variable display effect, thereby increasing the interest of the ending effect.

(G5) In the gaming machine described in (G4),
The display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a reach display effect of the identification information.

In the gaming machine described in (G5) above, the display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a reach display effect of the identification information. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect along with the reach display effect, thereby increasing the interest of the ending effect.

(G6) In the gaming machine described in (G1) to (G3),
The display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a round display effect displayed during the round game.

In the gaming machine described in (G6) above, the display effect in which the special effect is executed is a round display effect that is displayed during round play. This makes it easier to remember the special effect along with the round display effect, thereby increasing the interest of the ending effect.

(G7) In the gaming machine described in (G1) to (G6),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is a specific suggestion effect that suggests that the possibility of the specific result being achieved is higher than if the specific effect is not executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (G7) above, the specific effect is a specific suggestion effect that suggests that the possibility of a specific result is higher than if the specific effect is not executed. This makes it easier for players who understand the meaning of the suggestion to remember the specific suggestion effect, thereby increasing the interest of the ending effect.

(G8) In the gaming machine described in (G1) to (G6),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is a specific notification effect that notifies that the possibility of the specific result being achieved is higher than if the specific effect is not executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (G8) above, the special effect is a special notification effect that notifies players that the possibility of a special result occurring is higher than if the special effect is not executed. This makes it easier for players who see, hear, or experience the notification to remember the special notification effect, thereby increasing the interest of the ending effect.

(G9) In the gaming machine described in (G1) to (G8),
the display control means comprises a selection request execution means for controlling the display of a selection request image that requests a player to make a predetermined selection during the display performance;
The specific effect is executed when a predetermined selection requested by the selection request image is made.

According to the gaming machine described in (G9), the display control means includes a selection request execution means for controlling the display of a selection request image that requests the player to make a specific selection during the display effect, and the specific effect is executed when the specific selection requested by the selection request image is made. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect when the specific selection requested by the operation request image is made, thereby improving the interest of the ending effect.

(G10) In the gaming machine described in (G1) to (G9),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the selection request image is displayed during a variable display presentation of identification information that makes it possible to identify whether the result of the lottery will be the specific result.

According to the gaming machine described in (G10) above, the selection request image is displayed during the variable display of identification information, which allows players to determine whether the lottery result will be a specific result. This makes the variable display and the specific result more memorable, increasing the interest of the ending result.

(G11) In the gaming machine described in (G1) to (G9),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the selection request image is displayed during the ending presentation, simultaneously with information related to the specific presentation, or after displaying information related to the specific presentation.

According to the gaming machine described in (G11) above, the selection request image is displayed during the ending presentation, either simultaneously with or after the information related to the specific presentation is displayed. This allows the player to reconsider whether to make a specific selection while viewing the information related to the specific presentation, or after viewing the information related to the specific presentation, thereby increasing the interest of the ending presentation.

(G12) In the gaming machine described in (G1) to (G11),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effects include those that are executed when it becomes possible to execute the specific effects as a result of a lottery based on the establishment of the starting condition.

According to the gaming machine described in (G12) above, a special effect may be executed when it is possible to execute the special effect as a result of a lottery based on the fulfillment of a start condition.

<8th task>
Typical examples of conventional gaming machines include pachinko machines and slot machines. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with decorative components that have light-emitting areas (see, for example, Patent Document: JP 2012-100905 A (pages 4 to 8, figures 3 to 8)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, in conventional pachinko machines, for example, there is a problem in that it is difficult to suitably change the light-emitting area.
The inventions (H0), (H00), and (H1) below have been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the light-emitting area.

(H0) Irradiation means for irradiating light;
a control unit that controls the manner of the light irradiated from the irradiation unit to a first manner that allows the first light-emitting region to emit light when the light irradiated from the irradiation unit causes the first light-emitting region to emit light;
When the light irradiated from the irradiation means causes a second light-emitting area to emit light, the control means controls the manner of the light irradiated from the irradiation means to a second manner that can cause the second light-emitting area to emit light.

With the gaming machine described in (H0) above, whether the light emitted from the illumination means illuminates the first light-emitting area or the light emitted from the illumination means illuminates the second light-emitting area, this can be accommodated by controlling the form of the light emitted from the illumination means, allowing the light-emitting area to be changed appropriately.

(H00) A decorative member disposed on the front side of the gaming machine body;
and an illumination means for irradiating light toward the back side of the decorative member.
The gaming machine is capable of shifting a predetermined area of the decorative member that receives light irradiated from the irradiating means to a different position,
a control means for executing a first control in which, when the predetermined area is located at a first position, the light irradiated from the irradiating means causes the predetermined area located at the first position to emit light as a first light-emitting area, and, when the predetermined area is located at a second position, the light irradiated from the irradiating means causes the predetermined area located at the second position to emit light as a second light-emitting area.

The gaming machine described in (H00) above is equipped with a decorative member disposed on the front side of the gaming machine body and an illumination means for emitting light toward the back side of the decorative member. The gaming machine is capable of shifting a predetermined area of the decorative member that receives light irradiated from the illumination means to different positions, thereby changing the impression of the front side of the gaming machine depending on the position of the predetermined area of the decorative member. When the predetermined area is located in a first position, the control means executes a first control to cause the predetermined area located in the first position to emit light as a first light-emitting area with the light irradiated from the illumination means, and when the predetermined area is located in a second position, the control means executes a second control to cause the predetermined area located in the second position to emit light as a second light-emitting area with the light irradiated from the illumination means. Therefore, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by optimizing the light irradiation direction in accordance with the shifting of the predetermined area of the decorative member.

(H1) A decorative member disposed on the front side of the gaming machine body;
and an illumination means for irradiating light toward the back side of the decorative member.
The gaming machine is capable of shifting a predetermined surface of the decorative member that receives the light irradiated from the irradiating means to a different position,
a control means for executing a first control to cause the predetermined surface located at the first position to emit light as a first light-emitting area using light irradiated from the irradiating means when the predetermined surface is located at a first position, and for executing a second control to cause the predetermined surface located at the second position to emit light as a second light-emitting area using light irradiated from the irradiating means when the predetermined surface is located at a second position.

The gaming machine described in (H1) above is equipped with a decorative member disposed on the front side of the gaming machine body, and an illumination means for emitting light toward the back side of the decorative member. The gaming machine is capable of shifting a predetermined surface of the decorative member that receives light emitted from the illumination means to different positions, thereby changing the impression of the front side of the gaming machine according to changes in the position of the predetermined surface of the decorative member. When the predetermined surface is located in a first position, the control means executes a first control to cause the predetermined surface located in the first position to emit light as a first light-emitting area with the light emitted from the illumination means, and when the predetermined surface is located in a second position, the control means executes a second control to cause the predetermined surface located in the second position to emit light as a second light-emitting area with the light emitted from the illumination means. Therefore, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by optimizing the light irradiation direction in accordance with the shifting of the predetermined surface of the decorative member.

(H2) In the gaming machine described in (H1),
The decorative member is a replaceable decorative cover disposed on the front side of the gaming machine body,
the first light-emitting region is provided on the predetermined surface of the decorative cover,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the second light-emitting area is provided on the predetermined surface of another decorative cover that is replaced with the decorative cover.

According to the gaming machine described in (H2) above, the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately even if the decorative cover arranged on the front side of the gaming machine main body is replaced with a different decorative cover.

(H3) In the gaming machine described in (H1) or (H2),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the illumination means is a light-emitting substrate mounted on a front portion that constitutes the front surface of the gaming machine main body.

According to the gaming machine described in (H3) above, even if the decorative cover arranged on the front portion that constitutes the front of the gaming machine main body is replaced with a different decorative cover, and the light-emitting substrate is provided on the front portion side rather than on the decorative cover side, the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately.

(H4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (H1) to (H3),
the first control includes at least one of setting an irradiation angle of the light irradiated from the irradiation means with respect to the first light-emitting region to a first irradiation angle, setting an irradiation area of the light irradiated from the irradiation means with respect to the first light-emitting region to a first irradiation area, or setting an irradiation distance between a predetermined point (e.g., a center point) of the first light-emitting region and a predetermined point (e.g., a center point) of the irradiation means to a first irradiation distance,
the second control includes at least one of setting a second irradiation angle different from the first irradiation angle, setting a second irradiation area different from the first irradiation area, or setting a second irradiation distance different from the first irradiation distance.

According to the gaming machine described in (H4) above, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by changing at least one of the illumination angle, illumination area, and illumination distance.

(H5) In the gaming machine described in (H2) to (H4),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second light-emitting area of the separate decorative cover changes depending on its shape.

According to the gaming machine described in (H5) above, even if the shape of the separate decorative cover changes from the shape of the decorative cover before the change, the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately.

(H6) In the gaming machine described in (H2) to (H5),
The decorative cover and the separate decorative cover are replaceable without using tools.

The gaming machine described in (H6) above also makes it easy to perform replacement work to suitably change the illuminated area.

(H7) In the gaming machine described in (H1) to (H6),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the irradiation means is capable of at least one of rotating, turning, tilting, bending, curving, stretching and contracting, and moving in the front-back and left-right directions.

According to the gaming machine described in (H7) above, whether the light emitted from the illumination means illuminates the first light-emitting area or the light emitted from the illumination means illuminates the second light-emitting area, the illumination angle can be easily adjusted by rotating, turning, or tilting. Furthermore, the illumination area can be easily adjusted by bending the device if it has a bendable structure such as a hinge, bending the device if it is a flexible board, or extending and contracting the device if it has a structure that can be extended and contracted such as a sliding mechanism. It may also be possible to easily adjust the illumination distance by moving the device in directions including forward/backward and left/right.

(H8) In the gaming machine described in (H1) to (H7),
a light transmitting means for transmitting the light irradiated from the irradiating means to the first light emitting region or the second light emitting region;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the light transmitting means is capable of at least one of rotating, turning, tilting, bending, curving, stretching and shrinking, and moving in the front-back direction and the left-right direction.

According to the gaming machine described in (H8) above, not only is the illumination means tiltable, but even when the light-transmitting means is tiltable, as in (H7), at least one of the illumination angle, illumination area, and illumination distance can be easily adjusted.

(H9) In the gaming machine described in (H2),
The control means changes the illumination means from a state in which the first control can be performed to a state in which the second control can be performed during the process of replacing the decorative cover with the different decorative cover.

The gaming machine described in (H9) allows the illuminated area to be suitably changed during the process of replacing the decorative cover with a different decorative cover.

(H10) In the gaming machine described in (H9),
The control means comprises an input means for inputting a force generated in the process of replacing the decorative cover with the different decorative cover, and an output means for changing the irradiation means from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed based on the input force.

According to the gaming machine described in (H10), the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of replacing the decorative cover with the different decorative cover.

(H11) In the gaming machine described in (H10),
The gaming machine, wherein the input means is a means for pushing the irradiation means into the alternative decorative cover in the process of replacing the decorative cover with the alternative decorative cover.

According to the gaming machine described in (H11), the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force with which the other decorative cover presses the illumination means during the process of replacing the decorative cover with the other decorative cover.

(H12) In the gaming machine described in (H10) or (H11),
The output means causes the irradiation means to perform at least one of the following movements based on the input force: rotation, turning, tilting, bending, curving, stretching and contracting, and movement including forward/backward and left/right directions, thereby changing the irradiation means from a state in which the first control can be performed to a state in which the second control can be performed.

The gaming machine described in (H12) makes it possible to easily adjust at least one of the illumination angle, illumination area, and illumination distance by utilizing the force applied during the process of attaching a separate decorative cover to the front surface in place of the existing decorative cover.

The configurations described in (H2) to (H12) above may be provided in the gaming machines described in (H0) and (H00) above or (I1) and (J1) below.

<9th task>
Typical examples of conventional gaming machines include pachinko machines and slot machines. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with decorative components that have light-emitting areas (see, for example, Patent Document: JP 2012-100905 A (pages 4 to 8, figures 3 to 8)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, in conventional pachinko machines, for example, there is a problem in that it is difficult to suitably change the light-emitting area.
The invention (I1) below has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the light-emitting area.

(I1) A decorative member disposed on the front side of the gaming machine body;
and an illumination means for illuminating the decorative member with light.
a driving means for moving a predetermined surface of the decorative member, which is illuminated by the light emitted from the illuminating means, between a first position and a second position;
a control means for executing a first control to cause the predetermined surface located at the first position to emit light as a first light-emitting area with light irradiated from the irradiating means when the predetermined surface is moved to the first position by the driving means, and for executing a second control to cause the predetermined surface located at the second position to emit light as a second light-emitting area with light irradiated from the irradiating means when the predetermined surface is moved to the second position by the driving means.

The gaming machine described in (I1) above includes a decorative member disposed on the front side of the gaming machine body and an illumination means for illuminating the decorative member. The gaming machine is equipped with a drive means capable of shifting a predetermined surface of the decorative member, illuminated by light irradiated from the illumination means, between a first position and a second position. This means that the illuminated area of the decorative member is not uniform, and the illuminated area of the decorative member can be easily shifted. When the predetermined surface is shifted to the first position by the drive means, the gaming machine is equipped with a control means for executing a first control to cause the predetermined surface located at the first position to emit light as a first light-emitting area with light irradiated from the illumination means, and when the predetermined surface is shifted to the second position by the drive means, the control means for executing a second control to cause the predetermined surface located at the second position to emit light as a second light-emitting area with light irradiated from the illumination means. This facilitates shifting of the illuminated area, and by optimizing the illumination direction of the light in accordance with the shifting of the illuminated area, the illuminated area can be suitably changed.

(I2) In the gaming machine described in (I1),
The gaming machine main body is a pachinko machine main body,
The pachinko machine body is
An outer frame that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine body;
an inner frame supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame with one side of the outer frame as an opening/closing axis;
a front frame attached to the inner frame so as to be able to open and close freely with one side of the inner frame as an opening and closing axis,
The inner frame includes a resin base that forms its outer shape, and a game board that has a game area where game balls attached to the resin base flow down,
The game board is provided with a pattern display device having a display screen on which a display effect during a specific game state that occurs when the pattern variation display and the pattern variation display result in a specific game state is displayed, and an opening that makes the display screen visible,
The front frame includes a transparent member frame portion surrounding a transparent member that allows the game area and the display screen to be viewed,
The decorative member is visible from the front side of the front frame of the pachinko machine body.

In the gaming machine described in (I2) above, the decorative member is visible from the front side of the front frame of the pachinko machine body, making it easy to shift the light-emitting area on the front side of the front frame of the pachinko machine body, and optimizing the direction of light irradiation in accordance with the shift in the light-emitting area makes it possible to suitably change the light-emitting area.

(I3) In the gaming machine described in (I2),
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative member is attached to the transparent member frame portion of the front frame of the pachinko machine body.

According to the gaming machine described in (I3) above, the decorative member is attached to the visual recognition member frame on the front frame of the pachinko machine body, making it easy to shift the light-emitting area on the visual recognition member frame on the front frame of the pachinko machine body, and optimizing the direction of light irradiation in accordance with the shifting of the light-emitting area on the visual recognition member frame makes it possible to suitably change the light-emitting area on the visual recognition member frame.

(I4) In the gaming machine described in (I2),
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative member is attached to the front frame of the pachinko machine body behind the transparent member and is visible through the transparent member.

According to the gaming machine described in (I4) above, the decorative member is attached to the front frame of the pachinko machine body behind the transparent member and is visible through the transparent member. This makes it easy to shift the light-emitting area behind the transparent member of the pachinko machine body, and by optimizing the light irradiation direction in accordance with the shift in the light-emitting area behind the transparent member, it is possible to suitably change the light-emitting area behind the transparent member.

(I5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I2),
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative member is arranged on any one of the upper, lower, left and right sides within the gaming area of the gaming board.

The gaming machine described in (I5) allows the illuminated area to be suitably changed at any position on the top, bottom, left, or right side of the playing area of the gaming board.

(I6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I2),
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative member is arranged on any one of the upper, lower, left and right sides within the opening of the gaming board.

The gaming machine described in (I6) allows the light-emitting area to be suitably changed at any position within the opening of the gaming board, whether it is at the top, bottom, left, or right.

(I7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (I1) to (I6),
The gaming machine, wherein the illumination means comprises a light-emitting substrate and a position change means for changing the position of the light-emitting substrate relative to the predetermined surface of the decorative member.

According to the gaming machine described in (I7), the illumination means includes a light-emitting substrate and a position change means for changing the position of the light-emitting substrate relative to the specified surface of the decorative member, thereby enabling the light-emitting area to be suitably changed at each position.

(I8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (I1) to (I7),
the first control includes at least one of setting the irradiation angle of the light irradiated from the irradiation means onto the first light-emitting region to a first irradiation angle, setting the irradiation area of the light irradiated from the irradiation means onto the first light-emitting region to a first irradiation area, or setting the irradiation distance between a predetermined point (e.g., a center point) of the first light-emitting region and a predetermined point (e.g., a center point) of the irradiation means to a first irradiation distance;
The second control includes at least one of setting a second irradiation angle different from the first irradiation angle, setting a second irradiation area different from the first irradiation area, or setting a second irradiation distance different from the first irradiation distance.

In the gaming machine described in (I8), the decorative member is configured to move, and the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by changing at least one of the illumination angle, illumination area, and illumination distance.

(I9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (I1) to (I8),
An operation means for receiving an operation from a player is provided,
The decorative member operates in response to the operation of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine described in (I9) above, even when the decorative member moves in response to the operation of the operating means, the light-emitting area can be appropriately changed at each position.

(I10) In the gaming machine described in (I9),
The decorative member operates in response to operation of the operating means during standby display, excluding when the display effect is being displayed on the pattern display device.

According to the gaming machine described in (I10), when the symbol display device operates in response to the operation of the operating means during standby display, the light-emitting area can be appropriately changed at each position according to the operation.

(I11) In the gaming machine described in (I9),
The decorative member operates in response to operation of the operating means while a display effect is being displayed on the symbol display device.

According to the gaming machine described in (I11), even when the decorative member operates while a display effect is being displayed on the symbol display device, the light-emitting area can be appropriately changed at each position according to the operation.

(I12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I11),
The illumination means is capable of rotating, turning, tilting, bending, curving, stretching and contracting, and moving in a direction including forward and backward and left and right, in accordance with the movement of the decorative member.

(I13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I12),
The control means changes the illumination means from a state in which the first control can be performed to a state in which the second control can be performed during the process in which the specified surface of the decorative member moves from the first position to the second position.

According to the gaming machine described in (I13), the light-emitting area can be suitably changed as the specified surface of the decorative member transitions from the first position to the second position.

(I14) In the gaming machine described in (I13),
The control means comprises an input means for inputting a force generated in the process of the specified surface of the decorative member moving from the first position to the second position, and an output means for changing the irradiation means from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed based on the input force.

According to the gaming machine described in (I14), the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of the predetermined surface of the decorative member moving from the first position to the second position.

(I15) In the gaming machine described in (I14),
The input means is a means for applying a force to the irradiation means to cause at least one of rotation, turning, tilting, bending, curving, stretching and contracting, and movement including forward/backward and left/right directions, during the process of the specified surface of the decorative member moving from the first position to the second position.

According to the gaming machine described in (I15), the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force applied to the illumination means during the transition of the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position.

(I16) In the gaming machine described in (I14) or (I15),
The output means changes the irradiation means from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed by at least one of rotating, rotating, tilting, bending, curving, stretching and contracting, and moving the irradiation means in a front-to-back and left-to-right direction based on the input force.

The gaming machine described in (I16) makes it possible to easily adjust at least one of the illumination angle, illumination area, and illumination distance by utilizing the force input during the process in which a predetermined surface of the decorative member moves from a first position to a second position.

The configurations described in (I2) to (I16) above may be provided in the gaming machines described in (H0), (H00), and (H1) above or (J1) described below.

<Task 10>
Typical examples of conventional gaming machines include pachinko machines and slot machines. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with decorative components that have light-emitting areas (see, for example, Patent Document: JP 2012-100905 A (pages 4 to 8, figures 3 to 8)).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, in conventional pachinko machines, for example, there is a problem in that it is difficult to suitably change the light-emitting area.
The invention of (J1) below has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the light-emitting area.

(J1) A decorative member disposed on the front side of the gaming machine body;
and an illumination means for illuminating the decorative member with light.
The gaming machine is capable of moving a predetermined surface of the decorative member that receives the light irradiated from the irradiating means between a first position and a second position,
a detection means capable of detecting a displacement of the predetermined surface of the decorative member;
a control means for executing a first control when it is detected that the predetermined surface has shifted to the first position, to cause the predetermined surface located at the first position to emit light as a first light-emitting area with light irradiated from the irradiating means, and for executing a second control when the predetermined surface has shifted to the second position, to cause the predetermined surface located at the second position to emit light as a second light-emitting area with light irradiated from the irradiating means.

The gaming machine described in (J1) above is equipped with a decorative member disposed on the front side of the gaming machine body and an illumination means for illuminating the decorative member. The gaming machine is capable of shifting a predetermined surface of the decorative member, which is illuminated by light irradiated from the illumination means, between a first position and a second position, thereby making it possible to change the impression of the front side of the gaming machine depending on the change in the position of the predetermined surface of the decorative member. The gaming machine is equipped with a detection means capable of detecting the shift in the predetermined surface of the decorative member, so that the shift in the predetermined surface of the decorative member can be recognized. The gaming machine is equipped with control means that, when it is detected that the predetermined surface has shifted to a first position, executes a first control to cause the predetermined surface located at the first position to emit light as a first light-emitting area using light irradiated from the irradiation means, and, when the predetermined surface has shifted to a second position, executes a second control to cause the predetermined surface located at the second position to emit light as a second light-emitting area using light irradiated from the irradiation means.This allows the light-emitting area to be suitably changed by recognizing the shift in the predetermined surface of the decorative member and optimizing the light irradiation direction in accordance with the shift in the predetermined surface.

"Detection means" includes both non-contact and contact types.

(J2) In the gaming machine described in (J1),
The control means comprises an input means for inputting a force generated in the process of the specified surface of the decorative member moving from the first position to the second position, a contact-type detection means capable of detecting that the specified surface of the decorative member has moved from the first position to the second position based on the input force, and an output means for changing the irradiation means from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed when it is detected that the specified surface has moved from the first position to the second position.

According to the gaming machine described in (J2) above, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of the predetermined surface of the decorative member moving from the first position to the second position.

(J3) In the gaming machine described in (J2),
The input means is a means for receiving a force generated in the process of the predetermined surface of the decorative member moving from the first position to the second position, and pressing the contact-type detection means.

The gaming machine described in (J3) above can accept the force generated when a specific surface of the decorative member transitions from the first position to the second position, and utilize the force that presses against the contact-type detection means to suitably change the light-emitting area.

(J4) In the gaming machine described in (J1) to (J3),
The decorative member is a transparent resin member configured to make the control means difficult to see.

In the gaming machine described in (J4) above, the decorative member is a transparent resin member, but is configured to make the control means less visible, so the control means can be made less noticeable.

(J5) In the gaming machine described in (J1) to (J4),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means is arranged so as not to overlap the front of the light-emitting unit mounting surface of the irradiation means.

In the gaming machine described in (J5) above, the control means is arranged so as not to overlap the front of the light-emitting unit mounting surface of the irradiation means, so the light-emitting area can be suitably changed without blocking the light-emitting unit mounting surface.

(J6) In the gaming machine described in (J5),
A gaming machine characterized in that the input means is provided on either the left or right side of the illumination means when the specified surface of the decorative member is moved upward or downward when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine described in (J6) above, when the predetermined surface of the decorative member is shifted upward or downward as viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the input means is provided on either the left or right side of the illumination means, making it less likely to block the light-emitting area that shifts vertically, allowing the light-emitting area to be changed appropriately.

(J7) In the gaming machine described in (J5),
A gaming machine characterized in that the input means is provided on either the upper or lower side of the illumination means when the specified surface of the decorative member is displaced leftward or rightward when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (J7) above, when the predetermined surface of the decorative member is shifted leftward or rightward as viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the input means is provided on either the upper or lower side of the illumination means, making it less likely to block the light-emitting area that shifts left and right, allowing the light-emitting area to be changed appropriately.

(J8) In the gaming machine described in (J5),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means is provided on the rear side of the irradiation means.

In the gaming machine described in (J8), the control means is provided on the rear side of the illumination means, so the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately without blocking the shifting light-emitting area, while ensuring a sufficient light-emitting area on the front side of the control means.

(J9) In the gaming machine described in (J8),
The input means is provided on the rear side of the irradiation means in a position where, when the specified surface of the decorative member is displaced diagonally upward or downward when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the force generated in the process of the specified surface displacing diagonally upward or downward can be input.

In the gaming machine described in (J9), when the predetermined surface of the decorative member is displaced diagonally upward or downward as viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the input means is located on the rear side of the illumination means, in a position where it can input the force generated in the process of the predetermined surface displacing diagonally upward or downward. This does not interfere with the movement of the decorative member, and does not obstruct the displacing light-emitting area, allowing the light-emitting area to be changed appropriately.

The configurations described in (J2) to (J9) above may be provided in the gaming machines described in (H0), (H00), (H1) or (I1) above.

A pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 4 is a right side view of the pachinko machine 10, showing the state in which the illumination cover is attached, taken along the line AA in FIG. 1. FIG. 5 is a left side view of the pachinko machine 10, showing the state in which the illumination cover is attached, taken along the line BB in FIG. 1. FIG. 6 is a plan view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing (a) the display content of the third symbol display device 42 and (b) the hold display.

In the following examples, unless otherwise specified, the directions of up, down, left, right, front, back (or rear, near) are described based on the state when the game board is viewed from the front, i.e., the front view of the game board.

As shown in Figures 1 and 2, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and is fixed to the game island of the amusement hall (hall); an inner frame 12 that is supported so that it can be opened and closed relative to the outer frame 11, with one side of the outer frame 11 (for example, the left side when viewed from the front) acting as an opening/closing axis J1; and a front frame set 14 that is attached so that it can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12, with one side of the inner frame 12 (for example, the left side when viewed from the front) acting as an opening/closing axis J2.

The outer frame 11 is made of wooden plates that are rectangular in overall front view, and each plate is attached with removable fasteners such as machine screws. In this embodiment, for example, the outer dimension of the outer frame 11 in the vertical direction is 809 mm (inner dimension 771 mm), and the outer dimension in the horizontal direction is 518 mm (inner dimension 480 mm). The outer frame 11 may also be made of resin or a light metal such as aluminum.

The inner frame 12 is broadly divided into a resin base 12a (see Figure 2) as the main component that forms its exterior, and a game board 30 (see Figure 7) that is attached to this resin base 12a. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 1 and 2, the inner frame 12 is equipped with a front frame set 14 that can be opened to one side on the front side of the resin base 12a.

Specifically, the resin base 12a is a plate-like member that has a generally rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and has an opening (an opening of the same size as the play area 30a (see Figure 7) described below) centered at its approximate center.

The front frame set 14 is attached to the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed, with the vertical opening and closing axis J2 as its axis on the left side when viewed from the front. In detail, the front frame set 14 can be rotated forward, with the left side as the opening and closing base end and the right side as the opening and closing tip end when viewed from the front.

The game board 30 (see Figure 7) is removably attached to the back side of the resin base 12a so that its play area 30a is positioned in the opening of the resin base 12a.

Now, let's explain the front frame set 14 in more detail.

As shown in Figure 1, the front frame set 14 is attached to the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. Like the inner frame 12, it can be opened forward around the opening/closing axis J2, which extends vertically to the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 1, when viewed from the front, the front frame set 14 is broadly divided into a lower tray portion 13 located at the bottom, an upper tray portion 21 located above this lower tray portion 13, and a glass frame portion 23 located above this upper tray portion 21.

The front frame set 14 is constructed by attaching the lower tray portion 13, upper tray portion 21, and glass frame portion 23 to respective locations on the front side of the base plate body 14a, which is a resin-molded part of the front frame set 14.

As shown in Figure 1, the lower tray section 13 is an integrated component that includes the components that form the lower tray 15 and the components that surround that component. It is fixed to the lowest point of the base plate body 14a (as viewed from the front) with fasteners such as screws so that it is located at the lowest point of the front frame set 14. This lower tray section 13 is equipped with the lower tray 15 and ball removal lever 17 on its front side.

As shown in Figures 1 and 2, the lower tray 15, which serves as a ball receiving tray, extends from the left end to a point two-thirds of the width of the front frame set 14 when the width is divided into approximately three equal parts, and game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 can be stored in the lower tray 15. The ball removal lever 17 is used to remove (discharge) game balls from the lower tray 15; by moving this ball removal lever 17 to the left in Figure 1, a predetermined location (e.g., approximately the center) on the bottom of the lower tray 15 is opened, allowing game balls stored in the lower tray 15 to be removed downward to the outside through the opening on the bottom of the lower tray 15.

The game ball launch handle 18 is positioned to the right of the lower tray 15 and protrudes forward. When the player operates the game ball launch handle 18, the launcher 229 (see Figures 3 and 8) launches the game ball toward the game board 30 (see Figure 7).

As shown in Figure 1, the sound output unit 24 is provided at two locations, one on the left and one on the top left of the front frame set 14 when viewed from the front, and is formed of multiple output ports for outputting sound from speakers provided inside or on the back of the front frame set 14. Only a portion of these output ports is shown in Figure 1, and the entirety is not shown.

As shown in Figure 1, the upper tray section 21 is a component that integrates the components that form the upper tray 19 and the components that surround that component, and is fixed to the lower part of the base plate body 14a in a front view with fasteners such as screws so that it is located at the lower part of the front frame set 14 (above the aforementioned lower tray 15), and is equipped with the upper tray 19 as a tray for receiving game balls. Here, the upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores game balls and then guides them toward the launching device 229 while aligning them in a row.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the upper tray 21 is provided with various operation buttons on its top surface that can be operated by the player. These operation buttons include a frame button 80 consisting of multiple push buttons, which is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 21 near the ball storage space of the upper tray 19. The frame button 80 includes a decision button 81, and a left selection button 82 and a right selection button 83 located on either side of the decision button 81. In addition to the push button type, other types such as a lever type or a touch sensor type may also be used.

As shown in Figure 1, the glass frame 23 has a window 101 formed above the upper tray 21 and various decorative lights arranged around this window 101.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 has a window portion 101 of an approximately vertically elongated ellipse formed in the center of the glass frame portion 23 located above the upper tray portion 21, allowing most of the playing area 30a (see FIG. 7) of the playing board 30 to be viewed from the outside. Specifically, the window portion 101 is approximately vertically elongated ellipse-shaped with a hollow center (opening 101a), and a glass unit (not shown) is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14 so that the opening 101a is covered with a glass plate 137 of an approximately vertically elongated ellipse-shaped or similar shape. The glass unit 140 has a double-pane structure in which two glass plates 137 are arranged closely together in the front-to-rear direction. The approximately central portion of the window portion 101 may be linear, and the glass plate 137 may be shaped to match that shape. Furthermore, the glass plate 137 is not limited to glass; any transparent plate with a certain strength may be used as long as it is made of a material.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1, the glass frame 23 is provided with various decorative illuminations 300 (first decorative illuminations 301, second decorative illuminations 302, and third decorative illuminations 303) around the window 101. That is, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 is provided with a first decorative illuminations 301 (left side decorative illuminations) incorporating LEDs or the like at the left side around the window 101 when viewed from the front, a second decorative illuminations 302 (right side decorative illuminations) incorporating LEDs or the like at the right side around the window 101, and a third decorative illuminations 303 (upper side decorative illuminations) incorporating LEDs or the like at the upper side around the window 101. The illumination modes of these decorative illuminations are controlled to change, such as lighting up or flashing, depending on changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is reached or a predetermined reach is reached, thereby enhancing the presentation effects during gameplay.

In this pachinko machine 10, the first illumination unit 301, the second illumination unit 302, and the third illumination unit 303 function as jackpot lamps, lighting up or flashing when a jackpot occurs to indicate that a jackpot is occurring. In addition, the first illumination unit 301 and the second illumination unit 302 of this pachinko machine 10 are equipped with a prize ball lamp 105 that lights up when prize balls are being paid out, and an error display lamp 106 that lights up when a specified error occurs.

In addition, a small window 107 made of transparent resin is provided at the lower right corner of the periphery of the window portion 101, allowing for partial visibility of the surface of the inner frame 12 and the surface of the game board 30. A specific portion of this small window 107 is flat, so that a certificate stamp or the like affixed to the lower right corner of the game board 30 can be easily read by machine from this flat portion of the small window 107.

In addition, a ball lending operation unit 120 is located below and to the right of the window 101, and is equipped with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. When the ball lending operation unit 120 is operated with banknotes or a card (e.g., a prepaid card) inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located on the side of the pachinko machine 10, game balls are lent out in accordance with the operation. The ball lending button 121 is operated to obtain loaned balls based on information recorded on a card or other recording medium, and loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 19 as long as there is a balance on the card or other recording medium. The return button 122 is operated to request the return of a card or other card inserted into the card unit. The ball lending operation unit 120 may also be equipped with a power display unit (not shown). This power display unit (not shown) displays the remaining balance on the card or other card. In addition, pachinko machines in which game balls are dispensed directly from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray without going through a card unit, so-called cash machines, do not require the ball dispensing operation unit 120. Therefore, decorative stickers or the like are attached to the installation area of the ball dispensing operation unit 120. This allows for the ball dispensing operation unit to be standardized between pachinko machines that use card units and cash machines.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be explained using Figure 7. As shown in Figure 7, the game board 30 is made of wood (e.g., plywood) and has a square-shaped play board 30b when viewed from the front, with both left corners removed. Its peripheral edge (the outer portion of rails 51 and 52, described below) is attached in abutting contact with the back side of the resin base 12a of the inner frame 12. The play area 30a, which is approximately the center of the front side of the game board 30, can be seen from the front outside of the front frame set 14 through the glass plate 137 of the approximately elliptical window portion 101 (shown in Figure 1) of the base plate (not shown) of the front frame set 14.

The gaming board 30 also has a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, a special symbol 1 starting winning device 33a, a special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b, a normal symbol starting opening 34, and a variable display unit 35. These are each arranged in each of the through holes formed by router processing in the gaming board 30, and are attached to the front side of the gaming board 30 with wood screws or the like.

The special symbol 1 start winning device 33a is a so-called belly button-type start opening (start chucker) that does not have an electric device that opens and closes the ball entrance through which the game ball enters. The special symbol 2 start winning device 33b is a so-called electric chute-type start opening (start chucker) that has an electric device that opens and closes the ball entrance through which the game ball enters. The normal symbol start opening 34 is a start opening (through chucker) that opens the electric device of the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b a predetermined number of times when the game ball passes through a gate (through gate). The variable winning device 32 is a winning device that has an electric device (door member) that opens and closes the large winning opening based on the lottery results of the special symbol 1 start winning device 33a and the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b. The electric device is not limited to the rotating type shown in the figure, but may also be a type that moves linearly forward and backward or left and right.

The special chart 1 start winning device 33a is a starting port that can accept game balls that have flowed down the left-side game area 30al, which is provided on the left side of the variable display unit 35, and that have rolled across the stage portion 47B and fallen from directly above. Above the special chart 1 start winning device 33a, a stage portion 47B is provided that causes game balls that have flowed down the left-side game area 30al to oscillate (reciprocate) horizontally. Game balls that have fallen from a point on the stage portion 47B directly above the special chart 1 start winning device 33a will enter the special chart 1 start winning device 33a.

The special symbol 2 start-winning device 33b is a start opening located in a position where a gaming ball can enter in the right-side gaming area 30ar, located to the right of the variable display unit 35. A normal symbol start opening (through gate) 34 is provided above the special symbol 2 start-winning device 33b. If the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the detection of passage through the normal symbol start opening 34 is a win, the electric device of the special symbol 2 start-winning device 33b is opened, allowing the gaming ball to enter.

The right-side gaming area 30ar may be configured to allow some of the gaming balls launched into the right-side gaming area 30ar to pass through the normal symbol starting hole 34, or it may be configured to allow all of the gaming balls launched into the right-side gaming area 30ar to pass through the normal symbol starting hole 34.

The variable winning device 32 is located diagonally below and to the left of the special chart 2 starting winning device 33b, and only game balls flowing down the right-hand game area 30ar can enter the device. In other words, game balls launched by a right-hand hit operation can enter the variable winning device 32 if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state.

The general winning opening 31, variable winning device 32, special symbol 1 starting winning device 33a, special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b, and normal symbol starting opening 34 are each equipped with a detection switch (not shown) that detects the entry or passage of a game ball, and balls entering these special symbol 1 starting winning device 33a, special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b, and normal symbol starting opening 34 are individually detected by the respective detection switches.

In addition, balls entering the general winning port 31, the special 1 starting winning device 33a, and the special 2 starting winning device 33b are detected by a detection switch (a winning port switch, not shown), and balls entering the variable winning device 32 are detected by a detection switch (a count switch, not shown), and based on the output of this detection switch, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 (or lower tray 15).

For example, if a ball lands in the special prize-winning device 33a for special prize 1 or the special prize-winning device 33b for special prize 2, three prize balls will be paid out. Furthermore, if a ball lands in the general prize-winning port 31 or the variable prize-winning device 32, ten prize balls will be paid out. The number of prize balls is optional and may vary.

When a gaming ball passes through the normal symbol starting hole 34, this passage is detected by a detection switch (a passage detection switch not shown), but even if the ball enters the normal symbol starting hole 34, the gaming ball is not paid out.

In addition, as shown in Figure 7, the game board 30 is provided with an outlet 36, and game balls that do not enter the various winning devices are guided through this outlet 36 toward a ball discharge path (not shown). Numerous nails 39 are embedded in the game board 30 to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the game balls fall. Various other components (gimmicks) such as windmills may also be installed.

As shown in FIG. 7, the variable display unit 35 includes a first pattern display device 40 that variably displays a first pattern (e.g., a special pattern) as identification information when triggered by winning the special pattern 1 starting winning device 33a or the special pattern 2 starting winning device 33b; a second pattern display device 41 that variably displays a second pattern (e.g., a normal pattern) when triggered by passing through the normal pattern starting opening 34; and a third pattern display device 42 that variably displays a third pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern) when triggered by winning the special pattern 1 starting winning device 33a or the special pattern 2 starting winning device 33b. The third pattern display device 42 may be, for example, a display device dedicated to display effects, or a light-transmitting resin plate such as an acrylic panel that can display images and is provided in place of or in addition to the glass plate 137.

As shown in FIG. 7, the first pattern display device 40 is equipped with a first segment display unit 40a, which is, for example, a segment display (e.g., a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point) in which multiple segment light-emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. This first segment display unit 40a emits variable light based on the balls entering the special pattern 1 starting winning device 33a and the special pattern 2 starting winning device 33b. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 7, the first pattern display device 40 is equipped with a hold lamp 40c that indicates the number of pending variable displays in the first segment display unit 40a. The hold lamp 40c is also configured to be displayed on the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9(a), the third symbol display device 42 is provided with first to fourth hold indicators H1 to H4 corresponding to the four hold lamps 40c, and a corresponding hold indicator TH corresponding to the currently active variation pattern. FIG. 9(a) shows the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold indicator TH when the number of holds is four, the time when the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold indicator TH is confirmed to be a miss when the number of holds is four, or the time when the decorative symbol (third symbol) consisting of the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold indicator TH when the number of holds is four. The first to fourth hold indicators H1 to H4 and the corresponding hold indicator TH are displayed in colors that correspond to the likelihood of a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 9(b), when listed in order of decreasing probability of a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot increases in the following order: white, blue, red, and rainbow. A white hold indicates that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to that hold does not suggest a possibility of a jackpot combination, or that it is unlikely to result in a jackpot combination. A blue hold indicates that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to that hold is more likely to result in a jackpot than the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the white hold, but is relatively less likely to result in a jackpot than the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the red hold. Red indicates that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to that hold is more likely to result in a jackpot than the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the blue hold. A rainbow hold indicates that it has the highest probability of a jackpot, and that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to that hold has been confirmed to result in a jackpot combination. Note that Figure 9(a) shows that the first to fourth hold displays H1 to H4 and the corresponding hold display TH are white.

The first segment display unit 40a generates a variable display state of the first pattern (in this embodiment, the variable light emission mode of each segment light emission unit) by randomly or sequentially changing the light emission of each segment light emission unit based on the ball entering the special symbol 1 starting winning device 33a and the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b, and when the variable light emission stops, the variable light emission mode indicates whether it is a jackpot or a miss. In addition to indicating whether it is a jackpot or a miss, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot may also be displayed. For example, displaying the first symbol (e.g., a number or letter) indicates a first jackpot, displaying the second symbol (e.g., a number or letter) indicates a second jackpot, displaying the third symbol (e.g., a number or letter) indicates a third jackpot, and displaying the fourth symbol (e.g., a number or letter) indicates a miss. Furthermore, the illuminated display by the first segment display unit 40a is not clear to the average player, so it is not clear (or difficult to understand) whether a player has won or lost, or what type of jackpot it is, just by looking at it.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the jackpot round based on a specific type of jackpot ends, the system enters a support state that supports the gaming ball to easily enter the special symbol 2 start-up winning device 33b. During the support state, the player hits the ball to the right to make the gaming ball enter the special symbol 2 start-up winning device 33b. If the gaming ball hit to the right passes through the normal symbol start-up hole 34, the lottery for the second symbol to determine whether it wins or loses and the result are displayed are carried out within an extremely short time. If the result of the lottery for the second symbol is a win, the electric device of the special symbol 2 start-up winning device 33b is opened for a predetermined time. Therefore, during the time-saving state or the probability variable state, it is easier for the gaming ball that passes through the normal symbol start-up hole 34 to enter the special symbol 2 start-up winning device 33b.

The first symbol display device 40 may be a single or multiple LEDs capable of emitting light in at least two colors. Specifically, if the first symbol display device 40 is made up of two LEDs capable of emitting red and blue light, the LEDs' colors may be alternately changed to produce a varying display state of the first symbol (the color of each LED). For example, when both LEDs stop emitting red light, it indicates a first jackpot; when one LED stops emitting red light and the other LED is off, it indicates a second jackpot; when both LEDs stop emitting blue light, it indicates a third jackpot; and when both LEDs stop emitting light in different colors, it indicates a loss. Furthermore, at least one of the first segment display unit 40a and the hold lamp 40c constituting the first symbol display device 40 may be constructed using other types of display devices, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescent display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display, or may be configured to display on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42. Furthermore, the patterns displayed by the first pattern display device 40 may be configured to display multiple types of letters, multiple types of symbols, multiple types of characters, or multiple types of colors.

The second symbol display device 41 has a display section 41a for the second symbol, such as a "circle," a display section 41b for the second symbol, such as an "x," and a hold lamp 41c. Each time the game ball passes through the third starting hole 34, the displayed symbol (normal symbol) by the display sections 41a and 41b changes, and when the changing display stops at a predetermined symbol, the lower special symbol 2 start winning device 33b is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time. The number of times the game ball has passed through the third starting hole 34 can be held up to four times, and the number of times that has been held is displayed by lighting up the hold lamp 41c. The display sections 41a and 41b each have an LED (light-emitting diode) inside, and the display changes by switching the LED's light (or the lamp's light). Furthermore, at least one of the second pattern display device 41 and the hold lamp 41c may be configured with other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, organic EL display device, CRT or dot matrix display, and may in particular be configured to display on the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42.

In the third pattern display device 42, when the first pattern display device 40 displays a changing display of the first pattern and a predetermined display (stop display) based on a win on the special pattern 1 start winning device 33a or the special pattern 2 start winning device 33b, the third pattern display device 42 displays a changing display of the third pattern and a predetermined display (stop display) accordingly. In addition to display effects triggered by a win on the special pattern 1 start winning device 33a or the special pattern 2 start winning device 33b, the third pattern display device 42 also displays effects during the specific game state to which the game enters after a jackpot win.

The third pattern display device 42 is, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 45, described below. As shown in FIG. 9, for example, the third pattern display device 42 displays three decorative pattern columns L, M, and R: left, center, and right. Each decorative pattern column L, M, and R is composed of multiple decorative patterns, and these decorative patterns are variably displayed on the third pattern display device 42 by scrolling through each decorative pattern column L, M, and R. In this embodiment, the third pattern display device 42 (liquid crystal display device) includes a large liquid crystal display, for example, an 11-inch display. The variable display device unit 35 has a center frame 47A disposed in front of the third pattern display device 42, substantially surrounding the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42 when viewed from the front. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the third pattern display device 42, but other types of image display devices (e.g., a plasma display panel (PDP), an electroluminescent display (EL), or an organic EL) may also be used.

The variable winning device 32 shown in Figure 7 is normally in a closed state where game balls cannot win (or it can be in a closed state where it is difficult to win), and in the event of a jackpot, it alternates between an open state where game balls can easily win and the normal closed state. The period from when the variable winning device 32 switches from the open state to the closed state is called a round. In the jackpot state, this round play is repeated a predetermined number of times.

In this way, in a jackpot round game, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly operated between the open state and the normal closed state, a large number of game balls enter the variable winning device 32 (win), and a large number of game balls are paid out in response to the win, making it an advantageous game state for the player. However, in a jackpot round game, the variable winning device 32 is in the open state for an extremely short period of time, and it may be difficult for game balls to win even in the open state, but since the system transitions to the support state after such a jackpot round game ends, the player's balls are less likely to decrease, making it an advantageous game state for the player.

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is capable of transitioning between a normal game state (game ball consumption state) in which the number of game balls inserted (the number of game balls fired into the game area 30a by the launching device 229) is greater than the number of prize balls paid out (the number of prize balls paid out based on game balls entering the general winning port 31, variable winning device 32, special chart 1 starting winning device 33a, special chart 2 starting winning device 33b, etc.), and an advantageous game state (for example, a jackpot round game state and the support state that occurs thereafter) in which the number of prize balls paid out is greater than the number of game balls inserted, the same number as the number of game balls inserted, or the difference is smaller than the normal game state.

More specifically, when a game ball wins the special symbol 1 start winning device 33a or the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b, the third symbol on the third symbol display device 42 changes in accordance with the changing display on the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40. The changing display based on a win on the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b takes priority over the changing display based on a win on the special symbol 1 start winning device 33a, but it is also possible for the changing display to occur in the order of wins on the special symbol 1 start winning device 33a and the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b. When it is determined that the display on the first segment display unit 40a and the third symbol display device 42 after each change has stopped is a predetermined symbol and combination indicating a jackpot, a jackpot round game state can occur.

The variable winning device 32 is configured so that its large winning opening 32a is in a predetermined open state. Specifically, the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times (e.g., 2, 8, or 16 rounds), with the passage of a predetermined time in this open state or the winning of a predetermined number of prizes counted as one round. Furthermore, the number of times the game ball has passed through the special symbol 1 starting winning device 33a and the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b is reserved up to four times, and this number of reserved times is displayed by the reservation lamps 40c1, 40c2, 40c3, and 40c4 (collectively referred to as reservation lamps 40c). The reservation lamps 40c are illuminated in the order of 40c1, 40c2, 40c3, and 40c4. The reservation lamps 40c may also be configured to display the reservation status on part of the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42.

As shown in FIG. 7, two rails 51, 52 are attached to the gaming board 30 to guide gaming balls launched from the launching device 229 (see FIG. 3) to the top of the gaming board 30. The gaming balls launched in response to the rotation of the gaming ball launching handle 18 are guided to the designated gaming area 30a through the ball guide passage 49 of the two rails 51, 52, which will be described later. The two rails 51, 52 are long, stainless steel metal strips that are attached to the gaming board 30 on both the inside and outside. When viewed from the front of the gaming board 30, the inner rail 51 is formed in the shape of a roughly vertical ellipse, excluding the portion extending clockwise from the upper left to the lower right. A portion of the outer rail 52 (mainly the left side) is formed to face the inner rail 51. In this case, the guide rail is made up of an inner rail 51 and an outer rail 52, and the portion where these rails 51, 52 run parallel to each other at a specified distance (the portion on the left when facing the ball) forms the ball guide passage 49. The ball guide passage 49 is formed in the shape of a groove that has a contact surface with the game board 30, i.e., a groove that is open on the front side.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 51 (upper left in Figure 7). This prevents a game ball that has been guided from the ball guide passage 49 between the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 to the top of the game board 30 from returning into the ball guide passage 49. Furthermore, when the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12, a return rubber 54 is located on the outer rail 52 at a position corresponding to the maximum flight point of the game ball (upper right in Figure 7: the portion corresponding to the tip of the outer rail 52). Therefore, a game ball launched with a force greater than a predetermined value will bounce off the return rubber 54. The outer rail 52 is a long, stainless steel metal strip, which allows the game ball to fly more smoothly, i.e., reduces frictional resistance. As shown in Figure 7, the playing area 30a is partitioned from the tip of the outer rail 52 (top right in Figure 7) to the right tip of the inner rail 51 (bottom right in Figure 7) by the wall 56 on the playing area 30a side of the first pattern display device 40 and the wall 55 (shown by a dashed line in Figure 7) formed on the inner frame 12.

As shown in Figure 7, the lower right corner of the gaming board 30 is a space for attaching a sticker SL (which may also be a plate) such as a certificate stamp (for example, one bearing a serial number). By attaching a sticker SL such as a certificate stamp to the lower right corner of the gaming board 30, it is possible to ensure uniqueness between the gaming board 30 and the certificate stamp.

Next, the play area 30a of the play board 30 will be described. As shown in Figure 7, the play area 30a is defined in a roughly vertically oval shape by the inner periphery (inner and outer rails) of the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52. In particular, in this embodiment, the play area 30a defined on the surface of the play board 30 is configured to be large.

In this embodiment, the play area 30a is the area surrounded by the inner rail 51 and outer rail 52 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, excluding the guide rail area, which is the parallel portion of the inner and outer rails 51, 52. Therefore, when referring to the play area 30a, the guide rail portion is not included, and the left-hand limit position of the play area 30a is determined by the inner rail 51, not the outer rail 52. The right-hand limit position of the play area 30a is determined by the wall portion 55 (part of the inner frame 12). The lower limit position of the play area 30a is determined by the inner rail 51. The upper limit position of the play area 30a is determined by the outer rail 52.

Although detailed drawings are omitted, the launching device 229 receives game balls one by one from a ball outlet (not shown) of the front frame set 14 (a ball outlet leading from the most downstream part of the upper tray 19).

Next, the configuration of the back of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in Figure 3, on the back of the pachinko machine 10 (actually the back of the inner frame 12 and game board 30), various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with certain control boards stacked front to back (for example, the payout control board 311a in Figure 8 described below is located at the front in a rear view, and the power supply control board for the power supply device 313 and the launch control board for the launch control device 312 are located further back than the payout control board 311a). Furthermore, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism 352) for supplying game balls, a resin protective cover 353, etc. are attached. In this embodiment, the various control boards are mounted separately on multiple (three) mounting bases 230-232 shown in Figure 3, which form individual control board units, and each control board unit is individually attached to the back of the inner frame 12 or the game board 30. Specifically, as shown in Figure 3, the main control unit 261 is mounted on the mounting base 230, and the sub-control unit 262 is mounted on the mounting base 232, each of which is formed into a unit, while the payout control unit 311, launch control unit 312, and power supply unit 313 are mounted on the mounting base 231, each of which is formed into a unit.

As shown in Figure 3, the payout mechanism 352 is configured by arranging various components (a tank 355, tank rail 356, case rail 357, payout device 358, and power switch board 382, which will be described later) in an inverted L shape when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the payout mechanism 352 and protective cover 353 are also integrated into a single unit. This unit is sometimes referred to as a back pack, and therefore, here, this unit will be referred to as the "back pack unit 203."

The back pack unit 203 is designed so that it can be attached and detached unit-by-unit without the use of any tools, and in addition, it has a support shaft that allows it to be opened and closed relative to the back of the inner frame 12 or the game board 30. This is also a design feature that makes it easy to check hidden components, even when the back pack unit 203 and other components are stacked one on top of the other.

The back of the gaming board 30 is also provided with a winning detection mechanism for detecting the passage of game balls through various winning holes. Specifically, a winning hole switch (not shown) is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning hole 31 on the front side of the gaming board 30, and a count switch (not shown) is provided at the variable winning device 32. The count switch counts winning balls. Also, an operating hole switch (not shown) for the special symbol 1 starting winning device 33a and an operating hole switch (not shown) for the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b are provided at positions corresponding to the special symbol 1 starting winning device 33a and the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b, respectively, and the entry of game balls into the special symbol 1 starting winning device 33a and the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b is detected by the respective operating hole switches. A gate switch is provided at a position corresponding to the normal symbol starting hole 34, and the passage of game balls into the normal symbol starting hole 34 is detected by the gate switch.

The entry port switch (not shown) for the general entry port 31 and the gate switch for the normal symbol starting entry port 34 are connected to a panel connection board (not shown) via electrical wiring (not shown), which is in turn connected to the main control board 261a (see Figure 8) within the main control device 261 (described below). The count switch for the variable entry device 32 is connected to a large entry port relay terminal board (not shown), which is in turn connected to the main control board 261a. In contrast, the operation port switches for the special symbol 1 starting entry device 33a and the special symbol 2 starting entry device 33b are connected directly to the main control board 261a without going through a relay board.

Other features not shown in the figures include a large prize opening solenoid for opening the large prize opening 32a in the variable prize winning device 32, and an operating port solenoid for opening the electric device in the special prize winning device 2 starting prize winning device 33b.

The detection results obtained by the winning detection mechanisms are input to the main control board 261a within the main control device 261 (described below), and a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning status at that time is sent from the main control board 261a to the payout control board 311a. The payout of the specified number of game balls is then carried out based on the output of the payout control board 311a.

As shown in FIG. 3, the main control unit 261 is mounted on the lower mounting base 230 when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the sub-control unit 262 is mounted on the upper mounting base 232 when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 8, the main control unit 261 includes a CPU 501 that handles primary control, a ROM 502 that stores game programs, a RAM 503 that stores necessary data as the game progresses, an input/output port 505 that communicates with various devices, a random number generator (not shown) used in various lotteries, and a main control board 261a that includes a clock pulse generating circuit (not shown) used for time counting and synchronization. This main control board 261a is housed in a board box 263 (enclosure means) made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a roughly rectangular box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing unit 261c, thereby sealing the board box 263.

The sub-controller 262 also includes a CPU 551 that controls audio and lamp displays and the display controller 45 in accordance with instructions from the main control board 261a in the main controller 261, as well as a sub-controller board 262a that includes ROM 552, RAM 553, a bus line 554, and an input/output port 555, and this sub-controller board 262a is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. Power supplied from the power supply board, described below, is output to the display controller 45 via the sub-controller 262.

As shown in Figure 3, the payout control device 311, launch control device 312, power supply device 313, and card unit connection board 314 are mounted on the mounting base 231. The payout control device 311 is equipped with a control board including a CPU, which is the control center, as well as ROM, RAM, various ports, etc. The launch control device 312 is equipped with a launch control board. The power supply device 313 is equipped with a power supply control board. The payout control board 311a of the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The launch control board of the launch control device 312 controls the launch device 229 (see Figure 8) in accordance with the player's operation of the game ball launch handle 18, and the power supply board of the power supply device 313 generates and outputs the specified power supply voltage required by the various control devices, etc. The launching device 229 of this embodiment employs a solenoid-type launching component that launches game balls by striking them with a launching hammer (not shown) that moves back and forth in response to the energization/de-energization of a launch solenoid (not shown). Other types of launching devices 229 may also be employed, such as mechanical launching components that launch game balls by striking them with a launching hammer driven by a launching motor, or electromagnetic launching components that launch game balls by generating an electromagnetic field. The card unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the ball dispensing operation unit 120 (see FIG. 1) on the front of the pachinko machine and to the card unit (not shown), and receives ball dispensing operation commands from the player and outputs them to the payout control device 311. The card unit connection board 314 is not required in cash machines in which game balls are dispensed directly from a ball dispensing device or the like to the upper tray 19 without going through the card unit.

The dispensing control device 311, firing control device 312, power supply device 313, and card unit connection board 314 are each housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. In particular, in the dispensing control device 311, similar to the main control device 261 described above, the box base and box cover that make up the board box 311b (enclosure means) are unopenably connected by a sealing unit (sealing means), thereby sealing the board box 311b.

As shown in Figure 3, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state recovery switch 311c. For example, when the state recovery switch 311c is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout motor, the payout motor 358a (see Figure 8) slowly rotates forward, thereby clearing the ball jam (returning to normal operation).

The power supply monitoring board 261b is also provided with a RAM erase switch 323. The pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, which allows it to retain the state it was in at the time of the power outage in the unlikely event of a power outage, and to return to the state it was in at the time of the power outage when power is restored. Therefore, when the power is turned off using the normal procedure (for example, when the hall closes), the state before the power was turned off is stored and retained. Therefore, if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, you can turn on the power while pressing the RAM erase switch 323.

Next, we will explain the configuration of the back pack unit 203. As shown in Figure 3, the back pack unit 203 is an integrated unit consisting of a resin-molded protective cover 353 and a game ball payout mechanism 352.

The rear pack unit 203 has a tank 355 at its top that opens upward, and this tank 355 is continuously replenished with gaming balls supplied from the gaming hall's island equipment (gaming island equipment). Connected below the tank 355 is a tank rail 356 that has, for example, two horizontal rows of ball passages and slopes gently downward toward the downstream side, and a case rail 357 is further connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and the required number of gaming balls are paid out appropriately using a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor 358a. The gaming balls paid out by the payout device 358 are then supplied to the upper tray 19 via a payout passage (not shown) or the like.

The tank rail 356 is also provided with a vibrator 360 for applying vibrations to the tank rail 356. For example, the vibrator 360 is fastened to the tank rail 356 with, for example, two screws. Furthermore, the vibrator 360 does not make surface contact with the tank rail 356, but rather makes contact with the two screws, so that the vibrations from the vibrator 360 are transmitted to the tank rail 356 more effectively. Therefore, if a ball jam occurs near the tank rail 356, the ball jam can be cleared by activating the vibrator 360.

The dispensing mechanism unit 352 is equipped with a dispensing relay board (not shown) that relays dispensing command signals from the dispensing control device 311 to the dispensing device 358, as well as a power switch board 382 for drawing in main power from the outside. The power switch board 382 is supplied with main power, for example, 24V AC, via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

The payout mechanism 352, from the tank 355 to the payout passage (not shown), is made entirely of a conductive resin material (e.g., conductive polycarbonate resin), with a portion of it grounded. This reduces noise caused by static electricity from game balls.

As shown in Figure 3, an inner frame open detection switch 388 is provided on the upper right side of the inner frame 12 to detect when the inner frame 12 is opened relative to the outer frame 11. When the inner frame 12 is opened, an output is sent from the inner frame open detection switch 388 to the computer in the hall (inside the pachinko parlor).

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using Figure 8. The pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a main control unit 261, a payout control unit 311, a firing control unit 312, a sub-control unit 262, a display control unit 45, an audio output control unit 47, a power supply unit 313, and other devices. Each of these devices will be explained in detail below.

The main control device 261 of the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a CPU 501, a one-chip microcomputer that serves as a calculation device. The CPU 501 contains a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, a RAM 503 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 502 are executed, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit.

RAM 503 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 313, and is equipped with memory and areas for temporarily storing various types of data, etc.

In other words, if the power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 will continue to execute normal processing until completion, so RAM 503 only needs to store and retain the contents of the counter buffer and reserved ball storage area at the time of power cut (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below), and the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before power cut when power is restored. Specifically, there is no need to provide a dedicated backup area in RAM 503 for storing the values of various registers, I/O, etc. related to game information during normal processing when power is cut off. Furthermore, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal S1 output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 (described below) when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, and power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed when a power outage occurs.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501, which has built-in ROM 502 and RAM 503, via a bus line 504 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 505 is connected to the RAM erase switch circuit 543, which will be described later, the payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, the sub-control device 262, the first pattern display device 40, the second pattern display device 41, and other switches (not shown). The main control device 261 also has the function of controlling the variable display of the first pattern on the first pattern display device 40 and the variable display of the second pattern on the second pattern display device 41.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 described above, is configured to receive backup voltage from the power supply device 313 and retain (back up) data even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the RAM 513 is equipped with memory and areas for temporarily storing various types of data, etc.

If the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, RAM 513 stores and retains information about the state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of power cut, so that the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state it was in before the power was cut off when the power is turned back on. In other words, the storage of this information in RAM 513 is performed when the power is cut off by the NMI interrupt processing and the latter half of the payout control processing steps, and conversely, the stored information in RAM 513 is restored during the power restoration processing when the power is turned on.

The CPU 511, which incorporates the ROM 512 and RAM 513, is connected to an input/output port 515 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the main control unit 261, launch control unit 312, payout motor 358a, etc.

As shown in FIG. 8, the launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of game balls by the launch device 229, and the launch device 229 is permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the launch control device 312 outputs a launch permission signal S7 to the main control device 261 on the condition that it receives all of the following signals: a card unit connection signal S4 (a signal output when the aforementioned card unit is connected to the pachinko machine 10) from the payout control device 311; a touch detection signal S5 (output when the player is touching the game ball launch handle 18); and a launch maintenance signal S6 (output when the launch stop switch 18a provided on the game ball launch handle 18 for stopping launching is not operated). In addition, a volume signal S10 corresponding to the amount of operation of the game ball launch handle 18 is input from the game ball launch handle 18 to the launch control device 312, and the launch control device 312 outputs this volume signal S10 to the main control device 261.

That is, while the launch permission signal S7 is ON (high level), the launch is permitted, and while the launch permission signal S7 is OFF (low level), the launch is not permitted. In other words, while the input launch permission signal S7 is ON, the main control unit 261 repeatedly outputs to the launch control device 312 at a predetermined repetition rate: a launch control signal S8 (pulse signal) that controls the launch solenoid (not shown) that launches the gaming ball; and a ball feed control signal S9 (pulse signal) that controls the ball feed solenoid that sends the gaming ball to the launch rail. The amplitude value of the launch control signal S8 (pulse signal) is determined by the main control unit 261 based on the volume signal S10; for example, the greater the amount of operation of the gaming ball launch handle 18, the greater the amplitude value of the launch control signal S8 (pulse signal). The launch control device 312 drives and controls the launch device 229 based on the launch control signal S8 and the ball feed control signal S9, and the gaming ball is launched with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the gaming ball launch handle 18. Conversely, while the input launch permission signal S7 is OFF, the main control unit 261 does not output the launch control signal S8 or ball feed control signal S9 to the launch control unit 312, and no game balls are launched by the launch unit 229.

The display control device 45 controls the variable display of the third pattern (decorative pattern) on the third pattern display device 42. This display control device 45 is equipped with a CPU 521, ROM (program ROM) 522, work RAM 523, video RAM 524, character ROM 525, image controller 526, input port 527, output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. The input of input port 527 is connected to the output of sub-control device 262, and the output of input port 527 is connected to CPU 521, ROM 522, work RAM 523, and image controller 526. In addition, an output port 529 is connected to image controller 526 via bus line 531, and the output of output port 529 is connected to third pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the decorative pattern display on the third pattern display device 42 based on various commands sent from the main control device 261 after being edited by the sub-control device 262. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs.

Video RAM 524 is memory for storing display data to be displayed on third pattern display device 42; by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 524, the display contents of third pattern display device 42 are changed. Character ROM 525 is memory for storing character data such as decorative patterns to be displayed on third pattern display device 42. Image controller 526 adjusts the timing of each of CPU 521, video RAM 524, and output port 529 to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and reads display data stored in video RAM 524 from character ROM 525 at a predetermined timing and displays it on third pattern display device 42.

The audio output control device 46 controls the audio output in the audio output unit 24a. This audio output control device 46 is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc., and executes processing to control the output of normal audio and specific sounds in accordance with the display performance of the third pattern display device 42. In addition, as described below, the audio output control device 46 controls the adjustment of volume through the operation of the left selection button 82 and right selection button 83. The ROM stores programs and sound data for audio output processing. The audio output unit 24a is equipped with an amplifier, speaker, etc. for outputting audio.

The power supply device 313 also includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each component of the pachinko machine 10. The power supply unit 541 supplies the necessary operating power to the main control device 261, payout control device 311, etc. via a power supply path (not shown). In summary, the power supply unit 541 takes in 24-volt AC power supplied from an external source, generates +12V power for driving various switches and motors, +5V power for logic, and backup power for RAM backup, and supplies these +12V, +5V, and backup power sources to the main control device 261, payout control device 311, etc. The firing control device 312 is supplied with operating power (+12V, +5V, etc.) via the payout control device 311.

As shown in Figure 8, the main control device 261 includes a main control board 261a and a power supply monitoring board 261b, which is separate from the main control board 261a, housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The power supply monitoring board 261b includes a power outage monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruptions due to power outages, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal S1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control unit 311 when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors the 24-volt AC voltage in the power supply unit 541, and if this voltage drops below 22 volts for more than 20 milliseconds, for example, it determines that a power outage (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal S1 to the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control unit 311. By outputting this power outage signal S1, the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control unit 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and perform power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing).

The power supply unit 541 is configured to maintain the 5-volt output, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient period of time to execute the power outage processing, even after the 24-volt AC monitored by the power supply unit 541 has fallen below 22 volts for more than 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control unit 311 can execute and complete the power outage processing normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 543 is a circuit that receives the switch signal from the RAM clear switch 323 and clears the backup data in the RAM 503 of the main control unit 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311 depending on the state of the switch 323. When the RAM clear switch 323 is pressed, the RAM clear switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM clear signal S2 to the main control board 261a. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM clear switch 323 pressed (including powering on after a power outage is resolved), the data in RAM 503 is cleared in the main control unit 261, and when the payout control unit 311 receives an initialization command from the main control unit 261, the data in RAM 513 is cleared.

As shown in Figure 9, the third pattern display device 42 (liquid crystal display device) has three decorative pattern columns L, M, and R set for left, center, and right, and three decorative patterns, an upper decorative pattern, a middle decorative pattern, and a lower decorative pattern, are displayed in a variable manner for each decorative pattern column L, M, and R. In this embodiment, the series of patterns is composed of main decorative patterns SZ, each numbered "0" to "9," and secondary decorative patterns FZ, each consisting of a diamond-shaped picture. The main decorative patterns SZ are displayed in ascending or descending numerical order, and secondary decorative patterns FZ are arranged between each main decorative pattern SZ to form a series of decorative pattern columns L, M, and R. The main decorative patterns SZ and secondary decorative patterns FZ are displayed in a variable manner from top to bottom with a periodicity.

In this case, the series of decorative symbols are displayed in descending order (i.e., in order of decreasing main decorative symbol SZ numbers) in the left decorative symbol column L, and similarly, the series of decorative symbols are displayed in ascending order (i.e., in order of increasing main decorative symbol SZ numbers) in the middle decorative symbol column M and right decorative symbol column R. The variable display then stops in the order of left decorative symbol column L → right decorative symbol column R → middle decorative symbol column M. If, at the time of this stop, the main decorative symbols SZ line up in a jackpot pattern combination (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main decorative symbols SZ) on any of the five active lines on the third symbol display device 42, namely, the upper line L1, middle line L2, lower line L3, right-upward line L4, and left-upward line L5, a jackpot is reached and a special game video is displayed.

The main decorative pattern SZ is composed of a number section SZa in which numbers are drawn, and a decorative section SZb in which characters such as people and animals are decoratively drawn. For example, the main decorative pattern SZ "1" arranged in the three decorative pattern rows L, M, and R is each composed of a number section SZa "1" and a decorative section SZb in which the same character (a different character from "2" to "9") is drawn within a frame surrounding the "1". The same is true for the main decorative patterns SZ "2" to "9".

Next, we will explain the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above.

In this embodiment, the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 uses random numbers related to the operation of the reels and other random numbers used for gameplay to perform the lottery (jackpot lottery: jackpot lottery for the first symbol) and pattern display settings for the first symbol display device 40, the lottery (winning lottery for the second symbol) and pattern display settings for the second symbol display device 41, and the lottery and settings related to the variable display of the decorative symbol (third symbol) for the third symbol display device 42.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the random numbers used for operating the reels are a jackpot random number counter C1 used to draw a jackpot on the first pattern display device 40, a jackpot pattern counter C2 used to select a jackpot pattern on the first pattern display device 40, an initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a second pattern random number counter C4 used to draw a jackpot on the second pattern display device 41, and an initial value second pattern random number counter CINI2 used to set the initial value of the second pattern random number counter C4.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10, this pachinko machine 10 uses other random numbers for use in games, including a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to select a stop pattern to roughly identify the type of variation pattern when selecting a variation pattern for the decorative pattern of the third pattern display device 42, variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used to select a variation pattern for the decorative pattern of the third pattern display device 42, and a second pattern loss pattern counter C5 used to select a loss pattern for the second pattern display device 41. Each of the counters mentioned above is configured by a program executed by the CPU 501.

For example, "Stop pattern 0" indicates a group of complete miss fluctuation patterns consisting of multiple types of complete miss fluctuation patterns, "Stop pattern 1" indicates a group of front-to-back miss reach fluctuation patterns consisting of multiple types of front-to-back miss reach fluctuation patterns, "Stop pattern 2" indicates a group of non-front-to-back miss reach fluctuation patterns consisting of multiple types of non-front-to-back miss reach fluctuation patterns, and "Stop pattern 3" indicates a group of jackpot fluctuation patterns consisting of multiple types of jackpot fluctuation patterns.

All of these counters C1-C5, CINI1-CINI2, and CS1-CS3 are loop counters that add "1" to the previous value each time they are updated (hereinafter referred to as "updates") and return to "0" after reaching their maximum value. Each counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of RAM 503 shown in FIG. 10. RAM 503 also has one execution area and a reserved ball storage area consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved area, second reserved area, third reserved area, and fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores values such as the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot symbol counter C2, and stop pattern selection counter C3 in chronological order, in accordance with the winning history of game balls in the special symbol 1 starting winning device 33a and the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b. The entry of a game ball into the special game 1 start winning device 33a or the special game 2 start winning device 33b is also referred to as the fulfillment of the start condition. The values stored in the execution area are referred to as the executed variable display, and the values stored in the reserved ball storage area are referred to as the unexecuted variable display.

Specifically, if the start condition is met during a period when neither the executed nor unexecuted variable displays are stored in the execution area or reserved ball storage area, the executed variable display will be stored in the execution area. If the start condition is met during a period when the executed variable display is stored in the execution area, the unexecuted variable displays will be stored in the first reserved area, second reserved area, third reserved area, and fourth reserved area in that order. When the executed variable display is stored in the execution area, the non-execution variable display condition is met, which does not execute the pattern variable display for the unexecuted variable displays stored in the reserved ball storage area.

The variable displays of unexecuted transactions stored in the first, second, third, and fourth reserve areas are also referred to as the first reserve, second reserve, third reserve, and fourth reserve.

Each of the counters mentioned above will be explained in detail below using Figure 10. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, "0" to "599," and then return to "0" after reaching its maximum value (i.e., "599"). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the initial value random number counter CINI1 is a loop counter (value = 0 to 599) similar to the jackpot random number counter C1, and is updated once for each timer interrupt (see Figure 25), which will be described later, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing (see Figure 19), which will be described later. The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt (see Figure 25), which will be described later), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of RAM 503 when a game ball enters the special game ball 1 starting winning device 33a or the special game ball 2 starting winning device 33b.

The jackpot random number counter C1's hit value, i.e., the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, is set to two types: low probability and high probability. At low probability, there are two random numbers that result in a jackpot, with values of "150,450." At high probability, there are 16 random numbers that result in a jackpot, with values of "50-57,350-357." In other words, at low probability, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and at high probability, the jackpot probability is 16/300. Note that high probability refers to a state in which a jackpot is reached, for example, by a predetermined probability-changing symbol, and the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value, known as a "probability change." Normal times (low probability times) refer to times when such a probability change state is not in effect. Furthermore, the high probability state (probability variable state) continues after the probability variable jackpot or latent probability variable jackpot ends (after the large prize opening 32a of the variable prize device 32 has been opened for, for example, 16 rounds), until the next jackpot occurs, or until a predetermined number of fluctuations have occurred. In this embodiment, the probability variable state continues until 100 fluctuations have occurred after the end of the jackpot round.

The jackpot symbol counter C2 determines the symbol displayed when the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 stops changing in the event of a jackpot (in this embodiment, the final symbol displayed after the first segment display unit 40a changes). In this embodiment, the jackpot symbol counter C2 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, "0" to "99," and return to "0" after reaching its maximum value (i.e., "9"). Similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 described above, the jackpot symbol counter C2 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt (see FIG. 25) described below), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of RAM 503 when a game ball enters the special symbol 1 starting winning device 33a or the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b.

The jackpot lottery table using this jackpot random number counter C1 and jackpot symbol counter C2 will be explained with reference to Figure 11. Figure 11(a) is the jackpot lottery table for special symbol 1, and (b) is the jackpot lottery table for special symbol 2.

As shown in (a), in the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table, if the jackpot random number counter C1 indicates a win and the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between "0" and "9," the first segment display unit 40a of the first pattern display device 40 stops at the third symbol, and the decorative pattern is aligned with the "7" symbol, as described below. Next, if the aforementioned jackpot random number counter C1 indicates a win and the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between "10" and "49," the first segment display unit 40a of the first pattern display device 40 stops at the second symbol, and the decorative pattern is aligned with odd-numbered symbols excluding "7," such as "1," "3," "5," and "9." Additionally, if the aforementioned jackpot random number counter C1 indicates a win and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is between "50" and "99," the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 stops on the first symbol, resulting in a line of even number symbols such as "2," "4," "6," and "8." Note that, if the jackpot random number counter C1 indicates a miss, regardless of the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2, the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 stops on the fourth symbol, resulting in a combination of decorative symbols indicating a miss.

As shown in (b), in the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table, if the jackpot random number counter C1 indicates a win and the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between "0" and "19," the first segment display unit 40a of the first pattern display device 40 stops at the third symbol, and the decorative pattern is aligned with the "7" symbol, as described below. Next, if the aforementioned jackpot random number counter C1 indicates a win and the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between "20" and "49," the first segment display unit 40a of the first pattern display device 40 stops at the second symbol, and the decorative pattern is aligned with odd-numbered symbols excluding "7," such as "1," "3," "5," and "9." Additionally, if the aforementioned jackpot random number counter C1 indicates a win and the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is between "50" and "99," the first segment display unit 40a of the first pattern display device 40 stops on the third symbol, resulting in a line of even number symbols such as "2," "4," "6," and "8." Note that, if the jackpot random number counter C1 indicates a miss, regardless of the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2, the first segment display unit 40a of the first pattern display device 40 stops on the fourth symbol, resulting in a combination of decorative symbols indicating a miss.

The relationship between the jackpot symbol and the win type will be explained. This relationship is common to the Special Chart 1 jackpot lottery table and the Special Chart 2 jackpot lottery table. If the jackpot symbol is a "7" symbol, the win type will be a 16R special jackpot with 16 rounds assigned and a special jackpot state. If the jackpot symbol is an odd number symbol such as "1", "3", "5", or "9", the win type will be an 8R special jackpot with 8 rounds assigned and a special jackpot state. If the jackpot symbol is an even number symbol such as "2", "4", "6", or "8", the win type will be an 8R regular jackpot with 8 rounds assigned and no special jackpot state.

The relationship between the winning type and the ending time will be explained. The opening time is the time during which the opening performance takes place from the start of the jackpot game state until the start of the first round. The opening time is set to 10 seconds, which is the same for all winning types. The opening time is the same for the Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 jackpot lottery tables.

The relationship between the type of win and the ending time is explained below. The ending time is the time it takes for the ending presentation to take place from the end of the final round to the start of the next game state. In the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table, the ending time for a 16R special jackpot is set to 35 seconds, and the ending time for an 8R special jackpot and an 8R regular jackpot is set to 25 seconds. In the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table, the ending time for a 16R special jackpot is set to 30 seconds, and the ending time for an 8R special jackpot and an 8R regular jackpot is set to 20 seconds. The ending time for a special chart 2 jackpot is set to 5 seconds shorter than the ending time in the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table. This allows the player to see more information at the end of a jackpot round based on winning the special symbol 1 start winning device 33a, but by shortening the ending presentation time when two or more consecutive jackpots occur, such as when winning the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b, the player can reduce the feeling of repetition caused by the same presentation being shown multiple times, when the same presentation would have been clear if it had been shown once.

The relationship between the type of win and the number of plays that result in a support state is explained below. A support state is a state in which, after a jackpot round, the result of the lottery for normal symbols is made more likely to result in a win, and the opening time of the electric device is lengthened and increased in number of times, so that the game ball is more likely to enter the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b than in a normal play state. The support state is a play state in which right-hand hits are performed. On the special symbol 1 jackpot lottery table, the support state for the 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot is set to 100 times. On the special symbol 2 jackpot lottery table, the support state for the 16R probability variable jackpot and 8R probability variable jackpot is set to 100 times, but the support state for the 8R normal jackpot is set to 0 times.

The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, "0" to "238," and return to "0" after reaching its maximum value (i.e., 238). In this embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 determines whether a "reach miss" occurs, in which the final stop decorative symbol stops just one symbol before or after the reach decorative symbol after a reach occurs for the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42; a "reach other than a reach miss" occurs, in which the final stop decorative symbol stops anywhere other than before or after the reach decorative symbol after a reach occurs; or a "complete miss," in which no reach occurs. For example, C3 = 0 to 201 corresponds to a complete miss, C3 = 202 to 208 corresponds to a reach miss before or after, and C3 = 209 to 238 corresponds to a reach other than a reach miss. The contents of the lottery (drawing for reach) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 may be individually set depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability or high probability state, whether the variation time shortening function of the first symbol display device 40 is in operation or not, and the number of active reserved balls at the start of the first symbol variation. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt (see FIG. 25) described below), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of RAM 503 when a game ball wins the special symbol 1 start winning device 33a or the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b.

Furthermore, of the three fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3, fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to increment by one in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to "0" after reaching its maximum value (i.e., "198"); fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured to increment by one in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 240, and return to "0" after reaching its maximum value (i.e., "240"); and fluctuation type counter CS3 is configured to increment by one in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 162, and return to "0" after reaching its maximum value (i.e., "162"). In the following description, fluctuation type counter CS1 will be referred to as the "first fluctuation type counter," fluctuation type counter CS2 as the "second fluctuation type counter," and fluctuation type counter CS3 as the "third fluctuation type counter," as appropriate.

The first variation type counter CS1 determines a group of general decorative pattern variation patterns, such as the reach type of the decorative pattern (third pattern) such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc., or the type of complete miss. Next, the second variation type counter CS2 determines one more variation pattern from the group of variation patterns determined by the first variation type counter CS1.

The variation pattern of the decorative pattern for Special Chart 1 is determined using the table for selecting the variation pattern of the main decorative pattern shown in Figure 12. The variation pattern of the decorative pattern for Special Chart 2 is also determined in the same way.

In other words, when the jackpot symbol counter C2 is any value between "0" and "9," a super reach group (jackpot super reach group) is determined if the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "30," "31" to "140," or "141" to "198." Specifically, when the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "30," if the second variation type counter CS2 is "0" to "120," a jackpot super reach A (variation time: 30 seconds) is determined, and if the second variation type counter CS2 is "121" to "240," a jackpot super reach B (variation time: 30 seconds) is determined. When the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "31" to "140", if the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "0" to "120", a jackpot super reach C (fluctuation time: 60 seconds) is determined, and if the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "121" to "240", a jackpot super reach D (fluctuation time: 60 seconds) is determined. When the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "141" to "198", if the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "0" to "120", a jackpot super reach E (fluctuation time: 120 seconds) is determined, and if the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "121" to "240", a jackpot super reach F (fluctuation time: 120 seconds) is determined. It has been decided that jackpot super reach A and C will display jackpot suggestion information suggesting the possibility of winning a jackpot by pressing the decision button 81 within a specified valid period as a special effect, and that jackpot super reach E will display jackpot suggestion information and execute a revival effect that is performed when a provisional stop that was not in a reach state changes into a jackpot combination.

When the jackpot symbol counter C2 is either "10" to "39" or "40" to "89," if the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "65," a normal reach group (jackpot normal reach group) is determined, and if it is "66" to "132" or "133" to "198," a super reach group (jackpot super reach group) is determined. Specifically, when the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "65," if the second variation type counter CS2 is "0" to "120," a jackpot normal reach A (variation time: 20 seconds) is determined, and if the second variation type counter CS2 is "121" to "240," a jackpot normal reach B (variation time: 20 seconds) is determined. When the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is between "66" and "132," if the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is between "0" and "120," a jackpot super reach A (fluctuation time: 30 seconds) is determined, and if the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is between "121" and "240," a jackpot super reach B is determined. When the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is between "133" and "198," if the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is between "0" and "121," a jackpot super reach C (fluctuation time: 60 seconds) is determined, and if the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is between "121" and "240," a jackpot super reach D (fluctuation time: 60 seconds) is determined. The occurrence frequency is approximately the same for jackpot normal reach A, jackpot super reach A and B, and jackpot normal reach C and D. For normal jackpot reach A, and super jackpot reach A and C, it is determined that jackpot suggestion information will be announced using the decision button 81.

Next, if the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any value between "0" and "201", a complete miss is determined; if the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any value between "202" and "208", either a normal lead with a miss before or after or a super reach with a miss before or after is determined; and if the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any value between "209" and "238", either a normal reach with a miss other than before or after or a super reach with a miss other than before or after is determined. In this way, if the jackpot lottery results in a miss, it is set up so that a complete miss is more likely.

Next, if the stop pattern selection counter C3 is between "0" and "201," the detailed type of fluctuation pattern is determined as follows. If the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is between "0" and "100," a complete miss A (fluctuation time: 10 seconds) is determined. If the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is between "101" and "150," a complete miss B (fluctuation time: 15 seconds) is determined. If the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is between "151" and "198," a complete miss C (fluctuation time: 20 seconds) is determined. Note that even in the cases of complete misses A, B, and C, jackpot suggestion information may be announced using the decision button 81. Therefore, it is not possible to determine whether a jackpot has occurred or not based solely on whether or not jackpot suggestion information has been announced.

Next, if the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any of "202" to "208," the detailed type of fluctuation pattern is determined as follows: If the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0" to "100," a normal reach A with a miss before or after (fluctuation time: 20 seconds) is determined. Also, if the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "101" to "150," a super reach A with a miss before or after (fluctuation time: 30 seconds) is determined. If the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "151" to "170," a super reach C with a miss before or after (fluctuation time: 60 seconds) is determined. If the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "171" to "198," and the fluctuation type counter CS2 is "0" to "199," a super reach E or F with a miss before or after (fluctuation time: 100 seconds) is determined. Similarly to the above, normal reach A with a miss before or after, and super reach A and C with a miss before or after, may or may not display jackpot suggestion information. The fluctuation time (100 seconds) for super reach E and F with a miss before or after, corresponds to the pattern in which jackpot super reach E and F appear to have a revival effect but end with a miss. Therefore, even in jackpot super reach E and F, it is difficult for the player to determine the result of the variable display until the revival effect is performed, unless it is suggested by jackpot suggestion information.

Next, when the stop pattern selection counter C3 is between "209" and "238," if the first variation type counter CS1 is between "0" and "100," a normal reach A (variation time: 20 seconds) with a miss other than before or after is determined, and if the first variation type counter CS1 is between "101" and "150," a super reach A (variation time: 30 seconds) with a miss other than before or after is determined, just like when the stop pattern selection counter C3 is between "202" and "208." If the first variation type counter CS1 is between "151" and "198," a super reach C (variation time: 60 seconds) with a miss other than before or after is determined. Normal reach A with a miss other than before or after, and super reach A and C with a miss other than before or after, may also announce jackpot suggestion information using the decision button 81, as described above.

The variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and are also updated repeatedly during the remaining time within that normal processing. The buffer values of the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are then obtained during the start-up winning processing.

Note that the size and range of each counter described above are merely examples and can be changed as desired. However, it is desirable to use different prime numbers for the jackpot random number counter C1, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counters CS1-CS3, and to have values that are not synchronized under any circumstances.

Next, an example of the variable display effect of the main decorative symbol SZ will be described. Figure 13(a) is an example of the variable display effect of a normal reach A with a jackpot and a normal reach A with a miss, and Figure 13(b) is an example of the variable display effect of a super reach A with a jackpot and a super reach A with a miss.

First, we will explain the normal jackpot reach A and the normal miss reach A. The third symbol display device 42 displays the main decorative symbol SZ on top of the normal background (i.e., the normal screen 43a is displayed). Based on the occurrence of a start winning, the display of the main decorative symbol SZ begins to change. This change display is a high-speed change (i.e., the high-speed change screen 43c is displayed). During high-speed change, jackpot suggestion information may be announced. Whether or not to announce this may be determined by lottery based on the value of the change type counter CS2. The jackpot suggestion information is announced by first displaying an image prompting the player to press the decision button 81 during high-speed change. Pressing the decision button 81 while this image is displayed displays an image suggesting the possibility of a jackpot result. For example, if an image saying "Chance!" is displayed, this indicates a high probability of a jackpot result. Thus, when an image prompting the player to press the decision button 81 is displayed during high-speed change, the player presses the decision button 81 to find out whether a jackpot result is likely. After the notification image is erased, the main decorative symbols SZ in the right and left columns are displayed as stopped in a reach combination (i.e., the normal reach display screen 43f is displayed), and either a jackpot or a missed reach combination is displayed as confirmed (i.e., the all symbol stopped screen 43e is displayed).

Instead of displaying an image suggesting the possibility of a jackpot result, a movable device may be activated by pressing the decision button 81.

Next, we will explain the jackpot super reach A and miss super reach A. When a starting win occurs, the main decorative pattern SZ begins to fluctuate at high speed. During this rapid fluctuation, an image prompting the player to press the decision button 81 is displayed, and by pressing the decision button 81, an image suggesting the possibility of a jackpot result is displayed. After the main decorative pattern SZ is displayed as a statically-displayed reach combination, the pattern indicating the reach combination changes to an advanced pattern HZ, and a reach development effect is executed (i.e., the advanced reach display screen 43g is displayed). For example, in the reach development effect, if the player PY completes the mission, a jackpot result is achieved, and if the player PY fails the mission, a reach-miss result is achieved. After this effect, either a jackpot or reach-miss combination is displayed as a statically-displayed development pattern HZ, and then the main decorative pattern SZ is displayed as a confirmation.

Another example of the variable display effects will be explained. Figure 14 (a) shows an example of the variable display effects for a normal jackpot reach C and a miss normal reach C, while (b) shows an example of the variable display effects for a super jackpot reach E and a miss super reach E.

First, we will explain the jackpot super reach C and the miss super reach C. In the super reach C, the reach development effect is executed for a longer period of time than in the super reach A. For example, in the super reach C, a confrontation effect between the player PY and the enemy character TK in the reach development effect is displayed. Furthermore, in the super reach C, as part of the button suggestion effect, a selection image is displayed in which a predetermined selection and confirmation are made using the decision button 81 and the selection button 82. Specifically, at the start of the confrontation effect, a character selection effect is executed using the decision button 81 and the selection button 82. For example, multiple selectable players PY are displayed, and the preferred player PY is selected using the selection button 82 and confirmed using the decision button 81. The enemy character TK displayed after the player PY is selected is an appropriate character based on the likelihood (expectation level) of a jackpot result. This suggests whether the player PY is likely to win (whether a jackpot result is likely) based on the relationship between the player PY and the enemy character TK. Once the player PY and the enemy character TK are determined, they attack each other. If the result is a jackpot, an image is displayed that makes the player PY confident of victory (an image with a shining light around the player PY). If the result is a miss, an image is displayed that makes the player PY anticipate defeat (an image with a black glow around the enemy character TK). After this effect, a combination of either a jackpot or a miss is displayed statically using the development pattern HZ, and then the main decorative pattern SZ confirms the combination.

Instead of an image that gives the player PY confidence in victory, a moving device may be activated.

Next, we will explain the Super Reach E for jackpots and the Super Reach E for misses. In a Super Reach E, the reach development effect is executed for a longer period of time than in a Super Reach A. For example, in a Super Reach E, a showdown effect is also displayed during the reach development effect. In the showdown effect, a character selection effect is executed. If the reach result is a miss, an image predicting that the player PY will lose is displayed. If the result is a jackpot, an image predicting that the player PY will lose is displayed, followed by an image encouraging the player to press the OK button 81. When the OK button 81 is pressed, the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 repeatedly flashes rapidly with strong light emission (strong light emission flashing screen 43g-1). After the display screen 42a flashes, an image confirming the player PY's victory is displayed, and the jackpot combination using the development symbol HZ is displayed in a static manner, and then the combination is confirmed by the main decorative symbol SZ.

Instead of the display screen 42a of this third pattern display device 42 flashing repeatedly and vigorously with strong light, the movable device may be activated by pressing the decision button 81.

Next, we will explain the ending effects. Figure 15 is a table for determining ending effect patterns.

After the jackpot round ends, the third symbol display device 42 displays an ending effect that displays images to give the player a break, congratulate them on reaching the final round, suggest or inform the player of information useful for the game, or warn the player of various precautions. In this embodiment, the ending effect displays images combined in a predetermined pattern. The ending information 44j that constitutes the ending effect pattern includes, for example, next game state indication information 44w (shown as "One More Time" or "Chance" in the figure) that suggests a transition to a probability variable state or a time-saving state after the jackpot round ends, manufacturer information 44x (shown as "Logo" in the figure) that indicates the manufacturer, card removal prevention information 44y (shown as "Prepaid Card" in the figure) that warns the player not to forget to remove the prepaid card, and addiction prevention information 44z (shown as "Enjoy in Moderation" in the figure) that warns the player that pachinko and pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation. The next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal prevention information 44y, and addiction prevention information 44z are displayed for, for example, 10 seconds each, and the manufacturer information 44x is displayed for 5 seconds.

The ending presentation for the 16R probability variable jackpot on special chart 1 is a pattern in which next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal reminder information 44y, and addiction prevention information 44z are displayed in that order over a 35-second period. For the 16R probability variable jackpot on special chart 2, the ending presentation is a pattern in which next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal reminder information 44y, and addiction prevention information 44z are displayed in that order over a 30-second period.

The ending presentation of the 8R probability variable jackpot on special chart 1 is a pattern in which next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal reminder information 44y are displayed in that order over a 25-second period. The ending presentation of the 8R probability variable jackpot on special chart 2 is a pattern in which next game state suggestion information 44w and card removal reminder information 44y are displayed in that order over a 20-second period. The ending presentation of the 8R normal jackpot on special charts 1 and 2 is similar to the 8R probability variable jackpot ending presentation on special charts 1 and 2 described above, except that the next game state suggestion information 44w is "chance" (indicating that the next game state will be a time-saving state).

As shown in Figure 10, a second symbol random number counter C4 is used to draw the second symbol of the second symbol display device 41. The second symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within a range of, for example, "0" to "250" and returns to "0" after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 250). The second symbol random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt (see Figure 22) described below) and is acquired when the gaming ball passes through either the left or right normal symbol starting winning device 34. There are 149 random number values that can result in a winning combination, ranging from "5" to "153."

In particular, when the second symbol random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. The initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is a loop counter (value = 0 to 250) similar to the second symbol random number counter C4, and is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 22) described below, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing (see FIG. 19) described below. The second symbol random number counter C4 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 22) described below), and is stored in the second symbol reserve storage area of RAM 503 when the gaming ball passes through the normal symbol starting winning device 34.

In other words, RAM 503 also has a second symbol reserve storage area that is separate from the reserved ball storage area, and is provided with a second symbol reserve storage area consisting of one second symbol execution area and four second symbol reserve areas (second symbol reserve areas 1 to 4). Each of these areas stores the values of the second symbol random number counter C4 in chronological order according to the winning history of game balls in the normal symbol start winning device 34.

The second-missing symbol counter C5 is updated once each time the second-symbol control process of the normal process in FIG. 19 described below is executed, and its value is updated and stored in the second-missing symbol buffer of the counter buffer. When the second-symbol random number counter C4 is stored in the second-symbol reserved ball storage area, the second-symbol missing symbol counter C5 updated and stored in the second-symbol missing symbol buffer is also stored in the second-symbol reserved ball storage area. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10, if the value of the second-symbol random number counter C4 is a failure, the display unit 41b with an "X" is lit based on the value of the second-symbol missing symbol counter C5 in the second-symbol reserved ball storage area. It is also possible to not have the second-symbol missing symbol counter C5, and to display the second-symbol variation result based solely on the second-symbol random number counter C4. In other words, if the second symbol random number counter C4 wins, the display section 41a with a "○" will light up, and if it loses, the display section 41b with an "X" will light up.

Next, the control processes executed by the CPU 501 in the main control unit 261 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 16 to 26. The processes executed by the CPU 501 can be broadly divided into main processing, which is activated when the power is turned on; timer interrupt processing, which is activated periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment); and NMI interrupt processing, which is activated when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For ease of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing, the start-up winning processing executed in the timer interrupt processing, the look-ahead lottery processing executed in the start-up winning processing, and the NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the main processing.

Figure 22 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In Figure 22, first, in step S601, the process of reading various winning switches is executed. That is, the status of various switches connected to the main control unit 261 (except for the RAM clear switch 323) is read, and the status of those switches is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Then, in step S602, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second pattern random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches its maximum value ("599" in this embodiment). The initial value second pattern random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches its maximum value ("250" in this embodiment). The updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 503 (see Figure 10).

Furthermore, in the following step S603, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot symbol counter C2, and stop pattern selection counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot symbol counter C2, and stop pattern selection counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and are each cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches its maximum value (in this embodiment, "599", "9", and "250", respectively). The updated values of each counter C1 to C3 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 503 (see Figure 10).

Then, in step S604, the start winning process is executed in response to a win in the start winning device 33a for special symbol 1 and the start winning device 33b for special symbol 2. This start winning process is explained using the flowchart in Figure 23, which will be described later.

Then, in step S605, launch control processing is executed. This launch control processing is explained below with reference to the flowchart in Figure 25.

Specifically, in step S721, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 determines whether the launch permission signal S7 from the launch control unit 312 is ON, as shown in FIG. 8. If the launch permission signal S7 is ON, proceed to step S722; if it is OFF, terminate this processing. In step S722, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 outputs a launch control signal S8 and a ball feed control signal S9 to the launch control unit 312, controls the launch of game balls by the launch unit 229, and proceeds to step S723. In step S723, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 sets a launch operation command indicating that a game ball launch operation has been performed. After performing this launch control processing, the CPU 501 temporarily terminates this timer interrupt processing.

Referring to Figure 23, we will explain the start-up winning process performed by the main control unit 261.

In step S701, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the game ball has entered the special game ball 1 start winning device 33a or the special game ball 2 start winning device 33b based on the detection information from the operating port switch. If the game ball has entered the special game ball 1 start winning device 33a or the special game ball 2 start winning device 33b, the process proceeds to step S702; if not, the process ends.

In step S702, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 determines whether the number of pending balls N in operation of the first pattern display device 40 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the number of pending balls N is less than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S703; if not, the process terminates. In step S703, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 increments the number of pending balls N in operation by 1. In step S704, the main control unit 261 converts the number of pending balls N incremented in step S703 into a pending ball storage area designation command, and sets it so that it can be output to the sub-control unit 262 together with the predictive variable pattern designation command described below.

In step S705, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 obtains random numbers related to determining the winning or losing outcome of the first symbol and the variation pattern of the third symbol. Specifically, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot symbol counter C2, and stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in step S603, and the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are stored in the first empty area of the first to fourth reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area of RAM 503 shown in Figure 10.

In step S706, the main control unit 261 executes a pre-reading lottery process that is carried out prior to the fluctuation start process shown in Figure 19 described above.

The advance reading lottery process will be explained with reference to Figure 24.

In step S711, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs a look-ahead lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached at the time of storage based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. Specifically, whether or not the result of the look-ahead lottery is a jackpot is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the mode at that time (whether it is in a special state or a normal state). The hit value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is as described above.

In step S712, if the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines that the result of the advance lottery is a jackpot, it determines which jackpot symbol will be selected, corresponding to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area.

In step S713, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines in advance the fluctuation pattern (jackpot presentation pattern) to be used in the event of a jackpot. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 checks the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of RAM 503 in that order, as in the fluctuation start process described above, and determines the fluctuation pattern in advance.

If it is determined in step S711 that the result of the advance reading lottery is not a jackpot, in step S714, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 sets the stop pattern to one that will stop and display the result of the advance reading lottery as a losing pattern.

In step S715, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines in advance the fluctuation pattern (miss effect pattern) to be used in the event of a miss, and sets this miss fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern designation command. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 checks the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, which are stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area in RAM 503, in that order, and determines the fluctuation pattern in advance.

In step S716, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines in advance the addition of presentation time, that is, the addition of presentation time for the jackpot variation pattern determined in step S713 or the miss variation pattern determined in step S715. More specifically, based on the value of the variation type counter CS3, a variation pattern is determined in advance, including an increase in presentation time due to the decorative pattern (third pattern) of the middle decorative pattern row on the third pattern display device 42 sliding to a stop (an increase in the time until the decorative pattern of the middle decorative pattern row slides and is displayed as a stop).

In step S717, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation pattern previously determined in step S713, or a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the loss fluctuation pattern determined in step S505.

In step S718, if the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has passed through steps S712 and S713, it sets a decorative pattern designation command corresponding to the jackpot pattern ("first specific winning pattern," "second specific winning pattern," or "non-specific winning pattern") of the first pattern display device 40 determined in step S712; if the CPU 501 has passed through steps S714 and S715, it sets a decorative pattern designation command corresponding to the losing pattern of the first pattern display device 40 determined in advance in step S714.

In step S719, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a performance time addition command corresponding to the performance time addition previously determined in step S716, and then ends this processing.

Figure 26 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing. This processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main control unit 261 at the time of power cut to be stored in the backup area of RAM 503.

In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal S1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control unit 261. The CPU 501 then suspends the control it is currently executing and starts the NMI interrupt processing shown in Figure 26. The NMI interrupt processing shown in Figure 26 is stored in the ROM 502 of the main control unit 261. For a predetermined time after the power outage signal S1 is output, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the main control unit 261 can execute its processing, and the NMI interrupt processing is executed within this predetermined time.

In the NMI interrupt processing in Figure 26, in step S801, information about the occurrence of a power outage is set in the backup area. In this embodiment, a flag is set for the information about the occurrence of a power outage and stored in the backup area.

Next, the main processing performed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261, and this main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 executes initialization processing upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, in step S102, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 executes wait processing for, for example, about one second, to wait for the sub-control units (sub-control unit 262, dispensing control unit 311, etc.) to become operable. In the following step S103, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 permits RAM access.

Then, data backup processing is performed on RAM 503 in CPU 501. That is, in step S104, CPU 501 of main control unit 261 determines whether RAM erase switch 323 on power supply monitoring board 261b is pressed (ON). If it is OFF, proceed to step S105; if it is ON, proceed to step S113. In the following step S105, CPU 501 of main control unit 261 determines whether power failure information is set in the backup area of RAM 503 (whether the power failure information flag is set). In addition, in step S106, CPU 501 of main control unit 261 calculates a RAM judgment value. In the following step S107, CPU 501 of main control unit 261 determines whether this RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power failure, i.e., the validity of the backup. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 503. Additionally, the validity of the backup can also be determined by whether or not the keywords written in a specified area of RAM 503 are correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, if you want to return the machine to its initial state when powering it on, for example, when the hall opens for business, you power it on while pressing the RAM clear switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM clear switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to RAM 503 initialization processing (step S113, etc.). Similarly, if power outage information has not been set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process clears the used RAM area and proceeds to RAM 503 initialization processing (step S113, etc.). That is, in step S113, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 clears the used RAM 503 area to "0" and executes RAM 503 initialization processing.

In the following step S114, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 sends a payout initialization command. In this way, the payout initialization command is output to the payout control unit 311 when the main control unit 261 is initialized.

Also, in step S115, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sends a power-on command to the sub-control board 262a. This power-on command includes a command for identifying the model of the pachinko machine, so the model can be identified on the sub-side, such as the sub-control board 262a or display control device 45, based on the content of the command.

In step S116, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 performs initial setting of the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit). In step S117, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 sets interrupt permission and proceeds to normal processing (see Figure 17), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, processing upon power recovery (processing upon recovery from power outage) is executed, provided that power outage information has been set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. That is, in step S108, the power outage information is cleared. In step S109, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 sends a payout return command to the payout control device 311 and instructs the payout control device 311 to start payout control. Details will be described later, but when the payout control device 311 receives the payout return command from the main control unit 261, it returns to normal and starts payout control.

In step S110, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 sends a command to return the sub-control unit to the gaming state it was in when power was cut off, and in step S111, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 initializes the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit). Furthermore, in step S112, interrupt permission is enabled, and then the process proceeds to normal processing (see Figure 17), which will be described later. For example, even if a power cut occurs during normal processing, the process will continue until the final step of the normal processing (the "RAM access prohibited" step shown in Figure 17) is executed before entering the power-off state, and therefore, after power is restored, the process will resume from step S201, the first step of normal processing.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 17. In this normal processing, the main game processing is executed. In summary, steps S201 to S207 are executed as regular processing at a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S210 and S211 is executed in the remaining time.

In FIG. 17, first, in step S201, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 performs external output processing to transmit output data such as commands updated in the previous processing to each sub-control unit. Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information, and if there is winning detection information, it transmits a prize ball payout command corresponding to the number of acquired game balls to the payout control unit 311. In addition, in conjunction with the first pattern variation display of the first pattern display unit 40 (variation display of the first segment display unit 40a), the third pattern display unit 42 also displays a decorative pattern (third pattern) variation. When the first pattern display unit 40 displays the first pattern variation, a variation pattern designation command, a decorative pattern designation command, a full stop command (confirmation command), etc. are transmitted to the sub-control unit 262 in the external output processing.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the first symbol starts to change, a predetermined number (e.g., three) of commands (i.e., three every 4 msec) are sent for each external output process of normal processing in the order of change pattern designation command → effect command (a command for designating changes to change time, etc.) → decorative symbol designation command, and a stop all command is sent when the change time has elapsed. Also, after the first symbol starts to change, a predetermined number (e.g., three) of commands (i.e., three every 4 msec) are sent for each external output process of normal processing in the order of change pattern designation command → effect command → decorative symbol designation command, and a stop all command is sent when the change time has elapsed.

The variation pattern designation command is a command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative pattern (third pattern) that is variably displayed on the third pattern display device 42. The variation pattern designation command is sent from the main control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and then sent from the sub-control device 262 to the display control device 45. Based on the transmitted variation pattern designation command, the display control device 45 controls the third pattern display device 42 to display and execute the variation pattern of the decorative pattern.

The decorative pattern designation command is a command for designating whether the varying display performance of the decorative pattern (third pattern) on the third pattern display device 42 will be a first jackpot, second jackpot, third jackpot, or miss. The decorative pattern designation command is sent from the main control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and then sent from the sub-control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 controls the display of the third pattern display device 42 so that the display result of the varying pattern of the decorative pattern corresponds to the result (first jackpot, second jackpot, third jackpot) that corresponds to the decorative pattern designation command sent.

The all stop command is a command to instruct the stopping of the changing pattern of the decorative pattern (third pattern) displayed in a changing manner on the third pattern display device 42. The all stop command is sent from the main control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and then sent from the sub-control device 262 to the display control device 45. Based on the all stop command sent, the display control device 45 controls the third pattern display device 42 to stop and display the changing pattern of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 may send a fluctuation pattern designation command and an effect command (a command for designating changes to the fluctuation time, etc.) to the sub-control unit 262 during the external output process of normal processing (step S201). In other words, the amount of time to be added to the fluctuation time (the additional time due to the decorative symbol sliding effect described above) is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS3, and the effect command is used to appropriately instruct the sub-control unit 262 on this added time. Therefore, after the first symbol begins to fluctuate, a predetermined number (e.g., three) of commands are sent each time the external output process of normal processing is performed (i.e., three every 4 msec) in the order of fluctuation pattern designation command → effect command → decorative symbol designation command, and a full stop command may be sent when the fluctuation time has elapsed.

Next, in step S202, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 updates the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3. Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are each incremented by 1, and are cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches its maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment). The updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 503 shown in Figure 10.

Next, in step S203 of Figure 17, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads the prize ball count signal, payout abnormality signal, and lower tray full signal received from the payout control device 311. Then, in step S204, a first pattern change process is executed to display the first pattern change using the first pattern display device 40. This first pattern change process determines whether a jackpot has occurred and sets the change pattern of the first pattern. However, details of the first pattern change process will be described later.

In step S205, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes a next gaming state setting process to set the jackpot lottery probability for the next gaming state. Details of the next gaming state setting process will be described later.

Then, in step S206, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 executes a large prize opening/closing process to open or close the large prize opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 during a large prize round game state. That is, the large prize opening 32a is opened for each round during a large prize round, and for each round, it is determined whether the maximum opening time for the large prize opening 32a has elapsed or whether a specified number of game balls have entered the large prize opening 32a. If either of these conditions is met, the opening of the large prize opening 32a for that round is stopped and closed, and if there are remaining rounds, the opening of the large prize opening 32a is repeated for the remaining number of rounds.

In step S207, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 controls the display of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 41. Briefly, when the gaming ball passes through the normal symbol starting winning device 34, the second symbol random number counter C4 is acquired each time, and the second symbol is displayed on the display units 41a and 41b of the second symbol display device 41. The second symbol is then selected based on the value of the second symbol random number counter C4. When the second symbol is selected, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs a process for opening the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b for a predetermined period of time, as shown in step S208. Although not explained further, the second symbol random number counter C4 is updated by the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 22, similar to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot symbol counter C2, and stop pattern selection counter C3.

Also, in step S209, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether power outage information has been set in the backup area of RAM 503 (whether the power outage information flag is set). If power outage information has not been set, the process proceeds to step S210; if power outage information has been set, the process proceeds to step S213.

Then, in step S210, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived, i.e., whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, during the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal processing, the initial value random number counter CINI1, the initial value second pattern random number counter CINI2, and the variable type counters CS1 to CS3 are repeatedly updated (steps S211 and S212). That is, in step S211, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second pattern random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches its maximum value ("599" in this embodiment). The updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 503. Similarly, the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches its maximum value ("250" in this embodiment) and is then incremented by 1. The updated value of the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 503.

Furthermore, in step S212, the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches its maximum value (in this embodiment, "198", "240", "162") and is then incremented by 1. The updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 503.

Here, the execution time for each process in steps S201 to S208 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly using this remaining time to update the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second pattern random number counter CINI2, it becomes possible to randomly update the initial value random number counter CINI1 (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) and the initial value second pattern random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the second pattern random number counter C4).

Also, if power failure information is set in step S209 and processing proceeds to step S213, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 disables interrupts. Next, in step S214, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 sends a power failure notification command indicating that the power has been immediately shut off to the other control units. Next, in step S215, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 stops outputting control signals. Next, in step S216, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 calculates a RAM judgment value and saves it in a backup area. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at a working area address in RAM 503. Next, in step S217, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 disables RAM access. Thereafter, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the possibility of the power being completely shut off and processing being unable to be executed.

Next, the first symbol change processing in step S204 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 18.

In FIG. 18, in step S401, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 determines whether or not a jackpot is currently being played. The jackpot period includes the period during the special game displayed on the third symbol display device 42 at the time of the jackpot, and the period during a predetermined time after the special game ends. In the following step S402, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 determines whether or not the first symbol is being displayed in a variable manner by the first symbol display device 40. If the jackpot is not being played and the first symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S403, where the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 determines whether or not the number of pending balls N of the first symbol display device 40 is greater than "0." If the jackpot is being played or the number of pending balls N is "0," the process ends.

Also, if the current state is neither a jackpot nor the first symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the number of active reserved balls N>0, proceed to step S404. In step S404, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 subtracts "1" from the number of active reserved balls N. In step S405, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the reserved ball storage area. This data shift process shifts the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the reserved ball storage area sequentially to the execution area, with the data in each area being shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3.

Then, in step S406, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 executes a fluctuation start process. Here, the fluctuation start process will be explained in detail using the flowchart in Figure 19. In step S501, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. Specifically, whether or not a jackpot has occurred is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the current mode (whether it is in a special mode or a normal mode). As mentioned above, in the normal low probability state, the winning value (2 balls) is "150, 450" out of the values "0" to "599" of the jackpot random number counter C1, and in the high probability state, the winning value (4 balls) is "50, 150, 350, 450".

If the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines that a jackpot has been reached, in step S502 it determines the jackpot pattern corresponding to the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, i.e., which of the first to third symbols to be displayed on the first segment display unit 40a of the first pattern display device 40 will be displayed. In other words, it determines the jackpot pattern ("first jackpot pattern," "second jackpot pattern," or "third jackpot pattern") corresponding to the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 based on the special jackpot pattern 1 lottery table or special jackpot pattern 2 lottery table (see FIG. 11) which shows the correspondence between the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 and the patterns.

Next, in step S503, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the fluctuation pattern (jackpot presentation pattern) to be used when a jackpot occurs. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 checks the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, stored in the counter buffer of RAM 503, in that order, without using the stop pattern selection counter C3, and determines the fluctuation pattern.

In other words, based on the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2, it is determined whether the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 will be displayed in "Stop Pattern 3" for a normal jackpot (non-specific jackpot), or in "Stop Pattern 4" for a special jackpot (specific jackpot). The type of "Stop Pattern 3" or "Stop Pattern 4" determined in this manner is further determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. In other words, a group of general decorative symbol variation patterns is determined, such as the reach type of the decorative symbol (third symbol), such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc. Next, from the group of general decorative symbol variation patterns determined in this manner, one variation pattern is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, more detailed decorative symbol variation modes are determined, such as setting a predetermined time for the elapsed time from the occurrence of a reach until the final stop decorative symbol (in this embodiment, the middle decorative symbol) stops. In addition, the following relationships in the event of a jackpot, namely the relationship between the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the stop pattern, the relationship between the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern, and the relationship between the value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the stop pattern time, are each predetermined by a jackpot table or the like.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S501 that the jackpot is not a jackpot, in step S504, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the stop symbol to a losing symbol, i.e., a stop symbol that causes the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 to stop and display the fourth symbol.

Next, in step S505, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the fluctuation pattern (miss effect pattern) to be used when a miss occurs, and sets the miss fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern designation command. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 checks the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area in RAM 503, in that order, and determines the fluctuation pattern.

In other words, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, the system determines which stop pattern to use: "Stop Pattern 1," a "reach before or after" in which the final decorative symbol stops one position before or after the reach decorative symbol after the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 has reached a reach; "Stop Pattern 2," a "reach other than a reach before or after" in which the final decorative symbol stops somewhere other than before or after the reach decorative symbol; or "Stop Pattern 0," a "complete miss" in which no reach occurs. For example, if the determined stop pattern is "Stop Pattern 1," which is a reach before or after, then the system determines a variation pattern that specifies the reach type of the decorative symbol (third symbol), such as a normal reach or super reach, from the reach before or after reach variation pattern group based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, thereby determining a general decorative symbol variation pattern group. Here, we assume that a normal reach is determined. Next, from the group of normal reach variation patterns of the rough decorative symbols determined in this way, another variation pattern is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, a more detailed decorative symbol variation mode is determined, such as setting a predetermined time as the elapsed time until the final stopped decorative symbol (in this embodiment, the middle decorative symbol) stops after the reach occurs. Note that the following relationships in the case of a miss, namely the relationship between the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern, the relationship between the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern, and the relationship between the value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the stop pattern time, are each specified in advance using a table for misses, etc.

In this embodiment, one of the above-mentioned tables for losses is used, for example, when the probability is low, the first pattern display device 40 is in the state of the variation time shortening function, and the number of pending operations for the first pattern at the start of the first pattern variation is "0." When the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is "0 to 201," this corresponds to no reach (complete miss), "202 to 208" corresponds to a reach with a miss before or after, and "209 to 238" corresponds to a reach other than a miss before or after.

Next, in step S506, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the addition of presentation time, that is, the addition of presentation time for the jackpot variation pattern determined in step S503 or the miss variation pattern determined in step S505. More specifically, based on the value of the variation type counter CS3, a variation pattern is determined that includes an increase in presentation time due to the decorative pattern (third pattern) of the middle decorative pattern row on the third pattern display device 42 sliding to a stop (an increase in the time until the decorative pattern of the middle decorative pattern row slides and is displayed as a stop).

In addition, in step S507, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in step S503, or a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the loss fluctuation pattern determined in step S505.

Next, in step S508, if steps S502 and S503 have been executed, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a decorative pattern designation command corresponding to the jackpot pattern ("first specific winning pattern," "second specific winning pattern," or "non-specific winning pattern") of the first pattern display device 40 determined in step S502; if steps S504 and S505 have been executed, the CPU 501 sets a decorative pattern designation command corresponding to the losing pattern of the first pattern display device 40 determined in step S504.

Next, in step S509, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 sets a performance time addition command corresponding to the performance time addition determined in step S506.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 18, if step S402 is YES, i.e., the first symbol is being displayed as it changes, proceed to step S407, where the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the change time for the first symbol has elapsed. This change time for the first symbol is determined based on the change pattern and performance time addition determined as described above with reference to Figure 19; in other words, the change time for the first symbol is determined according to the change pattern for the first symbol, and when this change time has elapsed, step S407 is judged as YES. If the change time has not elapsed, proceed to step S408; if the change time has elapsed, proceed to step S409.

Then, in step S408, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 updates the variable display of the first pattern on the first pattern display device 40. In other words, the variable display on the first segment display unit 40a of the first pattern display device 40 continues, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in step S409, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stops the varying display of the first symbol and sets the stopped symbol of the first symbol as the displayed symbol. In other words, if a first jackpot symbol is determined in step S502 of FIG. 19, after the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 varies, the first segment display unit 40a is displayed as a stopped symbol with the first symbol. If a second jackpot symbol is determined in step S502 of FIG. 19, after the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 varies, the first segment display unit 40a is displayed as a stopped symbol with the second symbol. If a third jackpot symbol is determined in step S502 of FIG. 19, after the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 varies, the first segment display unit 40a is displayed as a stopped symbol with the third symbol. If a losing symbol is determined in step S504 of FIG. 19, after the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 changes, the first segment display unit 40a will stop and display the fourth symbol (indicating a loss).

Next, in step S410, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a full stop command to instruct the stopping of the changing pattern of the decorative pattern (third pattern) displayed in a changing manner on the third pattern display device 42, and then ends this processing.

Next, the next game state setting process in step S205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 20.

In step S561, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether a guaranteed jackpot has occurred based on the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2. If a guaranteed jackpot has occurred, the process proceeds to step S562; if not, the process proceeds to step S564.

In step S562, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 sets the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the special chart 1 and special chart 2 jackpot lottery table shown in Figure 11 to the value at the time of high probability, and proceeds to step S563. In step S563, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 sets a high probability support state transition command and ends this processing. As a result, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 will refer to the value at the time of high probability as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 when determining the next jackpot.

In step S564, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether a normal jackpot has occurred based on the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2. If a normal jackpot has occurred, the process proceeds to step S565; if not, the process ends.

In step S565, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 sets the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the special chart 1 and special chart 2 jackpot lottery table to the low probability value, and proceeds to step S566. As a result, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 will refer to the low probability value as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 when determining the next jackpot.

In step S566, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 determines whether the reference in step S564 was to the special jackpot 1 lottery table. If the reference is to the special jackpot 1 lottery table, the process proceeds to step S567; if not, the process proceeds to step S569. In step S567, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 sets a low-probability support state transition command. The low-probability support state transition command is a command that indicates the occurrence of 100 time-saving states after the end of a normal jackpot round of play.

In step S568, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 determines whether the reference in step S564 was to the special jackpot 2 lottery table. If the reference is to the special jackpot 2 lottery table, the process proceeds to step S569; if not, the process terminates. In step S569, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 sets a low-probability state transition command. The low-probability state transition command is a command indicating that no time reduction will be applied after the end of the jackpot round of a normal jackpot.

Next, we will explain the process for opening and closing the special prize opening in step S206 described above. Figure 21 is a flowchart showing the process for opening and closing the special prize opening.

In step S581, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 determines whether the round start flag was set to on in step S553 described above. If the round start flag is set to on, the process proceeds to step S583; if not, the process ends. In step S583, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 determines whether it is time to start the nth round (the first round if this is the first round). If it is time to start the nth round, the process proceeds to step S585; if not, the process ends.

In step S585, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 opens the special prize opening 32a and proceeds to step S587. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 turns on the solenoid to open the door of the special prize opening 32a in the variable prize winning device 32. In step S587, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether it is the end timing of the nth round. The end timing of each round, i.e., the opening time of the special prize opening 32a, is predetermined based on the value of the special prize symbol counter C2. If the value of the special prize symbol counter C2 is 90 to 99, the opening time of the special prize opening 32a is set to a short time that makes it difficult for game balls to enter. For other values of the special prize symbol counter C2, a time sufficient for the upper limit number of game balls to enter is set.

If it is the end of the nth round in step S587, proceed to step S589; if not, terminate this process. In step S589, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 closes the large prize opening 32a and proceeds to step S591. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 turns off the solenoid to close the door of the large prize opening 32a in the variable prize device 32. The time for which the large prize opening 32a is closed between each round, i.e., the interval time between rounds, is predetermined.

In step S591, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 determines whether or not it is the final round. If it is the final round, the process proceeds to step S593; if not, the process returns to step S583. In step S593, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 turns off the round start flag and ends this processing.

Next, we will explain the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311. Figure 27 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, which is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step S901, initial setting processing is performed when the power is turned on. Specifically, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 sets the stack address and interrupt mode. In step S902, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 allows RAM access, and in step S903, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 sets the external interrupt vector.

Then, in step S904, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 determines whether power outage information is set in the backup area of RAM 513. Also, in step S905, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 calculates a RAM judgment value, and in the following step S906, it determines whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, i.e., the validity of the backup. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 513. It is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether keywords written in a specified area of RAM 513 are saved correctly.

Next, in step S907, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs initial settings for the RAM 513 when power is restored. Specifically, when the main control device 261 is initialized, a payout initialization command is sent from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and when the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 receives the payout initialization command from the main control device 261, it performs initial settings for the RAM 513 when power is restored in step S907. In other words, it initializes the RAM area and begins controlling the payout of game balls.

Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed (ON) when the power is turned on, the main control unit 261 is initialized and a payout initialization command is sent from this main control unit 261 to the payout control unit 311, and the CPU 511 of the payout control unit 311 performs initialization processing of the RAM 513 based on the payout initialization command from the main control unit 261.

Next, in step S908, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 performs initial settings on the peripheral devices of the CPU 511. Specifically, the CPU peripheral device is a timer control device called a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit), and this CTC is set to a predetermined value to generate a timer interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms).

Next, in step S909, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets interrupt permission and proceeds to the payout control process described below.

On the other hand, if no power outage information is set in step S904, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step S906, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 similarly clears all areas of RAM 513 to "0" (step S910) and performs initialization processing (step S911).

Next, the payout control process flow will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 28.

In Figure 28, in step S1001, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 acquires and stores commands from the main control device 261. The commands stored here include 17 types of commands in total, including 15 types of prize ball commands (15 types of prize ball commands for instructing the payout of 1 to 15 balls), a payout return command for instructing the payout control device 311 to start payout control, and a payout initialization command for instructing the payout control device 311 to initialize payouts.

In step S1002, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not a payout permission has been received. In other words, it determines whether or not a payout return command or a prize ball command has been received. In addition, in step S1003, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 checks the state return switch (not shown), and if it determines that the state return operation should be started, it executes the state return operation.

Then, in step S1004, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 sets the lower tray to full or the lower tray full/unfull state depending on the change in the state of the lower tray 15. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower tray full switch, and when the lower tray is full, the lower tray full state is set, and when the lower tray is no longer full, the lower tray full/unfull state is set.

Also, in step S1005, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 sets the tank ball absent state or the tank ball absent cancellation state depending on the change in the tank ball state. That is, it determines the tank ball absent state based on the detection signal of the tank ball absent switch, and when the tank ball is absent, it sets the tank ball absent state, and when the tank ball is no longer absent, it sets the tank ball absent cancellation state.

Then, in step S1006, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 determines whether or not a condition requiring notification exists, and if a condition requiring notification exists, the notification is issued using a 7-segment LED provided in the dispensing control device 311.

In steps S1007 to S1009, the prize ball payout process is executed. In this case, if the prize balls are not in a payout-disabled state and the total number of prize balls stored in step S1001 is not "0" (steps S1007 and S1008 are both NO), the process proceeds to step S1009, and the prize ball control process (see Figure 29, described below) begins. Also, if the prize balls are in a payout-disabled state or the total number of prize balls is 0 (steps S1007 and S1008 are YES), the process proceeds to the loan ball payout process.

Then, in steps S1010 to S1012, the loan ball payout process is executed. In this case, if the loan ball payout is not unavailable and a loan ball payout request has been received from the card unit (step S1010: NO, S1011: YES), the process proceeds to step S1012, and the loan ball control process (see Figure 30, described below) is initiated. If the loan ball payout is unavailable or a loan ball payout request has not been received (step S1010: YES or S1011: NO), the subsequent vibration motor control (step S1013) is executed.

In step S1013, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 controls the vibrator 360 (see Figure 3) (vibration motor control). Then, in step S1014, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 determines whether a power outage has occurred. If a power outage has occurred, the process proceeds to step S1015; if not, the process returns to step S1001. In step S1015, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 sets information about the occurrence of a power outage, and in step S1016, it creates a RAM judgment value. Thereafter, the process enters an infinite loop in preparation for the possibility that the power will be completely cut off and processing will no longer be possible.

Here, in the prize ball control process shown in Figure 29, in step S1101, the payout motor 358a is driven to pay out prize balls. In the following step S1102, it is determined whether the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal based on the detection results of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1103, where the payout motor 358a is driven to perform a retry process and a stop process for the payout motor 358a is performed, and then the process returns to the payout control process of Figure 28.

Also, if the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1104, where it is determined whether the game balls are being counted normally based on the detection result of the payout count switch. If the game balls are not being counted normally, the process proceeds to step S1105, where the payout motor 358a is driven to perform a retry process and a stop process for the payout motor 358a is executed, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 28.

Furthermore, if the game ball count is normal, proceed to step S1106, where it is determined whether the number of game balls counted by the payout count switch has reached the total number of prize balls and payout has been completed. If payout has been completed, step S1107 executes the process of stopping the payout motor 358a, and then returns to the payout control process of Figure 28.

In addition, in the ball dispensing control process shown in Figure 30, in step S1201, the payout motor 358a is driven to dispense the loaned balls. In the following step S1202, it is determined whether the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal based on the detection results of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1203, where the payout motor 358a is driven to perform a retry process and a stop process for the payout motor 358a, and then the process returns to the payout control process of Figure 28.

Also, if the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1204, where it is determined whether the game balls are being counted normally based on the detection result of the payout count switch. If the game balls are not being counted normally, the process proceeds to step S1205, where the payout motor 358a is driven to perform a retry process and a stop process for the payout motor 358a is executed, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 28.

Furthermore, if the game ball count is normal, proceed to step S1206, where it is determined whether the number of game balls counted by the payout count switch has reached the specified number of loaned balls (25 balls) and payout has been completed. If payout has been completed, step S1207 executes the process of stopping the payout motor 358a, and then returns to the payout control process of Figure 28.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 311, and this NMI interrupt causes the state of the payout control device 311 at the time of power outage due to a power outage or the like to be stored in the backup area of RAM 513. Similarly, for a predetermined time after the power outage signal S1 is output, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the payout control device 311's processing can be executed. In other words, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the power outage signal S1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control it is currently executing and starts the NMI interrupt processing of Figure 26. The contents of this processing are as explained in Figure 26.

Next, the main processing and normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be explained using Figures 31 and 32. Figure 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing executed by the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262, and this main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on. Figure 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal processing executed by the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262.

First, in step S2001, the CPU 551 of the sub-control unit 262 executes initial setting processing upon power-on. Specifically, it performs port setting (port I/O switching and initial value output), timer setting (1 millisecond interval timer, LCD command strobe output timer), and interrupt setting (sub-command strobe interrupt).

Furthermore, in step S2002, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the power-off process is incomplete. Specifically, it determines whether all of the various lamps (annular illumination section 102, central illumination section 103, etc.) on the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 are turned off and whether the speaker is muted. If the power-off process is incomplete, the process proceeds to step S2004; if not, the process proceeds to step S2003.

Next, in step S2003, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines whether the RAM of the sub-controller 262 is corrupted. If it is corrupted, the process proceeds to step S2004; if not, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2004, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 performs a read/write check on the RAM area of the sub-controller 262. Then, in step S2005, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines whether the RAM of the sub-controller 262 is normal. If the RAM of the sub-controller 262 is normal, the process proceeds to step S2006; if it is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S2012. In step S2006, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 writes RAM corruption check data for each area of the RAM 553, and sets the RAM corruption check data to determine that the RAM is corrupted if there is an abnormality in reading the data.

Then, in step S2007, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the power has been turned on after being turned off. If it has been turned on after being turned off, proceed to step S2008; if not, proceed to step S2009.

In step S2008, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 clears RAM areas other than the unprocessed RAM area. Specifically, the unprocessed RAM area is an area that stores information that would cause problems for the system if the data were cleared, and is an area for information that should be retained unless the RAM area is destroyed. Examples include sub-command reception buffers and power-on information. When the main control unit 261 is powered off and the sub-controller 262 is reset (when a power-off notification command is received from the main control unit 261), the RAM areas other than the unprocessed RAM area are cleared.

In step S2009, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets interrupt permission. In step S2010, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the initial values of the RAM of the sub-control device 262. In step S2011, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the performance initialization flag to "1" and proceeds to normal processing shown in Figure 32.

In step S2012, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 issues a RAM abnormality alert and enters an infinite loop. For example, the alert may be issued by unconditionally lighting a specified lamp.

As shown in FIG. 32, in step S2101, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether 1 ms or more has passed since the start of normal processing. If 1 ms or more has passed, the process proceeds to step S2102; if not, the process proceeds to step S2110.

In step S2102, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs lamp output processing. Specifically, it performs lamp output in accordance with the varying pattern presentation of the decorative pattern (third pattern) on the third pattern display device 42.

In step S2103, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 issues a power-on notification. Specifically, a 30-second notification is issued using a power-on command. Specifically, the power-on notification is issued by displaying an image on the third symbol display device 42 indicating that the power has been turned on, or by lighting up a lamp in the illumination unit 300 in a pattern indicating that the power has been turned on.

In step S2104, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a customer waiting effect. Specifically, it switches between the title and a still image. In other words, it displays a so-called demo screen.

In step S2105, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a process to update the display of the number of reserved symbols for the first symbol variation. Specifically, this process to update the display of the number of reserved symbols is a process to also display the display corresponding to the reserved lamp 40c of the first symbol display device 40 on the third symbol display device 42.

In step S2106, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs frame button input monitoring and effect processing. Specifically, this frame button input monitoring and effect processing is intended to provide model-specific effects in response to pressing of a frame button in pachinko machines equipped with frame buttons that can be pressed by the player (for example, the up selection button 71, down selection button 72, and frame button 80 shown in Figure 1). Therefore, this processing is not necessary for pachinko machines that do not have such frame buttons.

In step S2107, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs lamp editing processing. Specifically, it performs processing to edit the lamp lighting pattern in the illumination unit 300 that corresponds to (synchronizes with) the changing pattern presentation of the decorative pattern on the third pattern display device 42.

In step S2108, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs sound editing and output processing. Specifically, it performs processing to play a sound (output voice, music, sound effects, etc.) that corresponds to (synchronizes with) the decorative pattern variation presentation on the third pattern display device 42.

In step S2109, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs effect execution management processing. Specifically, it performs time management to synchronize the lamps, audio, and LCD effects (the decorative pattern change effect on the third pattern display device 42).

When this LCD effect (for example, the reach display effect for the jackpot/miss super reach A to E) is synchronized with an effect that operates the operable illumination units within the game board 30 as movable devices, a device operation pattern designation command equivalent to the display variation pattern designation command is set and sent to the drive control unit that operates the movable devices.

In step S2110, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs processing to update the value of a random number used to determine the decorative pattern variation pattern and audio lamp performance to be performed by the third pattern display device 42. Specifically, this random number may take on values between "0" and "32767," for example, and may return to "0" when it reaches the upper limit of "37268."

In step S2111, when the CPU 551 of the sub-control unit 262 receives a command from the main control unit 261, it performs processing corresponding to each command.

Specifically, when the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 receives a variation pattern designation command from the main controller 261, it converts this variation pattern designation command into a display command and sends it to the display controller 45. The variation pattern designation command may also be output as is. Furthermore, when the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 receives a decorative symbol designation command from the main controller 261, it converts this decorative symbol designation command into a stop display command and sends it to the display controller 45. Furthermore, if a preview command is generated in addition to the stop display command during the command conversion of the decorative symbol designation command, it also transmits the preview command to the display controller 45. An example of this preview command is the presence or absence of a school of fish as a preview. Furthermore, when the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 receives a full stop command (confirmation command) from the main controller 261, it transmits this full stop command as is to the display controller 45.

Furthermore, when the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 receives a variation pattern designation command from the main controller 261, it converts this variation pattern designation command into a lamp lighting command and sends it to the illumination controller that controls the illumination unit 300. It also converts this variation pattern designation command into a sound output command and sends it to the sound output controller 46 that controls the sound output unit 24.

In step S2112, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a command output process to output commands to the display control device 45, etc. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 transmits various commands to the display control device 45, such as the aforementioned display command and stop display command.

In step S2113, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines whether the RAM of the sub-controller 262 has been corrupted. If the RAM has not been corrupted, the process returns to step S1401; if the RAM has been corrupted, the process enters an infinite loop.

Here, the customer waiting effect processing of step S2104 shown in Figure 32 by the sub-controller 262 will be explained using Figure 33. Figure 33 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting effect processing by the sub-controller 262.

In step S2221, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether 30 seconds or more have passed since power was turned on. If 30 seconds have passed, the process proceeds to step S2222; if not, the process terminates. In step S2222, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a command to display the normal screen on the third pattern display device 42, and then proceeds to step S2223. In step S2223, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the normal screen display flag to 1.

In step S2224, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether a firing operation command has been received. If not, the process proceeds to step S2225; if received, the process proceeds to step S2229.

In step S2225, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the waiting time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the normal screen was displayed. If 60 seconds have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2226; if not, the process terminates. In step S2226, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a demo screen display command to display a demo screen on the third pattern display device 42, and then proceeds to steps S2227 and S2228.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the demo screen display flag to 1 in step S2227, and sets the normal screen display flag to 0 in step S2228, and then ends this processing.

In step S2229 described above, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the demo screen display flag is 1. If it is 1, proceed to step S2230; if not, terminate this processing. In step S2230, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a normal screen display command to display the normal screen on the third pattern display device 42, and proceeds to steps S2231 and S2232.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the normal screen display flag to 1 in step S2231, and sets the demo screen display flag to 0 in step S2232, thereby terminating this processing.

Here, the frame button input monitoring and rendering process of step S2106 shown in Figure 32 by the sub-control device 262 will be described using Figure 34. Figure 34 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and rendering process by the sub-control device 262.

As shown in FIG. 34, the sub-control device 262 performs frame button input monitoring and effect processing. Specifically, first, in step S2301, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs decision button input monitoring and effect processing. Specifically, when the display screen 42a requests the player to operate the decision button 81 to instruct the execution of a predetermined effect, a message is displayed indicating that the execution of a predetermined effect will be instructed in response to the player pressing the decision button 81. For example, when the player is requested to press the decision button 81, an image corresponding to the decision button 81 and a text image saying "Press!" are displayed.

In step S2302, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs selection button input monitoring and presentation processing, and then ends this processing. Specifically, when the player is requested to operate the selection buttons 82, 83 on the display screen 42a to indicate a predetermined selection, a message is displayed indicating that the predetermined selection will be made in response to the player's selection operation of the selection buttons 82, 83. For example, when requesting the pressing of the selection buttons 82, 83, an image of the selection target (e.g., multiple character images) encouraging the player to press the selection buttons 82, 83 and a text image such as "Please select a character" are displayed.

Next, we will explain the details of the above-mentioned decision button input monitoring and effect processing. Figure 35 is a flowchart showing the decision button input monitoring and effect processing.

In step S2311, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 monitors input from the decision button 81. In step S2312, if the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 detects that the decision button 81 has been pressed, it proceeds to the determination steps from step S2313 onwards; if not, it terminates this processing.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the normal screen display flag is 1 (step S2313), whether the demo screen display flag is 1 (step S2314), whether the high-speed fluctuation flag is 1 (step S2315), whether the jackpot opening flag is 1 (step S2316), and whether the jackpot ending flag is 1, and if none of these are 1, proceeds to step S2321.

In step S2321, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the button suggestion effect flag is 1. The button suggestion effect flag is set to 1 while an image requesting the press of the Decision button 81 is displayed in the button suggestion effect, and is set to 0 when the period ends (the request to press the Decision button 81 ends). If the button suggestion effect flag is 1, proceed to step S2322. If not, terminate this processing. In step S2322, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines that the Decision button 81 was pressed during the period when the image requesting the press of the Decision button 81 was displayed, sets a button suggestion effect execution command, and terminates this processing.

Return to step S2313. In the determination steps from step S2313 to step S2318, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether it is time to perform a volume change operation.

Specifically, if the normal screen display flag is 1 (normal screen is being displayed) in step S2313, the demo screen display flag is 1 (demo screen is being displayed) in step S2314, or the high-speed fluctuation flag is 1 (main decorative pattern SZ is fluctuating at high speed) in step S2315, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S2320. In step S2320, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a specific operation screen display command for displaying a specific operation screen. The specific operation screen is a screen for controlling the volume of the sound output from the sound output unit 24.

Also, if the jackpot opening flag is 1 (opening effect in progress) in step S2316, the process proceeds to step S2317. In step S2317, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether 5 seconds have passed since the start of the opening effect, in order to determine whether the timing has come to display a specific operation screen during the opening effect. If 5 seconds have passed, the process proceeds to step S2320; if not, the process proceeds to step S2318.

Also, if the jackpot ending flag is 1 (ending presentation in progress) in step S2318, the process proceeds to step S2319. In step S2319, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether three seconds have passed before the end of the ending presentation, in order to determine whether the time has come when a specific operation screen (e.g., a volume operation screen) can no longer be displayed during the ending presentation. If three seconds have not passed before the end of the ending presentation, the process proceeds to step S2320 described above, where a display command for the specific operation screen for display is set. If not, the process proceeds to step S2321 described above, but since the determination is negative, the process ends immediately.

Next, we will explain the details of the selection button input monitoring and effect processing described above. Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the selection button input monitoring and effect processing.

In step S2331, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 monitors input from the selection buttons 82 and 83. In step S2332, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether pressing of the selection buttons 82 and 83 has been detected. If pressing of the selection buttons 82 and 83 has been detected, the process proceeds to step S2333; if not, the process ends.

In step S2333, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether a specific operation screen is displayed on the third pattern display device 42. If it is displayed, the process proceeds to step S2334; if not, the process proceeds to step S2335. In step S2334, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a selection operation command that reflects the result of the selection operation on the specific operation screen. Specifically, the volume level is increased or decreased.

In step S2335, it is determined whether or not a button suggestion effect selection screen is displayed on the third pattern display device 42. If it is displayed, proceed to step S2334; if not, this process ends. In step S2334, as described above, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a selection operation command that reflects the result of the selection operation on the button suggestion effect operation screen. Specifically, one of the options is selected on the suggestion effect screen that shows options (such as the selection of player PY described above using Figure 14). This ends this process.

Next, the performance execution management process of step S2109 shown in Figure 32 by the sub-control device 262 will be explained using Figure 37.

In step S2401, the CPU 551 of the sub-control unit 262 performs processing upon reception of a read-ahead fluctuation pattern designation command. The processing upon reception of a read-ahead fluctuation pattern designation command is described below. Figure 38 is a flowchart showing the processing performed by the sub-control unit 262 upon reception of a read-ahead fluctuation pattern designation command.

In step S2411, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not a command to specify a variation pattern for pre-reading has been received. If a command to specify a variation pattern for pre-reading has been received, the process proceeds to step S2412; if not, the process ends.

In step S2412, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not a reserved ball storage area designation command has been received. If a reserved ball storage area designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2413; if not, the process ends.

In step S2413, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the currently received read-ahead variation pattern designation command in the reserved ball storage area designated by the reserved ball storage area designation command. The RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 has reserved ball storage areas corresponding to the reserved ball storage areas (execution area and first to fourth reserved areas) provided in the RAM 503 of the main control device 261. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the received command in one of the first to fourth reserved areas designated by the read-ahead variation pattern designation command.

In step S2414, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 refers to the hold display pattern selection table to determine the hold display pattern corresponding to the currently received pre-reading variable pattern designation command. In step S2415, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 converts the determined hold display pattern into a display hold display command, and sets it so that this display hold display command and the above-mentioned hold ball storage area designation command can be output to the display control device 45. This completes the process.

<Open/close mode (jackpot) display setting process>
37, in step S2402, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs an open/close mode (jackpot) display setting process. This open/close mode (jackpot) display setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.

In step S2431, if the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has received an opening command, it proceeds to step S2432; if not, it proceeds to step S2434.

In step S2432, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display opening command.

In step S2434, if the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has received an ending command, it proceeds to step S2435; if not, it terminates this processing.

In step S2435, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the display ending command and ends this processing.

<Variable display mode setting process>
Returning to the performance management execution process shown in Fig. 37, in step S2403, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs variable display mode setting processing. This variable display mode setting processing will be described below with reference to Fig. 40.

In step S2471, if the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has received a variation pattern designation command, it proceeds to step S2472; if not, it proceeds to step S2480.

In step S2472, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes a process to shift the data stored in the reserved ball storage area provided in the RAM 553. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area sequentially to the execution area. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted as follows: first reserved area → execution area, second reserved area → first reserved area, third reserved area → second reserved area, and fourth reserved area → third reserved area.

In step S2473, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display variation pattern designation command for displaying on the third pattern display device 42 a decorative pattern variation corresponding to the variation pattern designation command shifted to the execution area of RAM 553, and then proceeds to step S2474. The display variation pattern designation command is a display command for executing a decorative pattern variation display in a variation pattern such as, for example, jackpot normal reach A, B, jackpot super reach A-E, front and rear miss normal reach A, B, front and rear miss super reach A-D, non-front and rear miss normal reach A, B, non-front and rear miss super reach A-D, and complete miss A-F.

In step S2474, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the variation pattern designation command is a command with a button suggestion effect. Specifically, the variation pattern designation command determines whether or not a button suggestion effect is to be performed using the value of the variation type counter CS2 and the main decorative symbol variation pattern selection table. If a button suggestion effect is to be performed, proceed to step S2475; if not, terminate this processing.

In step S2475, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display button suggestion effect designation command to display a button suggestion effect on the third pattern display device 42, and proceeds to step S2476. In step S2476, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the button suggestion effect flag to 1.

In step S2477, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not a decorative pattern designation command has been received. If a decorative pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2478; if not, the process terminates. Note that instead of determining whether or not a decorative pattern designation command has been received, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 may determine whether or not the end timing of the variable time according to the received variable pattern designation command has arrived. In this case, when the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives a variable pattern designation command, it reads the variable time from that command, measures the variable time using a timer, and determines the end timing of the variable time.

In step S2478, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a stop display command (confirmation command) to stop (confirm) the changing display of the decorative pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 42, and then ends this processing.

<Variable display mode setting process>
Returning to the effect management execution process shown in Fig. 37, in step S2404, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a process for setting the next game status display mode. This process for setting the next game status display mode will be described below with reference to Fig. 41.

In step S2491, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not a high probability/support state transition command has been received. If so, proceed to step S2492; if not, proceed to step S2493.

In step S2492, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a high probability/support state transition command for display on the third symbol display device 42 to explicitly or implicitly notify the player of the transition to the high probability/support state, and then ends this processing.

In step S2493, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether a low probability/support state transition command has been received. If so, proceed to step S2494; if not, proceed to step S2495.

In step S2494, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a low probability/support state transition command for display on the third symbol display device 42 to explicitly or implicitly notify the player of the transition to the low probability/support state, and then ends this processing.

In step S2495, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether a low-probability state transition command has been received. If a low-probability state transition command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2496; if not, the process terminates.

In step S2496, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a low probability state transition command for display on the third symbol display device 42 to explicitly or implicitly notify the player of the transition to the low probability state, and then ends this processing.

Next, the normal processing and display mode switching processing of the display control device 45 will be explained using Figures 42 and 43. Figure 42 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of the display control device. Figure 43 is a flowchart showing the display mode switching processing of the display control device.

As shown in FIG. 42, in step S3001, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs command input processing to input and process various commands transmitted from the sub-control device 262, and then proceeds to step S3002. These various commands include, for example, a display command, a stop display command, a display opening command, a display ending command, a demo start command, and a symbol row variation start command.

In step S3002, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs processing to switch the display mode, etc. (display of symbol row fluctuations, jackpot opening, jackpot ending, etc.), and then proceeds to step S3003. This processing to switch the display mode, etc. will now be explained using Figure 43.

As shown in FIG. 43, in step S3101, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether a normal screen display command has been received. If a normal screen display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3102; if not, the process proceeds to step S3103. The display command is a command sent from the sub-control device 262, and is a command to allow the third pattern display device 42 to display the normal screen when the pachinko machine is powered on, or a command to return the display mode of the third pattern display device 42 to the normal mode that displays the normal screen after the end of the jackpot round.

In step S3102, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a normal screen on the third symbol display device 42. As shown in FIG. 9, the normal screen is a screen in which the main decorative symbol SZ and the secondary decorative symbol FZ are displayed stopped in front of the normal background image in a manner that does not form a jackpot combination. The normal background image is stored in the video RAM 524 of the display control device 45.

In step S3103, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a demo screen display command has been received. If a demo screen display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3104; if not, the process proceeds to step S3105. The demo screen display command is a command received from the sub-control device 262, and is a command for instructing the device to switch from the normal screen to the demo screen when a predetermined time has passed without the player firing a game ball.

In step S3104, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a demo screen on the third symbol display device 42. The demo screen is an image that introduces the game method and features, and is stored in the video RAM 524 of the display control device 45.

In step S3105, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether a display variation pattern designation command has been received. If a display variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3106; if not, the process proceeds to step S3107.

In step S3106, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third pattern display device 42 to start varying the main decorative pattern SZ and secondary decorative pattern FZ of the three decorative pattern columns L, M, and R shown in FIG. 9, and ultimately perform a static display of the varying pattern. Specifically, the control of the varying display of the main decorative pattern SZ and secondary decorative pattern FZ is control that executes steps S3003 to S3007, which will be described later. The pattern column varying display processing executed in step S3106 will be described later.

In step S3107, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display specific operation screen display command set in step S2320 described above has been received. If the display specific operation screen display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3108; if not, the process proceeds to step S3109.

In step S3108, the CPU 521 of the display control device performs the specific operation screen display process described below.

In step S3109, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether a display opening command has been received. If a display opening command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3110; if not, the process proceeds to step S3111.

In step S3110, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 to start displaying a jackpot opening image. The jackpot opening image is an image that is displayed after the decorative symbol variation display is confirmed as a jackpot combination, and is an image that celebrates the jackpot win. Furthermore, once the jackpot opening display has finished, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 then starts displaying a jackpot round image. The jackpot round image is an image that is displayed during the jackpot round, and is, for example, a bonus image that can only be seen during the jackpot round. The jackpot opening image and jackpot round image are stored in the video RAM 524 of the display control device 45. The jackpot opening/round display processing executed in step S3110 will be described later.

In step S3111, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a display ending command has been received. If a display ending command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3112; if not, the process proceeds to step S3113. In step S3112, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 to begin displaying a jackpot ending image. The jackpot ending image is stored in the video RAM of the display control device 45. The jackpot ending display process executed in step S3112 will be described later.

In step S3113, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether a display high probability/support state transition command has been received. If a display high probability/support state transition command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3114; if not, the process proceeds to step S3115.

In step S3114, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes the high probability/support state transition display process described below.

In step S3115, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether a low probability/support state transition command for display has been received. If a low probability/support state transition command for display has been received, the process proceeds to step S3116; if not, the process ends.

In step S3116, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes the low probability/support state transition process for display, which will be described later. This completes this process.

Returning to FIG. 42, in step S3003, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the stopping pattern and proceeds to step S3004. Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines a predetermined stopping pattern from a group of selectable stopping patterns determined by the display variation pattern designation command received from the sub-control device 262. In the case of a jackpot variation pattern, the predetermined stopping pattern is determined from odd or even patterns. In the case of a loss variation pattern, the predetermined stopping pattern is determined from front and rear loss patterns, loss patterns other than front and rear, and complete loss.

In step S3004, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 42, and then proceeds to step S3005.

Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable pattern indicated by the display variable pattern designation command received from the sub-control device 262. For example, if the command indicates a normal jackpot reach A, the variable display mode corresponding to the normal jackpot reach A is determined. Each of the variable display modes described above is stored in the program ROM of the display control device 45.

In step S3005, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the auxiliary effect (the display mode of a suggestive image, such as a message, to be provided to the player) and proceeds to step S3006. The suggestive image is an image that suggests the possibility that the pattern variation display executed by the third pattern display device 42 will result in a jackpot combination.

In step S3006, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display image of the third pattern display device 42.

Specifically, when a pattern change display image is displayed on the third pattern display device 42, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third pattern display device 42 so that the pattern change display of the main decorative pattern SZ and the secondary decorative pattern FZ in each decorative pattern column L, M, R is performed in accordance with the change display mode determined in step S3004, and the change display is finally stopped in accordance with the stopping pattern determined in step S3003.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 also performs display image control to display a jackpot round image on the third pattern display device 42. If it is a jackpot round image, an image indicating the current round number is displayed along with the bonus image displayed during the jackpot round. In addition, if there is a resident image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 42, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 also performs display image control to display the resident image on the third pattern display device 42.

In step S3007, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs hold display control to execute hold display on the third pattern display device 42.

Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes processing corresponding to the hold display command for display received from the sub-control device 262. When the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes the hold display command for display received from the sub-control device 262, it reads from the program ROM 552 and executes a hold display execution program corresponding to the hold display pattern indicated by the received hold display command for display. The hold display execution program has predetermined hold display execution patterns for the first to fourth hold display areas and hold display execution patterns for the hold display areas.

In addition, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a process to shift the hold display displayed in the hold display area each time the decorative pattern change display is completed. Specifically, when the decorative pattern change display is completed, the hold display in the execution display area is erased, and the hold display is shifted as follows: first hold display area → execution display area, second hold display area → first hold display area, third hold display area → second hold display area, fourth hold display area → third hold display area. If the number of reserved balls is 0, a hold display is displayed in the execution display area.

In step S3008, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes a specific operation period notification process to notify the third pattern display device 42 of a period during which a specific operation, such as changing the volume, can be performed. The specific operation period notification process will be described later.

In step S3009, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes a right-hit notification process to prompt the player to perform a right-hit operation on the third symbol display device 42. The right-hit notification process will be described later.

In step S3010, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes a next game state approaching status notification process that notifies the third symbol display device 42 that the next game state is approaching. The next game state approaching status notification process will be described later.

In step S3011, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs other processing, such as demo display.

In step S3012, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether 1 ms or more has passed since the start of normal processing. If 1 ms or more has passed, the process returns to step S3001; if not, the process returns to step S3008.

Next, the symbol row change processing described above in step S3106 will be explained using Figure 44. Figure 44 is a flowchart showing the symbol row change processing.

In step S3201, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the high-speed fluctuations of the right, center, and left main decorative patterns Sz on the third pattern display device 42 for a predetermined period of time. In step S3202, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high-speed fluctuation flag, indicating that high-speed fluctuations are occurring, to 1. The high-speed fluctuation flag is set in the RAM 523.

In step S3203, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the ongoing variable display includes a reach. Specifically, this determination is made based on the received display variable pattern designation command. If there is a reach, proceed to step S3204; if there is no reach, proceed to step S3211.

In step S3204, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether it is reach timing. If it is reach timing, proceed to step S3205; if not, proceed to step S3208. In step S3205, the left and right main decorative patterns Sz are stopped in a predetermined reach combination, and the middle main decorative pattern Sz continues to fluctuate. Since the high-speed fluctuation ended when this reach was displayed, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high-speed fluctuation in progress flag to 0 in step S3206, and sets the reach fluctuation in progress flag, indicating that reach fluctuation is in progress, to 1 in step S3207.

In step S3208, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether a stop display command has been received. If a stop display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3209; if not, the process ends. In step S3209, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 stops the main decorative pattern Sz during the reach fluctuation, and stops the right, center, and left main decorative patterns Sz in a predetermined combination. If there are no further fluctuation effects at this point, the stopped patterns are confirmed. As a result, in step S3210, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the reach fluctuation flag to 0.

In step S3211, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a stop display command has been received in the non-reach variable display. If a stop display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3212; if not, the process ends. In step S3212, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 stops the right, center, and left main decorative patterns Sz in a predetermined combination. If there are no further variable effects at this point, the stopped patterns are confirmed. As a result, in step S3213, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high-speed variable flag to 0. This ends the process.

Next, the specific operation screen display processing shown in step S3108 described above will be explained using Figure 45. Figure 45 is a flowchart showing the specific operation screen display processing.

In step S3221, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a specific operation screen on the third symbol display device 42 based on the receipt of the display specific operation screen display command in step S3107 described above. The specific operation screen is a screen on which the player can increase or decrease the volume by operating the selection buttons 82 and 83.

In step S3222, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a selection operation command based on the player pressing the selection buttons 82 and 83 has been received. If a selection operation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3223; if not, the process proceeds to step S3224. In step S3223, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a volume change on the third pattern display device 42 depending on which of the selection buttons 82 and 83 has been operated.

In step S3224, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a decision command based on the player pressing the decision button 81 has been received. If a decision command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3225; if not, the process proceeds to step S3226. In step S3225, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 erases the display of the specific operation screen. In other words, if the decision button 81 is pressed without pressing the selection buttons 82 and 83 while the specific operation screen is displayed, the display of the specific operation screen is terminated.

In step S3226, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether 30 seconds have passed since the start of display of the specific operation screen. If 30 seconds have passed, the process proceeds to step S3225, where the display of the specific operation screen is terminated. If not, the process proceeds to step S3227.

In step S3227, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether it is 5 seconds before the high-speed fluctuation stops. If it is 5 seconds before the high-speed fluctuation stops, the process proceeds to step S3225, where the display of the specific operation screen is terminated. In other words, the display of the specific operation screen is forcibly terminated 5 seconds before the high-speed fluctuation stops.

In step S3228, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether it is three seconds before the end of the ending performance. If it is three seconds before the end of the ending performance, the process proceeds to step S3225, where the display of the specific operation screen is terminated. In other words, the display of the specific operation screen is forcibly terminated three seconds before the end of the ending performance.

Next, the jackpot opening round display processing shown in step S3110 described above will be explained using Figure 46. Figure 46 is a flowchart showing the jackpot opening round display processing.

In step S3231, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a jackpot opening image on the third pattern display device 42 based on the display opening command received in step S3109 described above. Next, in step S3232, during this opening effect, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays opening right-hit explanation information on the third pattern display device 42, which explains how to play the next round of play.

Next, in step S3233, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the timing for the end of the opening performance has arrived. If it has arrived, the process proceeds to step S3234; if not, the process ends.

In step S3234, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the display of the opening image and displays a jackpot round image. In step S3235, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the jackpot round image and also displays in-round right-hit information to notify the player that a right hit will be made during the jackpot round. The display format of this in-round right-hit information is displayed on the third pattern display device 42 in a manner that is noticeable to the player. Here, it is displayed larger than the right-hit information displayed during non-rounds, which will be described later, and is therefore referred to as an enlarged display.

In step S3236, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether 10 balls have been won (winning detection) in the big prize opening 32a (its detection switch) during one round, or whether the opening period of the big prize opening 32a has exceeded 30 seconds. If 10 balls have been won or the opening has been open for 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S3237; if not, the process returns to step S3234. In step S3237, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the big prize round is the final round. If it is the final round, the process proceeds to step S3238; if not, the process returns to step S3234.

In step S3238, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the display of the jackpot round image. Next, in step S3239, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the display (enlarged display) of the right-hit information during the round. This completes the process.

Next, the jackpot ending display processing shown in step S3112 described above will be explained using Figure 47. Figure 47 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending display processing.

In step S3241, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a jackpot ending image on the third symbol display device 42 based on the display ending command received in step S3111 described above. Also, in step S3242, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the jackpot round flag to 1, indicating that the jackpot ending presentation is currently being executed.

Furthermore, in step S3243, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the ending specific operation reception flag to 1, indicating that a specific operation is being received during this ending period, and proceeds to step S3244. The specific operation is a volume change operation that is executed by pressing the decision button 81 during the ending period.

In step S3244, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the high probability support state transition flag or the low probability support state transition flag is 1. If the high probability support state transition flag or the low probability support state transition flag is 1, proceed to step S3245; if not, proceed to step S3251.

In step S3245, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays right-hit during ending information on the third pattern display device 42 to inform the player that the playing method in the high probability/support state, etc. to which the player will be transitioned after the ending performance is right-hit. This right-hit during ending information is displayed in a manner that is less noticeable to the player than right-hit during round information. For example, the right-hit during ending information is displayed in a reduced size that is sufficiently smaller than the right-hit during round information. In addition to displaying the right-hit during ending information, a countdown display is also displayed to count down the ending period.

In step S3246, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether it is three seconds before the end of the ending period. If it is three seconds before the end of the ending period, the process proceeds to step S3247; if not, the process ends.

In step S3247, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 uses the right-hit information during the ending to display next game state approaching information on the third symbol display device 42, informing the player that the next game state is approaching. The next game state is the game state to which the player transitions after the ending performance ends, and in this case is the high probability/support state.

Furthermore, in step S3248, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45, upon notifying that it is 3 seconds before the end of the ending period, sets the ending specific operation reception flag to 0, indicating that reception of specific operations during the ending period has ended, and proceeds to step S3249.

In step S3249, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the timing for the ending period to end has arrived. If the timing for the ending period to end has arrived, the process proceeds to step S4250; if not, the process ends.

In step S4250, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the display of the next game state approach information using right-hit information during the ending. At the same time, the countdown display for the ending period ends when the count time expires. In step S4251, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the jackpot ending flag to 0. This completes the process.

Next, the high probability/support state transition display processing shown in step S3114 described above will be explained using Figure 48. Figure 48 is a flowchart showing the high probability/support state transition display processing.

In step S3261, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the high probability/support state transition flag is 0 based on the receipt of the high probability/support state transition command for display in step S3113 described above. In other words, it determines whether the game state at the time of winning the special jackpot was a high probability/support state. If the high probability/support state transition flag is 0 (i.e., the game state was a low probability state when the special jackpot was won), proceed to step S3262; otherwise, proceed to step S3263.

In step S3262, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high probability/support state transition flag to 1. In step S3263, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the jackpot ending flag is 0. If the jackpot ending flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S3264; if not, the process proceeds to step S3266.

In step S3264, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the background screen when transitioning to the high probability/support state on the third pattern display device 42. In step S3265, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays right hit information during the high probability/support state on the third pattern display device 42. The right hit information during the high probability/support state is displayed in a manner that makes it easier for the player to notice than the right hit information during the ending. For example, the right hit information during the high probability/support state is displayed in a larger size than the right hit information during the ending.

In step S3226, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether it is time to end the high probability/support state. In this embodiment, the high probability/support state ends when the number of changes is 100. If it is time to end the high probability/support state, proceed to step S3267; if not, end this processing.

In step S3267, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the enlarged display of the right-hit information during the high probability/support state. In step S3268, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high probability/support state transition flag to 0. This completes the process.

Next, the low probability/support state transition display processing shown in step S3116 described above will be explained with reference to Figure 49. Figure 49 is a flowchart showing the low probability/support state transition display processing.

In step S3271, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the high probability/support state transition flag is 1 based on the low probability/support state transition flag received in step S3115 described above. If the high probability/support state transition flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S3272; if not, the process proceeds to step S3274.

In step S3272, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high probability/support state transition flag to 0 and proceeds to step S3273. In step S3273, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the low probability/support state transition flag to 1.

In step S3274, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the jackpot ending flag is 0. If the jackpot ending flag is 0, proceed to step S3275; if not, proceed to step S3276.

In step S3275, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a screen during the low probability/support state on the third pattern display device 42. Also, in step S3276, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays right hit information during the low probability/support state on the third pattern display device 42. Like right hit information during the high probability/support state, right hit information during the low probability/support state is displayed in a manner that is more noticeable to the player than right hit information during the ending.

In step S3277, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the timing to end the low probability/support state has arrived. If it has arrived, proceed to step S3278; if not, proceed to step S3279.

In step S3278, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 erases the right-hit information during the low probability/support state from the third pattern display device 42. In step S3279, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the low probability/support state transition flag to 0. This completes the process.

Next, the specific operation period notification process shown in step S3008 described above will be explained using Figure 50. Figure 50 is a flowchart explaining the specific operation period notification process.

In step S3301, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether a normal screen display command has been received. If a normal screen display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3302; if not, the process proceeds to step S3303.

In step S3302, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays specific operation period information on the third pattern display device 42. The specific operation period information is information that notifies the player that a specific operation using the decision button 81 can be performed. A specific operation is, for example, pressing the decision button 81 to display a volume change operation screen.

In step S3303, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether a demo screen display command has been received. If a demo screen display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3302, where information is displayed during the specific operation period; if not, the process proceeds to step S3304.

In step S3304, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a display opening command has been received. If a display opening command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3305; if not, the process proceeds to step S3306.

In step S3305, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether it is time to display the above-mentioned specific operation period information in the jackpot opening presentation. The timing for displaying the specific operation period information in the jackpot opening presentation is 5 seconds after the start of the jackpot opening presentation. If it is time to display the information, proceed to step S3302; if not, proceed to step S3306.

In step S3306, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether a display variation pattern designation command has been received. If a display variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3307; if not, the process proceeds to step S3311.

In step S3307, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the high probability/support state transition flag is 1. If the high probability/support state transition flag is 1, the game is in a high probability/support state, meaning that specific operations such as changing the volume cannot be performed, and so this processing is terminated; if not, the processing proceeds to step S3308.

In step S3308, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays information indicating the approaching end of the specific operation period on the third symbol display device 42. The information indicating the approaching end of the specific operation period is information that notifies the player that the end of the specific operation period is approaching. The specific operation is, for example, an operation to change the volume.

In step S3309, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether it is time to end the display of the specific operation period end approaching information. If it is time to end the display, the process proceeds to step S3310; if not, the process ends.

In step S3310, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 erases the specific operation period end proximity information from the third pattern display device 42 and ends this processing.

In step S3311, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether a display ending command has been received. If a display ending command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3312; if not, the process ends.

In step S3312, the CPU 521 of the table control device 45 determines whether the high probability/support state transition flag or the low probability/support state transition flag is 1. In other words, it determines whether the game state to transition to after the ending performance is a high probability/support state or a low probability/support state. If the high probability/support state transition flag or the low probability/support state transition flag is 1, proceed to step S3308, and display information about the proximity to the end of the specific operation period on the third pattern display device 42. If neither the high probability/support state transition flag nor the low probability/support state transition flag is 1 (it is 0), proceed to step S3313.

In step S3313, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 transitions to the normal low probability state after the ending performance ends, and so displays information on the third pattern display device 42 during the specific operation period, just as during the jackpot round, during the ending period. This completes this process.

Next, the display mode during a specific operation period on the third pattern display device 42 will be explained using Figure 51. Figures 51(a) to (e) are diagrams explaining the display mode during a specific operation period on the third pattern display device 42.

The period during which the normal screen is displayed on the third pattern display device 42 is the period during which the player performs specific operations such as pressing the decision button 81 to change the volume of the sound output from the sound output unit 24. The sound output from the sound output unit 24 is sound that is output in conjunction with the start of the variable display on the third pattern display device 42, during the variable display, during the jackpot game state, during the advantageous game state after the jackpot ends, etc.

As shown in (a), the third symbol display device 42 displays specific operation period information 44a to inform the player that during the period when the normal screen 43a is displayed, specific operations such as changing the volume can be performed. For example, this is text information stating "Volume change allowed" displayed in the upper right corner of the normal screen 43a of the third symbol display device 42.

In addition, the third pattern display device 42 displays specific operation period information 44a even during the period when the demo screen 43b is displayed, as shown in (d). The demo screen 43b may be a still image or a video.

If the player presses the enter button 81 while the specific operation period information 44a is displayed on the normal screen 43a or demo screen 43b, the third pattern display device 42 will display a specific operation screen 44b for volume change operations, as shown in (b). The specific operation screen 44b may be displayed in place of the normal screen 43a or demo screen 43b, or may be displayed superimposed on part of the normal screen 43a or demo screen 43b.

The specific operation screen 44b includes a change information display section 44c that displays information that can be changed by specific operations, and an operation method display section 44d that shows the player how to perform the specific operations. For example, in the case of a volume change operation screen, the change information display section 44c is a volume display section that shows the current volume and the range of volume changes that can be made. The operation method display section 44d is a volume change method display section that illustrates how to change the volume using, for example, the decision button 81 and the selection buttons 82 and 83. The operation method display section 44d illustrates the following volume change methods: pressing the decision button 81 will confirm the volume, pressing the left selection button 82 will lower the volume, and pressing the right selection button 83 will increase the volume.

When the player presses the right selection button 83, the change information display section 44c displays, as shown in (c), how the current volume (the third volume level out of five) will be changed to the next higher volume. When the player presses the left selection button 82, the change information display section 44c displays how the current volume will be changed to the next lower volume.

When the player presses the decision button 81, the third pattern display device 42 displays the normal screen 43a instead of the specific operation screen 44b, as shown in (e).

Next, the display mode during a specific operation period when the main decorative pattern Sz is fluctuating at high speed will be explained with reference to Figure 52. Figures 52(a) to (h) are diagrams explaining the display mode during a specific operation period when the main decorative pattern Sz is fluctuating at high speed.

As shown in (a), the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 displays a normal screen 43a, with specific operation period information 44a indicating "Volume Change Possible" in the upper right corner. When the start condition is met, as shown in (b), the display screen 42a replaces the normal screen 43a with a high-speed fluctuation screen 43c. At the same time that the normal screen 43a switches to the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c, the specific operation period information 44a switches to specific operation period end approaching information 44f. The specific operation period end approaching information 44e is information that notifies the player that the end of the specific operation period is approaching. For example, information suggesting that the end of the specific operation period is approaching is added to the specific operation period information 44a. Specifically, for example, as shown in (b) to (d), the area around the text image of "Volume Change Possible" flashes in different colors at predetermined time intervals to indicate that the end is approaching. The blinking display may be at a fixed interval, or may blink at shorter intervals as the end timing approaches. This allows the player to realize that the end timing is approaching, even though the period in which the specific operation can be performed is still in progress.

As shown in (e), the specific operation period end approach information 44e is erased at a predetermined timing before the end of the high-speed fluctuation. In other words, the volume change operation (pressing the OK button 81) is possible even during high-speed fluctuation, but must be performed at the latest while the specific operation period end approach information 44e is displayed. The specific operation period end approach information 44e is erased just before the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c switches to the left pattern stop screen 43d (see (e) and (f)). This makes it possible to reliably show the player whether the fluctuation display during high-speed fluctuation will be a complete miss or a reach.

After a predetermined time, the left symbol stop screen 43d becomes the all symbol stop screen 43e. If the stopped symbols are a complete miss on the all symbol stop screen 43e, and there is no pending fulfillment of the start condition as shown in (g), the all symbol stop screen 43e returns to the normal screen 43a as shown in (i). As shown in (i), the normal screen 43a is the same as the all symbol stop screen 43e, but the specific operation period information 44a is displayed again. On the other hand, even if the stopped symbols are a complete miss on the all symbol stop screen 43e, if there is pending fulfillment of the start condition as shown in (h), the all symbol stop screen 43e changes to the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c as shown in (j), and the specific operation period end approach information 44e is displayed, and the display mode from (b) onwards described above is repeated.

In this way, by looking at the specific operation period end approach information 44e, the player can recognize up to what point during the high-speed fluctuations specific operations, such as changing the volume, are possible.

Next, the display mode during the specific operation period after a reach is achieved will be explained using Figure 53. Figures 53 (a) to (o) are diagrams explaining the display mode during the specific operation period after a reach is achieved.

On the normal reach display screen 43f shown in (a) and the advanced reach display screen 43g shown in (b), volume cannot be changed during the reach display period, so the specific operation period information 44a is hidden. The all-symbol stop screen 43e shown in (c) indicates that the reach display results in a jackpot combination. The specific operation period information 44a is also hidden while the all-symbol stop screen 43 is displayed. After the jackpot combination is confirmed, the all-symbol stop screen 43 is replaced by the opening screen 43h. The opening screen 43 displays opening information 44f (e.g., text information congratulating the player, such as "Congratulations") informing the player of the jackpot as shown in (d), followed by opening right-hit instruction information 44g (e.g., text information such as "Aim right" and a right arrow) explaining how to operate the round during the opening. The specific operation period information 44a is not displayed during periods (d) and (e), even while the opening screen 43 is displayed. This is to ensure that this information is visible to players.

The specific operation period information 44a continues to be displayed from the end of the display period of the opening right-hit information 44g shown in (e) until the end of the jackpot round state. In other words, the specific operation period information 44a is displayed during the end of the display period of the opening right-hit information 44g and during the period from the start of the jackpot round state shown in (f) to the end of the jackpot round state shown in (g).

Specifically, the round screen 43i shown in (g) displays information 44a about the specific operation period, along with information 44h about right-hand hit during a round, which indicates in a manner that is easy for the player to see that right-hand hits are being made during the jackpot round state, and information 44i about the number of rounds, which indicates the progress of the jackpot round state. The information 44h about right-hand hit during a round is information that clearly indicates that right-hand hits are being made, for example, in large letters or illustrations. The information 44i about the number of rounds indicates that it is the first round.

Furthermore, the round screen 43i shown in (h) displays specific operation period information 44a along with right-hand hit information 44h during the round and round number information 44i indicating the final round (16th round).

After the final round ends, the round screen 43i is replaced by the ending screen 43j shown in (i). Ending information 44j indicating that the ending period is in progress is displayed on the ending screen 43j. Countdown information counting down the ending time is also displayed on the ending screen 43j.

Ending information 44j consists of, for example, ending countdown information 44v shown in (i) to (o), next game state suggestion information 44w shown in (i), manufacturer information 44x shown in (j), card removal prevention information 44y shown in (k) and (l), and addiction prevention information 44z shown in (m) to (o).

The ending countdown information 44v is a display that counts down the ending time. The ending countdown information 44v counts down, for example, in one-second increments, as time passes. For example, (i) is immediately after the start of the ending period, so it displays "Ending time: 35 seconds left." (j) is 10 seconds after the start of the ending, so it displays "Ending time: 25 seconds left." (k) is 15 seconds after the start of the ending, so it displays "Ending time: 20 seconds left." (l) is 16 seconds after the start of the ending, so it displays "Ending time: 19 seconds left." (m) is 32 seconds after the start of the ending, so it displays "Ending time: 3 seconds left." (n) is 33 seconds after the start of the ending, so it displays "Ending time: 2 seconds left." (o) is 34 seconds after the start of the ending, so it displays "Ending time: 1 second left."

The next game state suggestion information 44w suggests that the game state after the ending period ends will be a probability variable state, or a normal state with a support state. Here, the text information "One more time" suggests that a high probability/support state will occur next. If a low probability/support state will occur next, the text information "Chance!" is displayed. The next game state suggestion information 44w is displayed for, for example, 10 seconds.

Manufacturer information 44x is, for example, a logo indicating the manufacturer (for example, text information such as "SANYO"). Manufacturer information 44x is displayed for, for example, five seconds. Card removal prevention information 44y is, for example, a graphic image showing a prepaid card and a text image such as "Please be careful not to forget to remove your prepaid card." Card removal prevention information 44y is displayed for, for example, ten seconds. Addiction prevention information 44z is, for example, text information such as "Pachinko and pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation." Addiction prevention information 44z is displayed for, for example, ten seconds.

In this way, a series of ending information 44j is displayed for 35 seconds on the ending screen 43j.

Ending screen 43j displays ending right-hit information 44k, which is displayed in a manner that is less noticeable to the player than the round right-hit information 44h. For example, ending right-hit information 44k is displayed in a size that is significantly smaller than the round right-hit information 44h. As a result, the player is given the illusion that their right-hit gameplay for the round has ended. This makes it easier to deter players from hitting the right during the ending period.

Specific operation period end approach information 44e is displayed on the ending screen 43j. Specific operation period approach information 44e is displayed, for example, from the start of the ending presentation shown in (i) to the end of the ending presentation shown in (l). If the jackpot that includes the ending period is a guaranteed jackpot or a regular jackpot with a support state, specific operations cannot be performed during the high-probability or low-probability support state to which the player transitions after the ending period ends. For example, if the sound output from the sound output unit 24 in a high-probability or low-probability support state is louder than the previous game state in order to stimulate the player's interest, the ending period is the last opportunity to change the sound, so displaying the approaching end of the sound change operation can help the player enjoy a more comfortable gameplay experience.

Next game state approaching information 44l is displayed on the ending screen 43j. Next game state approaching information 44l is information that notifies the player that the time to transition to the next game state is approaching. For example, next game state approaching information 44l is information that flashes around right-hit information 44k during the ending. Next game state approaching information 44l is displayed for three seconds before the end of the ending period while the addiction prevention display 44z shown in (m) to (o) is displayed. This allows the player to recognize that the right-hit display may be resumed.

Next, the display mode during the specific operation period after the reach is established following Figure 53 will be explained using Figure 54. Figures 54(a) to (o) are figures explaining the display mode during the specific operation period after the reach is established following Figure 53.

As shown in (a), after the ending presentation of the special jackpot state has ended, a high probability state screen 43k is displayed on the display screen 42a. The high probability state screen 43k is the same as the normal screen 43a in that it displays the main decorative pattern Sz, but the background image is displayed in a manner that clearly distinguishes it from the normal screen 43a in terms of color and display content. On the high probability state screen 43k, right hit information 44m during high probability/support state is displayed. The right hit information 44m during high probability/support state is displayed in a manner that is more noticeable (enlarged) to the player than the right hit information 44k during the ending.

The above-mentioned right-hit information during ending 44k, next game state approach information 44l, and ending countdown information 44v can reduce the chance that a player will accidentally perform a right-hit operation at an unnecessary time during the ending presentation, resulting in the game ball being wasted. Furthermore, this information can be used to launch game balls in time with the start of the high probability/support state shown in (a).

As shown in (b) to (f), right-hit information 44m during high probability/support state continues to be displayed on the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c, the high probability state reach display screen 43f, and the all symbol stop screen 43e after transitioning to the high probability/support state. Right-hit information 44m during high probability/support state is hidden in line with the opening screen 43h shown in (g). After right-hit explanation information 44g during opening shown in (j) is displayed, right-hit information 44h during the round is displayed.

As shown in (f), the reach fluctuation during the high-probability state is determined by a combination (e.g., "666") indicating an 8R normal jackpot with no support state (0 wins). Therefore, because the next game state is a low-probability state with no support state, the ending screen 43l shown in (k)-(m) does not display right-hand-hit information during ending 44k or next game state approach information 44l, but does display ending countdown information 44v. This ending countdown information 44v reduces the disadvantages of a player starting left-hand play for the next game state during the ending presentation. In other words, when playing left-hand play during the ending presentation, a prize ball is paid out by winning the special chart 1 start winning device 33a. However, since the ball also enters the outlet without winning, there is a possibility that the player's ball holdings will be reduced. If the ending countdown information 44v can be used to properly determine the end timing of the ending time, such a situation can be reduced.

On the ending screen 43l, the next game state approach information 44l is not displayed, and the specific operation period information 44a continues to be displayed.

As shown in (n), once the ending performance ends, the normal screen 43a, which is in a low probability state with no support status, is displayed. The specific operation period information 44a continues to be displayed until this timing. As shown in (o), when the normal screen 43a changes to the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c, if there is a hold, the specific operation period information 44a is displayed as specific operation period end approach information 44e. From this point on, the screen display will be the same as that shown in Figure 52 (c) onwards.

In this way, right-hit information and specific operation period information 44a are displayed in an appropriate manner depending on whether the game state that occurs after the ending performance ends is a high-probability support state (the same applies to a low-probability support state) or a low-probability state with no support state, making it easier for the player to understand when a right-hit operation is required and when the audio can be changed.

Next, the display mode when the Confirm button 81 is left pressed during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuations will be explained using Figure 55. Figures 55(a) to (g) are diagrams explaining the display mode when the Confirm button 81 is left pressed during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuations.

As shown in (a), while the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c is displayed, specific operation period end approach information 44e is displayed, and a text image saying "Volume can be changed" is flashing. When the player presses the confirm button 81 at this timing, the specific operation screen 44b is displayed, as shown in (b). The high-speed fluctuation screen 43c may be displayed behind the specific operation screen 44b. As long as the player is aware that high-speed fluctuation is occurring, they can perform specific operations with confidence.

If, after the specific operation screen 44b is displayed, the player does not operate the selection buttons 82, 83 as shown in (c) and (d), the specific operation period end approaching information 44e is displayed while the specific operation screen 44b is displayed, as shown in (c) and (d). This can indicate to the player that the specific operation period will end unless a specific operation, such as changing the volume, is performed.

If the player still leaves the selection buttons 82, 83 unoperated, the specific operation screen 44b will be hidden before the left symbol stop screen 43d appears, as shown in (e). This ensures that the player can see the all symbol stop screen 43e shown in (f) or the normal reach display screen 43f shown in (g), even if they leave the specific operation screen 44b displayed.

Next, the display mode when the Confirm button 81 and the Select buttons 82 and 83 are pressed during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuations will be explained using Figure 56. Figures 56 (a) to (g) are diagrams explaining the display mode when the Confirm button 81 and the Select buttons 82 and 83 are pressed during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuations.

As shown in (a), when the player presses the confirm button 81 while the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c is displayed, the specific operation screen 44b is displayed. As shown in (b), when the selection buttons 82 and 83 are operated while the specific operation screen 44b is displayed, a volume change is displayed in the change information display section 43c. When the player presses the confirm button 81 in this state, the screen immediately returns to the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c as shown in (d). This allows the display to fully display fluctuations from the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c to the left symbol stop screen 43d shown in (e), the all symbol stop screen 43e shown in (f), or the normal reach screen 43f shown in (g).

In addition, if a specific operation is performed while the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c is displayed, it may be set so that the specific operation cannot be performed for a period of time after the first specific operation has been performed. This is because the high-speed fluctuation period is short, so even if the specific operation screen 44b is displayed again, there is a high possibility that there will not be enough time left to perform the specific operation. On the other hand, if a specific operation is performed while the round screen 43i is displayed, there will be enough time left to perform the specific operation again, so the specific operation screen 44b may be displayed again.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment,
When the game state transitions from a jackpot round game state to the next high probability/support state or low probability/support state, a jackpot ending effect is executed in which an ending screen 43j is displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 from the end timing of the round game in the jackpot round game state to the start timing of the next high probability/support state, etc., and the display control device 45 performs the processing of step S3241 in the jackpot ending processing;
During the execution of the jackpot ending presentation, right-hit information during ending 44k, next game state approach information 44l, and ending countdown information 44v are displayed to indicate to the player that the timing to start a game state requiring a right hit, such as the next high probability/support state or low probability/support state, has not yet arrived, and the display control device 45 has the function of performing the processes of steps S3244 to S3251 in the jackpot ending processing.

With this configuration, when the game state transitions from a jackpot round game state to the next high probability/support state or low probability/support state, the display control device 45 executes a jackpot ending effect in step S3241 of the jackpot ending process, displaying an ending screen 43j on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42, from the end of the round game in the jackpot round game state to the start of the next high probability/support state, etc. During the execution of this jackpot ending effect, the display control device 45 executes step S3247 of the jackpot ending process, displaying right-hit information during ending 44k, next game state approach information 44l, and ending countdown information 44v to indicate to the player that the start of a game state requiring a right hit, such as the next high probability/support state or low probability/support state, has not yet arrived. This makes it easier for players to recognize that the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is a jackpot round game state; in other words, the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is not yet the next high probability/support state, etc. This reduces the disadvantages that can arise from mistakenly believing that the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is the next next high probability/support state, etc. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (A1) above.

In addition, the jackpot round gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player,
The high probability/support state, etc. is a game state that is advantageous to the player, separate from the jackpot round game state, and is a game state in which the player can acquire advantageous game value by operating the game ball launching handle 18.
The right-hit information during ending 44k, the next game state approach information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v are information that indicates to the player that the timing to start a high probability/support state, etc. has not yet arrived while the jackpot ending performance is being executed.

With this configuration, the next high-probability/support state, etc., to which the player transitions from the advantageous jackpot round game state is a game state separate from the jackpot round game state, allowing the player to acquire advantageous game value by operating the game ball launch handle 18. Therefore, a player may easily operate the game ball launch handle 18 to acquire advantageous game value, mistakenly believing that the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is a high-probability/support state, etc. However, because this operation is performed during the jackpot round game state, the player is unable to acquire this advantageous game value. However, during the execution of the jackpot ending effect, the player is notified of the ending right-hit information 44k, the next game state approach information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v, which indicate to the player that the start timing of the high-probability/support state, etc. has not yet arrived. This makes it difficult to mistakenly believe that the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is a high-probability/support state, etc. Furthermore, by preventing the player from operating the game ball launch handle 18 under the mistaken belief that another advantageous game value can be acquired, the number of wasted operations can be reduced. This reduces the disadvantages that can arise from mistakenly believing that the current state during which the jackpot ending presentation is being performed is a high probability/support state, etc. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (A2) above.

In addition, the jackpot round game state is a game state in which, based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 triggered by the ball entering the special prize-winning device 1 starting prize-winning device 33a or the special prize-winning device 2 starting prize-winning device 33b, a predetermined number of round games are played, with one round being the time from when the large prize-winning opening 32a of the variable prize-winning device 32 is opened to when it is closed,
The jackpot ending presentation is a presentation at the end of the round game state in which a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42 from 3 seconds before the end of the ending period after the large prize opening 32a of the variable prize device 32 is closed in the final round of the jackpot round game state until the start of the next high probability/support state, etc.

With this configuration, the jackpot round game state is a game state in which, based on the result of a jackpot lottery conducted by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 triggered by a ball entering the special symbol 1 starting winning device 33a or the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b, a predetermined number of rounds of game play are played, with one round consisting of the period from when the large prize opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is opened to when it is closed. The jackpot ending effect is an effect in which a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 from three seconds before the end of the ending period following the closing of the large prize opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 in the final round of the jackpot round game state until the start of the next high probability/support state, etc. This reduces the disadvantages that may arise from mistaking the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed for the next high probability/support state, etc. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (A3) above.

In addition, a ball entry means that changes between an open state where the game ball is easy to enter and a closed state where the game ball is difficult to enter, and the ball entry triggers a big win lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, and a special drawing 2 start winning device 33b;
The game ball is a ball entry means into which the game ball enters, and the entry of the ball triggers a normal symbol lottery that activates a special symbol 2 start winning device 33b.
The high probability support state is a support game state that makes it easier for the result of the normal pattern lottery based on the ball entering the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b to be a winning result that activates the electric device of the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b.
The right-hit information during ending 44k, the next game state approach information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v indicate to the player that the timing to start a high probability/support state, etc. has not yet arrived while the jackpot ending performance is being executed.

With this configuration, the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b is a ball entry means that changes between an open state, which makes it easier for game balls to enter, and a closed state, which makes it more difficult for game balls to enter, and this ball entry triggers a jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. The normal symbol start opening 34 is a ball entry means through which game balls enter, and this ball entry triggers a normal symbol lottery that activates the electric device of the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b. The high probability/support state, etc. is a support game state that makes it more likely that the result of the normal symbol lottery based on a ball entering the normal symbol start opening 34 will result in a winning result that activates the electric device of the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b. The right-hit information during ending 44k, next game state proximity information 44l, and ending countdown information 44v indicate to the player that the start timing of the high probability/support state, etc. has not arrived during the execution of the jackpot ending presentation. As a result, players who want to quickly place the gaming ball into the normal symbol starting hole 34 in a high probability/support state or the like can easily accidentally launch the gaming ball while the jackpot ending presentation is being executed before the transition to the high probability/support state or the like. In this regard, by viewing the next game state approach information 44l or the like while the jackpot ending presentation is being executed, it is possible to reduce the disadvantages that arise from mistakenly believing that the current time when the jackpot ending presentation is being executed is a high probability/support state or the like. For example, consider the gaming machine described above in (A4).

The high probability/support state is a gaming state in which the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 will be a jackpot result is higher than in a normal gaming state.
The right-hit information during ending 44k, the next game state approach information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v indicate to the player that the timing to start the high probability/support state has not yet arrived while the jackpot ending performance is being executed.

With this configuration, the high probability/support state is a gaming state in which the probability that the jackpot lottery result in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 will result in a jackpot is higher than in the normal gaming state. The next gaming state approach information 44l, etc., indicates to the player that the timing to start the high probability/support state has not yet arrived while the jackpot ending presentation is being executed. This reduces the disadvantages that arise from mistaking the current time when the jackpot ending presentation is being executed for the high probability/support state. For example, consider the gaming machine described above in (A5).

The high probability support state is a high probability game state with support in which the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 will be a jackpot result and the probability that the result of the activation lottery by the activation lottery means will be a specific result are higher than in a normal game state.
The right-hit information during ending 44k, the next game state approach information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v indicate to the player that the timing to start the high probability/support state has not yet arrived while the jackpot ending performance is being executed.

With this configuration, the high probability/support state is a gaming state in which the probability that the lottery result obtained by the lottery means will be a specific result and the probability that the normal symbol lottery result obtained by the normal symbol starting port 34 will be a winning result are higher than in the normal gaming state. The next gaming state approach information 44l, etc., indicates to the player that the timing to start the high probability/support state has not yet arrived while the jackpot ending presentation is being executed. This reduces the disadvantages that arise from mistaking the current time when the jackpot ending presentation is being executed as a high probability/support state. For example, consider the gaming machine described above in (A6).

In addition, the big win ending performance is a performance in which multiple types of images are displayed in succession in a predetermined ending performance pattern,
When the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a jackpot result, the ending presentation pattern is displayed in a different pattern depending on the type of jackpot result,
The right-hit information during ending 44k, the next game state approach information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v indicate to the player that the timing for starting the next high probability/support state, etc. has not arrived until the time when multiple types of images have been displayed in succession in the ending presentation pattern.

With this configuration, the jackpot ending effect involves multiple types of images being displayed consecutively in a predetermined ending effect pattern. When the jackpot lottery result in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 results in a jackpot, the ending effect pattern is displayed in a different pattern depending on the type of jackpot result. Therefore, in the past, if a player mistakenly believed that the end of the display time of a certain image (e.g., an image showing manufacturer information) in the jackpot ending effect was the end of the series of jackpot ending effects, the player might mistakenly believe that the display time of the subsequent image (e.g., an image showing information to prevent forgetting to remove a card or an image showing information to prevent addiction) was transitioning to the next high probability/support state, etc., and thereby suffer a disadvantage. However, in the present invention, the next game state approach information 44l, etc., indicates to the player that the start time of the next high probability/support state, etc. has not yet arrived until the end of the display time of multiple types of images in the ending effect pattern. As a result, during the jackpot ending presentation, the next game state approach information 44l indicates that the timing to start the next game state has not yet arrived until multiple types of images have been displayed in succession in the specified ending presentation pattern, thereby reducing the risk of suffering the disadvantages described above. For example, this is the gaming machine described in (A7) above.

In addition, immediately after the end of the final round in the jackpot round game state, information may be displayed to indicate to the player that the timing to start the next high probability/support state, etc. has not yet arrived. For example, immediately after the end of the final round in the jackpot round state, right-hit during round information 44h is replaced by right-hit during ending information 44k. While right-hit during ending information 44k is displayed, it is indicated to the player that the timing to start the next high probability/support state, etc. has not yet arrived.

With this configuration, the right-hit information 44k during ending indicates to the player that the timing to start the next high probability/support state, etc. has not arrived immediately after the end of the final round in the round game state, thereby reducing the disadvantages that may arise as a result of the player mistakenly believing that the transition to the next high probability/support state, etc. has occurred immediately after the end of the final round in the round game state. For example, this is the gaming machine described above in (A15).

In addition, information may be displayed simultaneously with the execution of the jackpot ending effect, informing the player that the timing for starting the next high probability, support state, etc. has not yet arrived. For example, right-hit information 44k during ending indicates to the player simultaneously with the execution of the jackpot ending effect that the timing for starting the next high probability, support state, etc. has not yet arrived.

With this configuration, the right-hit during ending information 44k indicates to the player that the timing to start the next high probability/support state, etc. has not yet arrived at the same time as the jackpot ending effect is executed, thereby reducing the disadvantages that may arise as a result of the player mistakenly believing that the transition to the next game state is occurring at the same time as the jackpot ending effect is executed. For example, this is the gaming machine described above in (A16).

In addition, the next game state approach information 44l indicates to the player that the timing to start the next high probability/support state, etc. has not yet arrived when a jackpot ending effect is being executed and a predetermined time has elapsed since the jackpot ending effect was executed (3 seconds before the end of the ending period; for example, in the case of a 16R probability change (Special 1) jackpot ending effect, this is 32 seconds after the start of the ending effect).

This configuration indicates to the player that the timing to start the next high probability/support state, etc. has not yet arrived when a predetermined time has passed since the execution of the jackpot ending presentation, thereby reducing the disadvantages that may arise as a result of the player mistakenly believing that the next high probability/support state, etc. will be entered after a predetermined time has passed since the execution of the jackpot ending presentation, even though the jackpot ending presentation is currently being executed. For example, consider the gaming machine described above in (A17).

Furthermore, as described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment,
When the player operates the decision button 81 within a predetermined period (for example, the period from the start of the display of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c of the identification information fluctuation display until 5 seconds before the high-speed fluctuation stops, or the period until 3 seconds before the end of the ending period), a specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is displayed, which allows the player to adjust the volume using at least the decision button 81, and when the decision button 81 is operated outside the predetermined period during the display of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c of the identification information fluctuation display (for example, during the reach display period), the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is not displayed; and
The display control device 45 includes a step S3308 in its specific operation period notification process, which notifies the player of specific operation period end approaching information 44e, which indicates to the player that the end of the displayable period of the specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment has not yet arrived during a predetermined period.

With this configuration, in step S3221 of the specific operation screen display processing, the display control device 45 displays a specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment, which allows the player to perform at least a volume adjustment operation using the decision button 81, if the player operates the decision button 81 within a predetermined period (e.g., the period from the start of the display of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c of the identification information fluctuation display to 5 seconds before the high-speed fluctuation stops, or the period up to 3 seconds before the end of the ending period), but does not display the specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment if the decision button 81 is operated outside the predetermined period (e.g., the period after 3 seconds have passed since the end of the reach display period or the ending period). In step S3308 of the specific operation period notification processing, the display control device 45 notifies the player of specific operation period end approaching information 44e, which indicates to the player that the end of the period during which the specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment can be displayed has not yet arrived. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the current time during which the identification information variable display allows the display of the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume has not yet ended; in other words, the current time during which the identification information variable display allows the display of the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume. This reduces the disadvantages that arise from mistakenly believing that the current time allows the display of the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume. For example, consider the gaming machine described in (B1) above.

In addition, the specific operation period end approach information 44e includes a specific operation possible period notification image (e.g., text information such as "Volume can be changed") that notifies that the specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment can be displayed.

With this configuration, the specific operation period end approaching information 44a includes a specific operation possible period notification image (e.g., text information such as "Volume change possible") that notifies the player that the specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment can be displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the specified period during which the high-speed changing screen 43c displaying the changing identification information is displayed is a period during which volume adjustment operation can be performed. For example, consider the gaming machine described in (B2) above.

In addition, if the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is displayed within a predetermined period while the high-speed changing screen 43c is being displayed during the identification information change display, a non-notification period may be set after which the specific operation period end approach information 44e is not notified.

With this configuration, if the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is displayed within a predetermined period of time while the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c is displaying the identification information fluctuation display, a non-notification period is set up during which the specific operation period end approach information 44e is not displayed. This reduces the likelihood of the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume being displayed too frequently within the predetermined period of time while the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c is displaying the identification information fluctuation display (i.e., the player performing an operation to display the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume), preventing the player from fully viewing the identification information fluctuation display. For example, consider the gaming machine described in (B4) above.

Furthermore, the specific operation period end approach information 44e may be continuously notified, for example, when the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is displayed during the jackpot ending period.

With this configuration, the specific operation period end approach information 44e may continue to be notified, for example, if the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is displayed during the jackpot ending period. If the jackpot ending period is extended, it becomes easier for the player to modify the content even after performing the specific operation that displays the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume. For example, this is the gaming machine described above in (B5).

In addition, the specific operation period end approach information 44e is also displayed while the specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment is displayed.

With this configuration, the specific operation period end approaching information 44e is displayed even while the specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the end of the display period for the specific operation screen 44b even when looking at the specific operation screen 44b after viewing the specific operation period end approaching information 44e and operating the enter button 81. For example, consider the gaming machine described above in (B6).

In addition, even while the specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment is displayed, the image being displayed for a specified period of time (e.g., the high-speed changing screen 43c) can be viewed.

With this configuration, the image being displayed for a predetermined period of time can be seen even while the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize what the image being displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c) will look like even while the specific operation screen 44b is displayed. This is an example of the gaming machine described above in (B7).

In addition, the specific operation period end approach information 44e can be displayed during the display period of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c during the identification information fluctuation display period, but cannot be displayed after the display period of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c has passed, even during the identification information fluctuation display period.

With this configuration, the specific operation period end approach information 44e can be displayed during the display period of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c during the identification information fluctuation display period, and cannot be displayed after the display period of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c has passed, even during the identification information fluctuation display period. As a result, even during the identification information fluctuation display period, the period after the high-speed fluctuation period is when the player wants to see/see the information (display of the fluctuation display results and reach effect), thereby reducing inconvenience caused by the display of the specific operation screen 44b. For example, this is the gaming machine described above in (B8).

In addition, the specific operation period end approach information 44e can be displayed during the ending presentation in the jackpot round game state when the jackpot round game state transitions to the next high probability/support state, etc., and the specific operation screen 44b cannot be displayed in that next high probability/support state, etc.

With this configuration, the specific operation period end approach information 44e can be displayed during the ending presentation in the jackpot round gaming state when the jackpot round gaming state transitions to the next high probability/support state, etc., and the specific operation screen 44b cannot be displayed in the next high probability/support state, etc. This reduces the inconvenience caused by the inability to adjust the volume after the jackpot round gaming state transitions to the next high probability/support state, etc. For example, consider the gaming machine described above in (B9).

Furthermore, as described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment,
In the jackpot round game state, a right-hit notification is performed to notify the player that a game will be played by hitting the right hand, in step S3235 of the jackpot opening round display process of the display control device 45;
The display control device 45 performs a processing of step S3265 in the high probability/support state transition display processing or a processing of step S3276 in the low probability/support state transition display processing, which notifies the player that the game will be played by hitting right in the next high probability/support state or low probability/support state that occurs after the end of the jackpot round game state;
When transitioning from a jackpot round game state to the next high probability/support state, etc., a jackpot ending effect is executed in which ending information 44j is displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 from the end timing of right-hit game in the jackpot round game state to the start timing of the next high probability/support state, etc., and a step S3241 process is provided in the jackpot ending process of the display control device 45;
In the processing of step S3235 in the jackpot opening round display processing, the display control device 45 issues a right-hit notification in a first mode (for example, enlarged right-hit information during the round 44h) during right-hit play in the jackpot round game state, and in the processing of step S3244 in the jackpot ending display processing, issues a right-hit notification in a second mode (reduced right-hit information during the ending 44k) that has changed to a mode different from the first mode while the jackpot ending performance is being executed.

With this configuration, the display control device 45, in step S3235 of the jackpot opening round display processing, issues a right-hit notification to notify the player that play will be performed by right-hitting in the jackpot round gaming state. The display control device 45, in step S3265 of the high-probability/support state transition display processing or step S3276 of the low-probability/support state transition display processing, issues a right-hit notification to notify the player that play will be performed by right-hitting in the next high-probability/support state, etc., that occurs after the jackpot round gaming state ends. In step S3241 of the jackpot ending processing, when transitioning from the jackpot round gaming state to the next high-probability/support state, etc., the display control device 45 executes a jackpot ending presentation that displays ending information 44j on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 from the end of right-hit play in the jackpot round gaming state to the start of the next high-probability/support state, etc. In step S3235 of the jackpot opening/round display process, the display control device 45 issues a right-hit notification in a first mode (enlarged display) during right-hit play in the jackpot round game state. In step S3244 of the jackpot ending display process, the display control device 45 issues a right-hit notification in a second mode (reduced display) that is different from the first mode during the execution of the jackpot ending presentation. This makes it easier for the player to realize that the jackpot ending presentation is not currently being played during right-hit play in the jackpot round game state, but is currently being executed, and that it is not the right time to execute right-hit play. This reduces the disadvantages that can arise from mistaking the current time during the execution of the jackpot ending presentation for the right-hit presentation. For example, consider the gaming machine described in (C1) above.

The jackpot round game state is a round game state in which, based on the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 being a jackpot, a predetermined number of rounds of play are played, with one round consisting of the opening and closing of the large prize opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32. The next high probability/support state, etc., is an advantageous game state that occurs after the jackpot round game state ends, based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a jackpot. The jackpot ending presentation is executed from the end of the final round in the jackpot round game state to the start of the next high probability/support state, etc., when transitioning from the jackpot round game state to the high probability/support state, etc. During the jackpot round game, the display control unit 45 issues a right-hit notification in a first mode (enlarged round-time right-hit information 44h), and issues a right-hit notification in a second mode (reduced ending-time right-hit information 44k) while the jackpot ending presentation is being executed.

With this configuration, the jackpot round game state is a round game state in which, based on the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 being a jackpot, a predetermined number of rounds of play are played, with one round consisting of the opening and closing of the large prize opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32. The next high probability/support state, etc., is an advantageous game state that is beneficial to the player and occurs after the jackpot round game state ends, based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a jackpot. The jackpot ending effect is executed from the end of the final round in the jackpot round game state to the start of the next high probability/support state, etc., when transitioning from the jackpot round game state to the high probability/support state, etc. The display control unit 45 issues a right-hit notification in the first mode (enlarged display) during the jackpot round game, and issues a right-hit notification in the second mode (reduced display) while the jackpot ending effect is being executed. This makes it easier for players to realize that the current time is not during a jackpot round play but during the execution of a jackpot ending presentation, and that it is not the right time to play a right-hand hit, based on the difference in notification mode between the right-hand hit notification during a jackpot round play and the right-hand hit notification during the execution of a jackpot ending presentation. This reduces the disadvantages that can arise from mistakenly believing that the current time during the execution of a jackpot ending presentation is the right time to play a right-hand hit in a high probability/support state, etc. For example, consider the gaming machine described in (C2) above.

Furthermore, the right-hit notification mode (second mode) during the jackpot ending presentation is less noticeable to the player than the right-hit notification mode (first mode) during the jackpot round game state. For example, right-hit information 44k during the ending is displayed in a smaller size than right-hit information 44h during the round.

With this configuration, the right-hit notification mode (second mode) during the jackpot ending presentation is less noticeable to the player than the right-hit notification mode (first mode) during the jackpot round play state. This makes it difficult to recognize that the timing to play right-hit is when the jackpot ending presentation is being executed, thereby reducing the disadvantages that arise from mistaking the current time during the execution of the jackpot ending presentation for the timing to play right-hit in a high probability/support state, etc. For example, consider the gaming machine described above in (C4).

Furthermore, in the processing of step S3247 in the jackpot ending display processing, the display control device 45 notifies the player of a right hit in a third mode, suggesting a return from the second mode to the first mode, at the end of the jackpot ending presentation (for example, the period from 3 seconds before the end of the ending presentation to the end itself). For example, it displays next game state approach information 44l, which flashes right hit information 44j during the ending.

With this configuration, in step S3247 of the jackpot ending display process, the display control device 45 issues a right-hit notification in the third mode, which suggests a return from the second mode to the first mode, at the end of the jackpot ending presentation (for example, the period from 3 seconds before the end of the ending presentation to the end itself). This allows the right-hit notification to be quickly resumed when the jackpot ending presentation transitions to the next high probability/support state, etc. For example, this is the gaming machine described above in (C5).

The number of display patterns for the ending information 44j may be increased even further than in Example 1. Specifically, in this example, the display pattern for the ending information 44j differs depending on the type of win and the type of variation pattern. This will be explained with reference to Figures 57 and 58. Figure 57(a) is a table for drawing a jackpot for special chart 1 in Example 2, and (b) is a table for drawing a jackpot for special chart 2. Figure 58 is a table for setting ending presentation patterns.

As shown in Figure 57(a), in the special chart 1 jackpot lottery table, if the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is between "0" and "9," the decorative symbol will be a 16R guaranteed jackpot, with a matching "7" decorative symbol. If the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is between "10" and "39," the decorative symbol will be an 8R guaranteed jackpot, with odd numbers (excluding "7") such as "1," "3," "5," and "9." If the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is between "40" and "89," the decorative symbol will be an 8R regular jackpot, with even numbers such as "2," "4," "6," and "8." If the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is between "90" and "99," the decorative symbol will be a 2R guaranteed jackpot, with a matching "341" decorative symbol. A 2R guaranteed jackpot also comes with 100 support states.

As shown in (b), in the special chart 2 jackpot lottery table, if the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is between "0" and "19," the decorative symbol will be a 16R variable jackpot, with a 7 lining up. If the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is between "20" and "49," the decorative symbol will be an 8R variable jackpot, with odd numbers excluding "7" such as "1," "3," "5," and "9." If the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is between "50" and "89," the decorative symbol will be an 8R regular jackpot, with even numbers such as "2," "4," "6," and "8." If the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is between "90" and "99," the decorative symbol will be a 2R variable jackpot, with a 341 lining up. A 2R variable jackpot also comes with 100 support states.

The display control device 45 determines the type of jackpot and the type of variation pattern based on the display variation pattern designation command and the stop display command received from the sub-control device 262. Note that the stop display command is a command converted from the decorative pattern designation command, and therefore contains information identifying the type of jackpot.

As shown in Figure 58, the ROM 522 of the display control device 45 stores an ending presentation pattern setting table that associates jackpot types, variation pattern types, and ending presentation patterns. The correspondence between jackpot types, variation pattern types, and ending presentation patterns will be explained below. Note that, below, when the lottery result based on winning the special chart 1 starting winning device 33a is a jackpot, it will be referred to as "Special 1," and when the lottery result based on winning the special chart 2 starting winning device 33b is a jackpot, it will be referred to as "Special 2."

When the jackpot type is 16R probability change (Special 1) and the variation pattern type is Super Reach C or D (variation time: 60 seconds), the ending time is predetermined to be 35 seconds, and the ending presentation pattern is a pattern in which next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and addiction prevention information 44z are displayed in that order. This ending presentation pattern is the same as the ending presentation pattern described in Example 1 with reference to Figure 53. This ending presentation pattern is the presentation pattern that players will see most often in the case of a 16R probability change (Special 1) jackpot.

The display time for next game state suggestion information 44w is 10 seconds, the display time for manufacturer information 44x is 5 seconds, the display time for card removal prevention information 44y is 10 seconds, and the display time for addiction prevention information 44z is 10 seconds. In Figure 58, next game state suggestion information 44w is abbreviated to "One more time" based on its display content, manufacturer information 44x is abbreviated to "Logo" based on its display content, card removal prevention information 44y is abbreviated to "Prepaid card" based on its display content, and addiction prevention information 44z is abbreviated to "Enjoy in moderation" based on its display content.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability change (Special 1) and the variation pattern type is Super Reach A or B (variation time: 30 seconds), a different ending presentation pattern from the one described above is used. That is, the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and bonus video 44n are displayed in that order. Bonus video 44n is video that cannot be seen during a reach or jackpot round, and is intended to attract the player's interest. Because it is rare for a 16R probability change (Special 1) jackpot to occur during Super Reach A or B, showing bonus video 44n instead of addiction prevention information 44z can increase the player's sense of satisfaction.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability change (Special 1) and the variation pattern type is Super Reach E or F (variation time: 120 seconds), a different ending presentation pattern than that described above is adopted. That is, the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and light-emitting light gaze prevention information 44o are displayed in this order. The light-emitting light gaze prevention information 44o is, for example, text information such as "Please be careful not to stare at the bright light for long periods of time" or an equivalent illustration. When a Super Reach E or F results in a 16-variable (Special 1) jackpot, the long fluctuation time, the display of a confrontation image that emits a strong light during the extended reach effect, and the revival effect that flashes the screen (strong light flashing screen 43g-1 described with reference to FIG. 14) at the end of the extended reach effect place a great strain on the player's eyes. Therefore, by displaying light-emitting gaze prevention information 44o instead of addiction prevention information 44z, it is possible to encourage the player to take measures that take eye strain into consideration, such as stopping to gaze at the screen and resting their eyes while light-emitting gaze prevention information 44o is displayed, or moving their face further away from the screen after the transition to the next game state. Note that in FIG. 58, light-emitting gaze prevention information o is abbreviated to "strong light" based on its displayed content.

When the jackpot type is 16R Probable Change (Special 2) and the variation pattern type is Super Reach A, B, Super Reach C, D, Super Reach E, F, the ending presentation pattern is basically the same as the above-mentioned 16R Probable Change (Special 1) with Super Reach A, B, Super Reach C, D, Super Reach E, F, except that manufacturer information 44x is omitted. This makes it possible to show the player an ending presentation that takes into account the differences in variation pattern type, even in the case of a Special 2 jackpot. Furthermore, by omitting manufacturer information 44x from the ending presentation pattern in the case of a Special 2 jackpot, it is possible to reduce the time burden on the player when consecutive jackpots such as Special 2 jackpots occur.

When the jackpot type is 8R probability change (Special 1) and the fluctuation pattern type is normal reach A, B (fluctuation time: 20 seconds), super reach A, B (fluctuation time: 30 seconds), or super reach C, D (fluctuation time: 60 seconds), the ending time is predetermined to be 25 seconds, and the ending presentation pattern is a pattern in which next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal prevention information 44y are displayed in that order.

If the jackpot type is 8R probability change (Special 2) and the variation pattern type is normal reach A, B (variation time: 20 seconds), super reach A, B (variation time: 30 seconds), or super reach C, D (variation time: 60 seconds), the ending time is predetermined to be 20 seconds, and the ending presentation pattern is a pattern in which next game state suggestion information 44w and card removal prevention information 44y are displayed in that order.

When the jackpot type is 8R normal (special 1) and the variation pattern type is normal reach A, B (variation time: 20 seconds), super reach A, B (variation time: 30 seconds), or super reach C, D (variation time: 60 seconds), the ending time is predetermined to be 25 seconds, and the ending presentation pattern is a pattern in which next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal prevention information 44y are displayed in that order. In Figure 58, next game state suggestion information 44w is a text image of "Chance!", which suggests that the next game state is a low probability (normal) state, but that the support state will be attached 100 times, and is therefore abbreviated to "Chance."

When the jackpot type is 8R normal (special 2) and the variation pattern type is normal reach A, B (variation time: 20 seconds), super reach A, B (variation time: 30 seconds), or super reach C, D (variation time: 60 seconds), the ending time is predetermined to be 20 seconds, and the ending presentation pattern is a pattern in which next game state suggestion information 44w and card removal prevention information 44y are displayed in that order. In Figure 58, next game state suggestion information 44w is a text image of "See you again!", which suggests that the next game state will be a low probability (normal) state and that no support state will be added, and is therefore abbreviated to "See you again."

When the jackpot type is 2R probability change (special 1), the fluctuation pattern type is a pattern in which "341" is aligned without going through a reach (fluctuation time: 15 seconds), the ending time is predetermined to be 5 seconds, and the ending presentation pattern is a pattern in which only manufacturer information 44x is displayed, for example. Even if manufacturer information 44x is displayed after the symbols are aligned to "341," it is difficult for the player to realize that this is a jackpot state, so it is possible to transition to a high probability/support state in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to notice.

When the jackpot type is 2R probability change (Special 2), the fluctuation pattern type is a pattern in which "341" is completed without going through a reach (fluctuation time: 15 seconds), the ending time is predetermined to be 5 seconds, and the ending presentation pattern is a pattern in which only the bonus information 44p is displayed. For example, in the case of a pachinko machine with settings, the bonus information 44p is a video or still image that suggests the current setting information. Regardless of whether the player realizes that they are in a jackpot state, knowing the current setting information can make the subsequent high probability and support state even more enjoyable.

A 2R probability variable jackpot is a jackpot that transitions to a high probability/support state without informing the player of this fact, so next game state suggestion information 44w is not set as an ending presentation pattern. Also, for a 2R probability variable jackpot, the opening time of the large prize slot 32a in each round is set to be short so that game balls are unlikely to be released, so no prize balls are paid out, and so card removal prevention information 44z is not set as an ending presentation pattern. Also, for a 2R probability variable jackpot, the fluctuation time is short, making it unlikely for the player to become addicted to the game, so addiction prevention information 44z is not set as an ending presentation pattern.

In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to present the ending presentation that is predicted to be most appropriate for the player at that time, depending on the type of jackpot and type of variation pattern.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment,
The big win ending effect has a plurality of ending effect patterns formed by combining predetermined images from a plurality of types of images,
The ending presentation pattern differs depending on the type of big win round gaming state.

With this configuration, the jackpot ending presentation has multiple ending presentation patterns made up of combinations of predetermined images from multiple types of images, and the ending presentation patterns differ depending on the type of jackpot round game state, allowing the player to see a combination of images that is most appealing to them as the jackpot ending presentation depending on the type of jackpot round game state. For example, this is the gaming machine described above in (A8).

In addition, the jackpot ending effect according to the jackpot round game state of a predetermined type (for example, 16R probability change (special 1)) has a predetermined ending effect pattern in which multiple types (for example, four types) of images are combined in a predetermined combination,
In the case of a jackpot ending presentation according to a jackpot round game state of another type (for example, 8R probability change (special 1)), another ending presentation pattern is formed by reducing one or more images from among the multiple types of images included in a predetermined combination pattern.
In addition, for a jackpot ending presentation according to a jackpot round game state of another type (for example, 2R probability change (special 1)), a different ending presentation pattern is formed by reducing a plurality of images (for example, three types) from the plurality of types of images included in a predetermined combination pattern.

With this configuration, the jackpot ending presentation corresponding to a predetermined type of jackpot round game state has a predetermined combination pattern that combines multiple types of images in a predetermined combination, and the jackpot ending presentation corresponding to a different type of jackpot round game state has a different combination pattern created by removing one or more of the multiple types of images included in this predetermined combination pattern. This reduces the processing burden on the gaming machine when determining the jackpot ending presentation corresponding to the type of jackpot round game state. Furthermore, because the combination pattern of jackpot ending presentations is determined for each type of jackpot round game state, it becomes easier to provide the player with a jackpot ending presentation associated with the type of jackpot round game state. For example, consider the gaming machine described in (A9) above.

In addition, the big win ending performance is a performance in which multiple types of images are executed consecutively in a predetermined combination,
When the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a jackpot result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination depending on the type of variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot result,
The right-hit information during ending 44k, the next game state approach information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v indicate to the player that the start timing of the next high probability/support state, etc. has not arrived until the time when multiple types of images have been executed in succession in a predetermined combination.

With this configuration, the jackpot ending effect involves multiple types of images being executed in succession in a predetermined combination. When the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 results in a jackpot, the predetermined combinations are displayed in different combinations depending on the type of variation pattern corresponding to that jackpot result. This reduces the disadvantage of displaying the same jackpot ending effect when the same jackpot result occurs as a jackpot result that generates a certain type of jackpot round game state, but the type of variation pattern leading up to that jackpot result is different. Furthermore, the next game state approach information 44l, etc., indicates to the player that the start timing of the next high probability/support state, etc. has not yet arrived until the timing when multiple types of images have been executed in succession in a predetermined combination has ended. Therefore, even if the same jackpot result occurs but a different jackpot ending effect is displayed, the risk of suffering the above-mentioned disadvantage is reduced. For example, consider the gaming machine described above in (A10).

The big win ending effect has a plurality of ending effect patterns formed by combining predetermined images from a plurality of types of images,
The ending presentation pattern differs depending on the length of time during which the identification information variation display presentation based on the variation pattern is performed.
For example, in the case of a 2R probability variable jackpot, which clearly has a shorter fluctuation time than other jackpots, there is only one ending performance pattern, so the time is shorter than the ending performance of other jackpots.

With this configuration, the jackpot ending presentation has multiple ending presentation patterns made up of combinations of predetermined images from multiple types of images, and the ending presentation patterns vary depending on the length of time that the identification information variable display presentation based on the variation pattern is performed, so that the player can be shown a combination of images that is most appealing to them as the jackpot ending presentation depending on the length of time that the identification information variable display presentation is performed. For example, this is the gaming machine described above in (A11).

The big win ending effect has a plurality of ending effect patterns formed by combining predetermined images from a plurality of types of images,
The ending presentation pattern differs depending on the expectation of a big win result occurring in the identification information variation display presentation based on the variation pattern.
For example, in the case of Super Reach E and F, which have the highest probability of winning, the fluctuation time is the longest and the screen is accompanied by intense flashing, so an ending performance pattern including the light gazing prevention information 44o is displayed.

With this configuration, the jackpot ending presentation has multiple ending presentation patterns made up of combinations of predetermined images from multiple types of images, and the ending presentation patterns vary depending on the likelihood of a jackpot result occurring in the identification information variable display presentation based on the variation pattern. This makes it possible to show the player a combination of images that is most desirable to them as the jackpot ending presentation, depending on the likelihood of a jackpot result occurring in the identification information variable display presentation. For example, this is the gaming machine described above in (A12).

In addition, the ending presentation pattern has a different combination of multiple types of images in the jackpot ending presentation depending on whether the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, which is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning device 33a for special chart 1, is a jackpot result, or whether the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, which is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning device 33b for special chart 2, is a jackpot result.
For example, the ending performance pattern for the special 1 jackpot includes manufacturer information 44x, but the ending pattern for the special 2 jackpot does not include manufacturer information 44x. Also, for example, when an 8R normal jackpot is triggered by a ball entering the special 2 starting winning device 33b, a support state is not provided, so the content of the next game state suggestion information 44w is made different from when the trigger is a ball entering the special 1 starting winning device 33a.

With this configuration, the ending presentation pattern will have different combinations of multiple images in the jackpot ending presentation depending on whether the result of the jackpot lottery performed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, which is triggered by a ball entering the special symbol 1 starting winning device 33a, is a jackpot, or whether the result of the jackpot lottery performed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, which is triggered by a ball entering the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b, is a jackpot. This makes it possible to show the player a combination of images that is preferred by the player as the jackpot ending presentation, depending on the trigger for the jackpot lottery. For example, this is the gaming machine described above in (A14).

In the gaming machine of Example 2, the display pattern of the ending information 44j differs depending on the type of win and the type of variation pattern, but the display pattern of the ending information 44j may also differ depending on other conditions. Specifically, in this example, the display pattern of the ending information 44j differs depending on the situation leading up to the occurrence of the current jackpot. This will be explained with reference to Figures 59 and 60. Figure 59(a) is a table for drawing a jackpot for special chart 1 in Example 3, and (b) is a table for drawing a jackpot for special chart 2. Figure 60 is a table for setting ending presentation patterns.

In this embodiment, different ending presentation patterns are set depending on the circumstances leading up to the occurrence of the current jackpot (the jackpot occurrence circumstances). The jackpot occurrence circumstances include the number of changes from the previous jackpot to the current jackpot, the type of the previous jackpot, etc.

The relationship between the type of win and the ending time will be explained. In Example 1, the ending time was set according to the type of win (whether it was a special jackpot 1 or a special jackpot 2, and the number of jackpot rounds), but in this example, the ending time only differs depending on whether it was a special jackpot 1 or a special jackpot 2. In other words, the ending time for a special jackpot 1 is 35 seconds for all 16R special jackpots, 8R special jackpots, and 8R regular jackpots. The ending time for a special jackpot 2 is 30 seconds for all 16R special jackpots, 8R special jackpots, and 8R regular jackpots.

Next, we will explain the relationship between the probability of succession and the number of electric support times for each type of win. In Example 1, the probability of succession and the number of electric support times for the special chart 1 and special chart 2 probability of succession jackpots were 100 times, but in this example, the probability of succession and the number of electric support times for the special chart 1 and special chart 2 probability of succession jackpots are limited to the next time, which is different.

If the jackpot type is 16R probability change (Special 1) and the number of changes from the previous jackpot to the current jackpot is less than 100, the ending presentation pattern displays next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal reminder information 44y, and bonus video 44n in that order. This can increase the sense of satisfaction that a jackpot has been achieved with fewer changes since the previous jackpot.

If the jackpot type is 16R probability change (Special 1) and the number of changes from the previous jackpot to the current jackpot is between 100 and 200, the ending presentation pattern is a pattern in which next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and first addiction prevention information 44z1 are displayed in this order. The first addiction prevention information 44z1 is the same text information as the addiction prevention information 44z in Example 1, stating "Pachinko and pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation."

If the jackpot type is 16R probability change (Special 1) and the number of changes from the previous jackpot to the current jackpot is 200 or more, the ending presentation pattern is a pattern in which next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and second addiction prevention information 44z2 are displayed in that order. The second addiction prevention information 44z2 is text information such as "Pachinko and pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation. Please be careful not to get addicted," which urges the player to avoid addiction more strongly than the first addiction prevention information 44z1, as well as an illustration urging the player to avoid addiction.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability change (Special 2), the ending presentation pattern is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and bonus video 44n are displayed in this order, regardless of whether the previous jackpot was a 16R or 8R jackpot. The fact that the jackpot in question is a Special 2 jackpot means that the jackpot was won during a high probability/support state or a low probability/support state. In other words, it is possible that the jackpot was won without many fluctuations since the previous jackpot, and that the jackpot was won without significantly reducing the number of prize balls won in the previous jackpot. Furthermore, it is unlikely that the number of prize balls won in the current jackpot will be less than the number won in the previous jackpot. Therefore, in this situation, it is more interesting to increase the player's satisfaction by showing bonus video 44n than to appeal to players to prevent addiction.

When the jackpot type is 8R probability change (special 1), if the number of changes from the previous jackpot to the current jackpot is less than 100, the ending presentation pattern is the same as for the 16R probability change (special 1) described above, where next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and bonus video 44n are displayed in that order. If the number of changes from the previous jackpot to the current jackpot is 100 or more but less than 200, first addiction prevention information 44z1 is displayed in place of bonus video 44n, as in the 16R probability change (special 1) described above. If the number of changes from the previous jackpot to the current jackpot is 200 or more, second addiction prevention information 44z2 is displayed in place of first addiction prevention information 44z1, as in the 16R probability change (special 1) described above.

When the jackpot type is 8R probability change (Special 2) and the previous jackpot was 16R probability change (Special 1) (Special 2), the ending presentation pattern is displayed in the following order: next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal reminder information 44y, and bonus video 44n. This is because, although the prize balls won in this jackpot are fewer than the prize balls won in the previous jackpot, since 16 rounds' worth of prize balls were won in the previous jackpot, the player may still have balls to spare.

If the jackpot type is 8R probability (special 2), but the previous jackpot was 8R probability (special 1) (special 2), or 8R normal (special 1), the ending presentation pattern will be displayed in the following order: next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal prevention information 44y, and first addiction prevention information 44z1. The prize balls won in this jackpot are the same as those won in the previous jackpot, but since the previous jackpot only won 8 rounds' worth of prize balls, the player may not have enough balls to play.

When the jackpot type is 8R normal (special 1), the ending presentation pattern displayed will be the same as when the jackpot type is 8R special (special 1).

When the jackpot type is 8R normal (Special 2), the ending presentation pattern is displayed in the following order: next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal prevention information 44y, and second addiction prevention information 44z2, even if the previous jackpot was 16R special (Special 1) (Special 2), 8R special (Special 1) (Special 2), or 8R normal (Special 1). This is because, regardless of which of the above jackpots the previous jackpot was, the player will be returned to a low probability/unsupported state after the jackpot, which could result in a significant reduction in the number of balls held.

In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to present an ending presentation that is predicted to be most appropriate for the player at that time, based on the situation from the previous jackpot to the current jackpot.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment,
The big win ending effect has a plurality of ending effect patterns formed by combining predetermined images from a plurality of types of images,
The ending presentation pattern differs depending on the number of times the identification information variable display presentation is executed from the occurrence of the previous big win round game state until the occurrence of the next big win round game state.

With this configuration, the jackpot ending presentation has multiple ending presentation patterns made up of combinations of predetermined images from multiple types of images, and the ending presentation patterns differ depending on the number of times the identification information variable display presentation is executed from the occurrence of the previous jackpot round game state until the occurrence of the next jackpot round game state. This makes it possible to show the player a combination of images that is preferable to the player as the jackpot ending presentation, depending on the number of times the identification information variable display presentation is executed from the occurrence of the previous jackpot round game state until the occurrence of the next jackpot round game state. For example, this is the gaming machine described above in (A13).

In the gaming machine of Example 1, the specific operation period information 44a is displayed as the specific operation period end approach information 44e by flashing it, but the specific operation period end approach information 44e may be displayed in a manner different from that of Example 1. This will be explained with reference to Figure 61. Figures 61 (a1) to (a3) are diagrams explaining the display manner of the specific operation period end approach information in Example 4, and (b1) to (b3) are diagrams explaining a display manner different from (a1) to (a3).

Here, let's assume that this high-speed fluctuation is a complete miss and the fluctuation pattern lasts 20 seconds. The high-speed fluctuation time is 15 seconds, with only the specific operation period information 44a displayed for the first 5 seconds, and then the specific operation period end approach information 44e displayed from 5 seconds until 15 seconds. Since the high-speed fluctuation ends after 15 seconds, the specific operation period end approach information 44e disappears.

As shown in (a1), a high-speed fluctuation screen 43c is displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 until five seconds after the start of fluctuation. Five seconds after the start of fluctuation, as shown in (a2), in the upper right corner of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c, first specific operation period end approaching information 44e1 is displayed, which flashes the specific operation period information 44a, as in Example 1. At the same time, second specific operation period end approaching information 44e2 is displayed in a different display format from the first specific operation period end approaching information 44e1, informing the player that the end of the specific operation period is approaching.

Specifically, as shown in (a2), to the left of the first specific operation period end approach information 44e1, second specific operation period end approach information 44e2 is displayed, which is expressed as text information such as "10 seconds left. Please change the volume quickly." Adding time information makes it easier for players to understand. The high-speed fluctuation ends 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and as shown in (a3), the left pattern stop screen 43d appears, and the first specific operation period end approach information 44e1 and second specific operation period end approach information 44e2 are hidden.

This second specific operation period end approaching information 44e2 allows the player to clearly understand that the end of the specific operation period is approaching.

Next, we will explain other display modes with reference to (b1) to (b3).

As shown in (b1), the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42 displays specific operation period information 44a in the upper right corner of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c. This specific operation period information 44a is displayed as third specific operation period end approach information 44e3, which is displayed in a faint light as time passes, as shown in (b2). As the high-speed fluctuation approaches the end, the third specific operation period end approach information 44e3 completely disappears on the left pattern stop screen 43d, as shown in (b3).

This third specific operation period end approach information 44e3 allows the player to intuitively understand that the end of the specific operation period is approaching.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this fourth embodiment, the second specific operation period end approach information 44e2 includes second specific operation period end approach information 44e2 indicating the remaining time during which the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume can be displayed (for example, a text image such as "10 seconds left. Please change the volume as soon as possible"). It is also possible to simply suggest, such as "Please change the volume as soon as possible," without including time information.

With this configuration, the specific operation period end approaching information 44e includes second specific operation period end approaching information 44e2 (e.g., a text image such as "10 seconds left. Please change the volume quickly" or "Please change the volume quickly") that indicates (suggests) the remaining time during which the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume can be displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the remaining time during which the specific operation can be performed during the specified period during which the identification information is displayed variably. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (B3) above.

In the gaming machine according to Example 1, the right-hit during ending information 44k is displayed flashing at the end of the ending period as the next gaming state approach information 44l, but the next gaming state approach information 44l may be displayed in a different manner. This will be explained with reference to Figure 62. Figures 62 (a1) to (a3) are diagrams explaining the display mode of the next gaming state approach information 44l in Example 5, and (b1) to (b3) are diagrams explaining a display mode different from (a1) to (a3).

As shown in (a1), the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 displays an ending screen 43j at the same time that the addiction prevention information 44z is displayed. In the upper left corner of the ending screen 43j, right-hit information during ending 44k is displayed, as in Example 1. This right-hit information during ending 44k is displayed in a flashing manner, as in Example 1, as shown in (a2), and is displayed as first next game state approach information 44l1.

At this time, to the right of the first next game state approaching information 44l1, second next game state approaching information 44l2 is displayed in a different manner from the first next game state approaching information 44l1, informing the player that the start timing of the next game state is approaching (in other words, the end timing of the current game state is approaching). Specifically, the second next game state approaching information 44l2 is text information such as "Not yet," informing the player that it is not yet time to start hitting to the right in the next game state (high probability/support state or low probability/support state).

As shown in (a3), the first next game state approach information 44l1 and the second next game state approach information 44l2 are hidden when the screen switches to the high probability state screen 43k, where the next game state begins. Instead of the first next game state approach information 44l1 and the second next game state approach information 44l2, the high probability state screen 43k displays high probability/support state right hit information 44m, which notifies the player to hit right.

This second next game state approach information 44l2 allows the player to clearly understand that the start timing of the next game state is approaching.

Next, we will explain other display modes with reference to (b1) to (b3).

As shown in (b1), the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 displays the ending screen 43j at the time when the addiction prevention information 44z is displayed, and right-hit information during ending 44k is also displayed. As shown in (b2), right-hit information during ending 44k is displayed in a flashing manner as first next game state approach information 44l1. At this time, to the right of the first next game state approach information 44l1, third next game state approach information 44l3, which is illustrated information indicating that the next game state has not yet occurred, is displayed. The third next game state approach information 44l3 is an image depicting an image of a hand stopping the arrow indicating right-hit that was displayed as right-hit information during ending 44k (which is the first next game state approach information 44l1 at the time shown in (b2)).

When the ending period ends, as shown in (b3), the first next game state approach information 44l1 and the third next game state approach information 44l3 are hidden, and the high probability state screen 43k and the high probability/support state right hit information 44m are displayed.

This third next game state approach information 44l3 allows the player to intuitively understand that the end of the ending period is approaching and the start of the next game state is approaching.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment,
The right-hit notification mode (second mode) in the jackpot ending presentation is a mode that makes it more difficult for the player to perform a right-hit operation than the right-hit notification mode (first mode) in the jackpot round game state. For example, the second mode is ending right-hit information 44k, which is indicated by the text "Right Hit" and a right-pointing arrow, and the first mode is second next-game state approach information 44l2, which is indicated by text information "Not yet!" displayed near the ending right-hit information 44k and an illustration that discourages right-hit operation. The text information "Not yet!" and the illustration that discourages right-hit operation can dissuade the player from performing a right-hit operation.

With this configuration, the right-hit notification mode (first mode) during the jackpot ending presentation is more difficult for the player to perform than the right-hit notification mode (second mode) during the jackpot round play state. This makes it more difficult to recognize that the timing to perform a right-hit play is when the jackpot ending presentation is being performed, thereby reducing the disadvantages that arise from mistaking the current time during the jackpot ending presentation for the timing to perform a right-hit play in a high probability/support state, etc. For example, consider the gaming machine described above in (C3).

The next game state approaching information 44l may be displayed in a display format different from that of Examples 1 and 5. Specifically, the next game state approaching information 44l may be displayed with content different from that of Examples 1 and 5. This will be explained with reference to Figure 63. Figures 63(a) to (e) are diagrams illustrating the display format of the next game state approaching information 441 in Example 6.

As shown in (a), the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 displays the ending screen 43j at the same time as the addiction prevention information 44z is displayed, and right-hit during ending information 44k is also displayed. Three seconds before the end of the ending period, the right-hit during ending information 44k gradually expands as shown in (b) to be displayed as fourth next game state approaching information 44l4, informing the player that the next game state (a game state requiring a right hit) is approaching. At the same time, to the right of the fourth next game state approaching information 44l4, fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 is displayed, counting down the time until the end of the ending period to inform the player that the start timing of the next game state is approaching. In (b), the number "3" is displayed in a circle, informing the player that there are three seconds until the start of the next game state.

As shown in (c), when one second has passed since (b), the fourth next game state approach information 44l4 is enlarged compared to the timing of (b). The fifth next game state approach information 44l5 displays the number "2" in a circle, indicating that two seconds remain.

As shown in (d), when one second has passed since (c), the fourth next game state approach information 44l4 is enlarged even more than at the timing of (b). The fifth next game state approach information 44l5 displays the number "1" in a circle, indicating that one second remains.

As shown in (e), when the ending period ends and the next high probability/support state begins, the fourth next game state approach information 44l4 and the fifth next game state approach information 44l5 are hidden, and high probability/support state right hit information 44m, which is larger than the fourth next game state approach information 44l4 shown in (d), is displayed.

This fourth next game state approach information 44l4 and fifth next game state approach information 44l5 allow the player to more intuitively understand that the end of the ending period is approaching and the start of the next game state is approaching.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment,
Furthermore, the display control device 45 performs a right-hit notification in a third mode, which indicates a return from the second mode to the first mode, during the final stage of the jackpot ending presentation (e.g., the period from 3 seconds before the end of the ending presentation to the end itself). For example, the display control device 45 displays fourth next game state approach information 44l4, which gradually enlarges the right-hit information 44j during the ending presentation. The display control device 45 also displays fifth next game state approach information 44l5, which counts down the time from 3 seconds before the end of the ending presentation to the end itself.

With this configuration, the display control device 45 issues a right-hit notification in the third mode, which suggests a return from the second mode to the first mode, at the end of the jackpot ending presentation (for example, from 3 seconds before the end of the ending presentation to the end itself). This allows the right-hit notification to be quickly resumed when the jackpot ending presentation transitions to the next high probability/support state, etc. For example, this is the gaming machine described above in (C5).

The next game state approach information 44l may be displayed in a different display format than that of Examples 1, 5, and 6. Specifically, in this embodiment, the next game state approach information 44l continues to be displayed until a different timing than that of Examples 1, 5, and 6 so that the game ball launched based on the next game state approach information 441 can enter the game at the first opening timing of the electric device of the special chart 2 start winning device 33b in the next high probability/support state, etc. This will be explained with reference to Figure 64. Figures 64 (a) to (f) are diagrams explaining the display format of the next game state approach information 441 in Example 7.

As shown in (a), the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 displays an ending screen 43j at the timing when the addiction prevention information 44z is displayed, and right-hit information 44k during the ending is displayed.

During the jackpot round, many game balls pass through the normal symbol starting hole 34 due to right-hand hits, and in (a), all four hold lamps 41c on the second symbol display device 41, which hold the normal symbol change, indicate a hold. After the ending period ends, that is, at the same time as the next high-probability/support state or low-probability/support state occurs, the normal symbol change begins. In a support state, the result of the normal symbol drawing is a winning result with almost all probability. If the first normal symbol drawing results in a winning result, the timing for the first opening of the electric device of the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b in the next high-probability/support state, etc., is set to 5 seconds after the start of the next high-probability/support state, etc. It takes 4 seconds for a game ball launched by right-hand hit operation to enter the opening special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b.

Here, assume that the display mode of the next game state approach information 441 is set so that the player hits to the right at the same time as the ending period ends, as in Examples 1, 5, and 6. The first game ball hit to the right at the same time as the ending period ends passes through the normal symbol starting hole 34, and the number of reserved normal symbols increases. However, due to the time relationship described above, this first game ball does not win in the special symbol 2 starting winning device 33b. In this sense, this first game ball is wasted. The longer the time interval in the time relationship described above, the more game balls will be wasted.

In this embodiment, the timing of displaying the next game state approach information 441 is delayed so that the first game ball will enter the special game ball starting winning device 33b for special game chart 2. That is, as shown in (b), the fourth next game state approach information 44l4 and the fifth next game state approach information 44l5 begin to be displayed two seconds before the end of the ending period. Specifically, the fourth next game state approach information 44l4 gradually enlarges the ending right hit information 44k from this timing, so that the reduced image indicating the ending right hit information 44k becomes an enlarged image indicating the high probability/support state right hit information 44m three seconds later. At this timing, the ending right hit information 44k is one-quarter the size of the high probability/support state right hit information 44m. The fifth next game state approach information 44l5 counts down the remaining time (3 seconds) until the resumption of right hits in the next high probability/support state. The fifth next game state approach information 44l5 is displayed as a circled number "3".

As shown in (c), one second before the end of the ending period, the fourth next game state approach information 44l4 displays the ending right hit information 44k enlarged to one-third the size of the high probability/support state right hit information 44m. The fifth next game state approach information 44l5 displays the number "2" in a circle.

As shown in (d), at the start of the next high probability/support state, the fourth next game state approach information 44l4 is displayed as right-hit during ending information 44k enlarged to two-thirds the size of right-hit during high probability/support state information 44m. The fifth next game state approach information 44l5 is displayed as a circled number "1."

As shown in (e), one second after the start of the next high probability/support state, the fourth next game state approach information 44l4 is displayed with the ending right hit information 44k enlarged to the same size as the high probability/support state right hit information 44m. In other words, the high probability/support state right hit information 44m is displayed in place of the fourth next game state approach information 44l4. The fifth next game state approach information 44l5 has erased the circled text. In other words, the countdown has ended. At this point, the player begins the right hit operation.

As shown in (f), the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c is displayed 5 seconds after the start of the next high-probability/support state. At this time, the special symbol 2 start-up winning device 33b enters an open state based on the fact that the first regular symbol lottery result is a winning result. The gaming ball launched at (e) reaches the special symbol 2 start-up winning device 33b 4 seconds later, that is, 5 seconds after the start of the next high-probability/support state. In this way, after the player interrupts right-hand play during the ending period, the gaming ball launched first by the player will enter the special symbol 2 start-up winning device 33b at the first opening timing of the special symbol 2 start-up winning device 33b. This prevents the gaming ball launched first by the player from going to waste.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment,
The display control device 45 displays fifth next game state approach information 44l5 (countdown information until the start timing of the right-hit operation for the next high probability/support state, etc.) indicating that the start timing of the right-hit operation for the next high probability/support state, etc. is approaching.

With this configuration, the display control device 45 notifies the fifth next game state approach information 4415, which indicates that the timing to start the right hit operation for the next high probability/support state, etc. is approaching. This makes it easier to grasp the timing to start the right hit operation for the next high probability/support state, etc. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantages that arise from not being able to properly grasp the timing to start the right hit operation for the next high probability/support state, etc. For example, this is the gaming machine described above in (C7).

The display control device 45 displays fifth next game state approach information 4415 (countdown information) indicating that the timing to start the right-hit operation for the next high probability/support state, etc. is approaching from the jackpot ending presentation to the next high probability/support state, etc. (the period from 2 seconds before the end of the jackpot ending presentation to 1 second after the start of the next high probability/support state, etc.).

With this configuration, the display control device 45 notifies the fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 (countdown information) during the jackpot ending presentation, indicating that the start timing of the next high probability/support state, etc. is approaching. This makes it easier to grasp the start timing of the right hit operation for the next game state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantages that arise from not being able to properly grasp the start timing of the right hit operation for the next high probability/support state, etc. An example is the gaming machine described above in (C8).

The next game state approach information 44l may be displayed at a different timing than in Example 7. Specifically, in this example, the next game state approach information 44l is displayed until a different timing than in Example 7 so that a game ball launched based on the next game state approach information 441 before the end of the ending period can enter the game at the first opening timing of the electric device of the special chart 2 start winning device 33b in the next high probability/support state, etc. This will be explained with reference to Figure 65. Figures 65 (a) to (f) are diagrams explaining the display mode of the next game state approach information 441 in Example 8.

As shown in (a), 6 seconds before the end of the ending period, the ending screen 43j displays addiction prevention information 44z and right-hit information 44k during the ending.

If the first normal symbol drawing results in a winning result, the timing of the first opening of the electric device of the special symbol 2 start winning device 33b in the next high probability/support state, etc., is assumed to be earlier than in Example 7, for example, 2 seconds after the start of the next high probability/support state, etc. The time until the game ball launched by a right-hit operation enters the open special symbol 2 start winning device 33b is assumed to be 4 seconds after launch, the same as in Example 7.

In this embodiment, the timing of displaying the next game state approach information 441 is brought forward compared to Example 7 so that this first game ball will enter the special game ball starting winning device 33b for special game ball 2. That is, as shown in (b), the fourth next game state approach information 44l4 and the fifth next game state approach information 44l5 begin to be displayed 5 seconds before the end of the ending period. Specifically, the fourth next game state approach information 44l4 begins to expand the right-hit during ending information 44k from this timing. The fifth next game state approach information 44l5 displays the number "3" in a circle as a countdown display from this timing.

As shown in (c), four seconds before the end of the ending period, the fourth next game state approaching information 44l4 expands the right-hit during ending information 44k to one-third the size of the right-hit during high probability/support state information 44m. The fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 displays the number "2" in a circle as a countdown display.

As shown in (d), three seconds before the end of the ending period, the fourth next game state approaching information 44l4 expands the right-hit during ending information 44k to two-thirds the size of the right-hit during high probability/support state information 44m. The fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 displays the number "1" in a circle as a countdown display.

As shown in (e), two seconds before the end of the ending period, the fourth next game state approaching information 44l4 expands the ending right hit information 44k to the same size as the high probability/support state right hit information 44m. In other words, the fourth next game state approaching information 44l4 is replaced with the high probability/support state right hit information 44m. The fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 erases the circled text, indicating the end of the countdown. At this point, the player begins the right hit operation.

As shown in (f), the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c is displayed two seconds after the start of the next high-probability/support state. At this time, the special symbol 2 start-up winning device 33b enters an open state based on the fact that the first normal symbol lottery result is a winning result. The gaming ball launched at (e) reaches the special symbol 2 start-up winning device 33b four seconds later, that is, two seconds after the start of the next high-probability/support state. In this way, after the player interrupts right-hand hitting during the ending period, the gaming ball launched first by the player enters the special symbol 2 start-up winning device 33b at the first opening timing of the special symbol 2 start-up winning device 33b.

This prevents the first game ball fired by the player from going to waste, even if the timing of the initial release of the electric device of the special chart 2 starting winning device 33b in the next high probability/support state, etc., is earlier than in Example 7, for example, 2 seconds after the start of the next high probability/support state, etc.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment,
The display control device 45 notifies the fifth next game state approach information 44l5 (countdown information) indicating that the timing to start the right-hit operation for the next high probability/support state, etc. is approaching during the jackpot ending presentation (the period from 5 seconds before the end of the jackpot ending presentation to 2 seconds before the end).

With this configuration, the display control device 45 notifies the player of the fifth next game state approaching information 44l5 (countdown information) during the jackpot ending presentation (the period from 5 seconds before the end of the jackpot ending presentation to 2 seconds before the end), indicating that the timing to start the right-hit operation for the next high probability/support state, etc. is approaching. This allows the player to perform the right-hit operation for the next high probability/support state, etc. at the appropriate timing during the jackpot ending presentation. This is an example of the gaming machine described above in (C9).

This embodiment differs from the previous embodiments in that the sound output during a volume change operation is associated with a display effect. The display format of the next game state approach information also differs from the previous embodiments. This will be explained with reference to Figure 66. Figure 66 is a diagram illustrating the display format for a specific operation period following the end of a jackpot round game in Example 9.

In Example 1, the specific operation period information 44a was text information stating "Volume can be changed," and this text information functioned as specific operation period end approaching information 44e, which flashes as the ending time approaches. In this example, the specific operation period information 44a is text information stating "Volume can be changed by pressing the button during the ending," as shown in (b) to (g). The specific operation period end approaching information 44e is displayed as a seek bar or indicator image that indicates the elapsed time of the ending presentation. As a result, when the seek bar or indicator image approaches the end time, the player can intuitively recognize that the end of the specific operation period is approaching (i.e., the start timing of the next game state is approaching).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the player presses any of the frame buttons 80, the screen switches from the ending screen 43j to the specific operation screen 44b. That is, the screen switches to the specific operation screen 44b not only by pressing the confirm button 81, but also by pressing the left selection button 82 or the right selection button 83. In other words, during the ending presentation, unlike during the reach display presentation or the jackpot round display presentation, no operation means such as the frame buttons 80 is performed. Therefore, if any operation means is operated while the specific operation period information 44a is displayed, it is determined that a volume change operation has been performed, making it easier for the player to change the volume. Of course, if the gaming machine requires the player to hold their hand over a specified area of the display screen 42a instead of pressing the frame button 80 during the reach display presentation or the jackpot round display presentation, the screen may be switched to the specific operation screen 45b by holding their hand over the display screen 42a.

If any of the frame buttons 80 is pressed during the ending period from (b) to (g), for example, during the display period of the addiction prevention information 44z shown in (e), the screen switches to the specific operation screen 44b as shown in (i). If the enter button 81 is pressed at the time of switching to the specific operation screen 44b, the addiction prevention information 44z "Pachinko and pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation" is output at a volume of 3. As shown in (j), if either the left selection button 82 or the right selection button 83, which change the volume, is operated on this specific operation screen 44b, the sound output unit 24 outputs the addiction prevention information 44z "Pachinko and pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation" at the changed volume. This sound is output at the changed volume each time the player presses the left selection button 82 or the right selection button 83 to change the volume.

As a result, after switching to the specific operation screen 44b, the player will not know what is being displayed as the ending information 44j at that time, as the ending information 44j is hidden behind the specific operation screen 44b. However, the player can change the volume while listening to the audio corresponding to the ending information 44j that will be displayed when the volume is changed. Therefore, even if the volume is changed during the ending presentation period, the ending information 44j can be communicated to the player.

If the volume change operation occurs while the next game state approach information 44w is displayed, the voice output will say "One more time." If the volume change operation occurs while the manufacturer information 44x is displayed, the voice output will say "SANYO." If the card removal prevention information 44y is displayed, the voice output will say "Please be careful not to forget to remove your prepaid card."

Furthermore, if the ending information 44j changes to different ending information 44j while the volume is being changed (for example, if it changes from forgetting to remove card information 44y to addiction prevention information 44z), audio corresponding to the changed ending information 44j (for example, audio corresponding to addiction prevention information 44z, such as "Pachinko and pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation") is output. This allows the player to change the volume while listening to the audio corresponding to the ending information 44j being displayed at the time of the change operation.

If the display effect when the volume is changed is a predetermined display effect that cannot be associated (for example, a changing display effect that displays a high-speed changing screen 43c that cannot be output as sound), the sound will be unrelated to the display effect (sound effects such as "volume 1, volume 2" or "beep, beep"). This prevents players from feeling uncomfortable or inconvenienced by forcibly associating the display effect with an inappropriate one when the display effect when the volume is changed is a predetermined display effect that cannot be associated.

In addition, for example, addiction prevention information 44z may be faintly reflected behind the specific operation screen 44b. This reflection is to the extent that the characters of the addiction prevention information 44z are not recognized. For example, at least a portion of it (for example, the outline of the displayed information in the case of addiction prevention information 44z) is displayed superimposed in a visible manner behind the specific operation screen 44b. Since the ending information 44j can be faintly confirmed while changing the volume, the user can change the volume with confidence without worrying that the ending display effect will end while changing the volume.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of Example 9 includes a third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying display effects; a sound output unit 24 that outputs sounds in accordance with the display effects; a decision button 81, a left selection button 82, and a right selection button 83 that constitute a frame button 80 that can be operated by the player; and an audio output control device 46 that can change the volume of the sound output from the sound output unit 24 based on operation on the frame button 80. The audio output control device 46 can change the operation sound when changing the volume to a sound related to the ending display effect that is displayed during the volume change period (for example, a sound such as "Pachinko and pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation," which corresponds to the addiction prevention information 44z). This allows the player to change the volume while listening to the sound related to the ending display effect, thereby improving the enjoyment of the player's operation to change the volume. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D1).

Furthermore, if the ending display effect changes to a different display effect when the volume is changed (for example, if the ending display effect changes from one displaying card removal prevention information 44y to one displaying addiction prevention information 44z), the operation sound is a sound related to the changed ending display effect (for example, the sound "Pachinko and pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation," which corresponds to addiction prevention information 44z). This allows the player to change the volume while listening to the sound related to the ending display effect being displayed at the time of the change operation, allowing the player to set the optimal volume when making the change operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D2).

Furthermore, the operation sound is a sound related to the display effect when the display effect when the volume is changed is a predetermined, associable display effect (for example, an ending display effect that displays information 44y to prevent forgetting to remove cards or information 44z to prevent addiction, which can be output as audio), but is a sound unrelated to the display effect when the volume is changed (for example, a changing display effect that displays high-speed changing screen 43c, which cannot be output as audio) (sound effects such as "volume 1, volume 2" or "beep, beep"). This prevents players from feeling uncomfortable or inconvenienced by forcibly associating the display effect with an inappropriate display effect when the volume is changed, if the display effect when the volume is changed is a predetermined, associable display effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D3).

In addition, the image of the display effect displayed during the volume change operation is superimposed behind the image for the volume change operation in such a way that at least a portion of it (for example, the outline of the display information in the case of addiction prevention information 44z) is visible. This ensures sufficient area for displaying the image for the volume change operation, making it easier to change the volume. Furthermore, since the player can check the display effect being displayed in the image superimposed behind while performing the volume change operation, the player can perform the volume change operation with peace of mind without worrying that the display effect will end while they are performing the volume change operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D6).

In the above-described embodiment, the ending screen 43j (ending information 44j) was not displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 while the specific operation screen 44b was displayed, but in this embodiment, it is displayed. This point will be explained with reference to Figure 67. Figure 67 is a diagram illustrating the display mode of the specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round play in Example 10.

Figures 67(a) to (h) are the same as Figure 66, so please refer to that explanation for common content. The display area for ending information 44j is wider than in Figure 66, and each piece of ending information 44j is displayed in the same display area.

Next, as shown in (i) and (j), when the player presses the frame button 80, the third symbol display device 42 displays the specific operation screen 44b. The specific operation screen 44b displays ending information 44j, a change information display section 44c, and an operation method display section 44d. The ending information 44j is displayed in a portion of the display area of the ending information 44j on the ending screen 43j, at a reduced size compared to when the ending screen 43j was displayed. For example, the addiction prevention information 44z is displayed as an addiction prevention information reduced display section 44z3, which reduces the text "Pachinko and pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation" to a size that is recognizable to the player. The reduced ending information 44j, change information display section 44c, and operation method display section 44d are displayed in the display area of the ending information 44j on the ending screen 43j. In this way, by using a common display area for the ending screen 43j and the specific operation screen 44b, switching between the display areas becomes smoother, allowing the player to see a cohesive image.

In addition, in accordance with the volume change operation, audio corresponding to the ending information 44j is output at the changed volume. This allows the player to change the volume while viewing the ending information 44j and listening to the audio corresponding to the ending information 44j. Furthermore, since the player can check the displayed ending information 44j in a reduced image while performing the volume change operation, the player can perform the volume change operation with peace of mind without worrying that the ending display effect will end while the volume change operation is being performed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 10, the third symbol display device 42 can display an ending display effect (e.g., reduced anti-addiction information display 44z3) and volume information (e.g., change information display section 44c showing volume) when changing the volume. This allows the player to change the volume while watching the ending display effect and listening to the sound related to the ending display effect, thereby improving the player's interest in changing the volume. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D4).

In addition, the image of the ending display effect displayed during the volume change operation (e.g., reduced image of anti-addiction information 44z3) is a smaller image than the image of the ending display effect displayed before the volume change operation (e.g., anti-addiction information 44z). This reduces the image of the ending display effect during the volume change operation, making it easier to change the volume. Furthermore, since the player can check the currently displayed ending display effect in the reduced image while changing the volume, the player can change the volume with confidence without worrying that the ending display effect will end while changing the volume. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D5).

In Example 10, the ending information 44j was displayed in a reduced size, but in this example, it is displayed in a different way. This will be explained with reference to Figure 68. Figure 68 is a diagram illustrating the display mode for the specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game in Example 10.

(a) to (h) are the same as those in Figure 66, so please refer to that explanation for common content. Ending information 44j displays not only text information, but also corresponding illustration information, etc. For this reason, the display area for ending information 44j is larger than that of Figures 66 and 67.

If any of the frame buttons 80 is pressed during the ending period from (b) to (g), for example, during the display period of the addiction prevention information 44z shown in (e), the screen switches to the specific operation screen 44b as shown in (i) and (j). When a volume change operation is performed, the third pattern display device 42 displays the ending information 44j and the change information display section 44c side by side and at approximately the same size. In other words, the display area for the ending information 44j before the volume change operation is divided into the display area for the ending information 44j after the volume change operation (e.g., the addiction prevention information split display section 44z4) and the display area for the change information display section 44c.

Specifically, before the volume change operation, the display area of the ending information 44j is divided into a text information display area 44j1 in which text information is displayed in the upper half and an illustration information display area 44j2 in which illustration information is displayed in the lower half. After the volume change operation, the text information display area 44j1 remains as is, and the illustration information display area 44j2 is switched to the change information display section 44c. By dividing the display area of the ending information 44j in this way, the display area of the ending information 44j can continue to be used even when the screen changes. This makes switching between display areas smoother and reduces eye strain for the player.

The reduced operation method display section 44d is located within the display area of the change information display section 44c. This allows the player to change the volume while viewing the ending information 44j, which is displayed next to the change information display section 44c at approximately the same size, and while listening to the sounds associated with the ending display effects.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 11, the third symbol display device 42 can display the ending display effect (e.g., the addiction prevention information split display 44z4) and volume information (e.g., the change information split display section 44c1 showing the volume) side by side when changing the volume. This allows the player to change the volume while watching the ending display effect lined up next to the change information split display section 44c1 and listening to the sound related to the ending display effect, thereby improving the player's interest in changing the volume. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D4).

In the above-described embodiment, the volume change operation was performed during the ending presentation, but it may also be performed during the jackpot round display presentation. This point will be explained with reference to Figure 69. Figure 69 is a diagram illustrating the display mode for a specific operation period during a jackpot round play in Example 12.

In this embodiment, the specific operation period information 44a is text information stating, "Volume can be changed by pressing and holding for 2 seconds or more." During the jackpot round display effect, a display effect that requires operation of the frame button 80 is executed, so pressing and holding the frame button 80 for 2 seconds or more is used as a method that does not overlap with the operation of these frame buttons 80. If an operation means other than the frame button 80 is used, a different operation method is also used.

The operation sound when changing the volume during the jackpot round display effect is a sound related to the jackpot round display effect that is displayed during the volume changeable period (for example, the intro or chorus of the song being played when a song title guessing quiz display effect is being executed during the jackpot round display effect). For example, as shown in (a), the round screen 43i displays "Take the quiz! Get a special video if you get 50% or more correct answers" as the round display effect 44h1. Next, as shown in (b), round quiz information 44h2 is displayed as the round display effect 44h1.

As shown in (b) and (c), the mid-round quiz information 44h2 includes question information such as "Question 1: What is the title of this song?", option information such as "1. AAA, 2. BBB, 3. CCC," and mid-round operation information 44h3 indicating how to operate the frame button 80 during the quiz performance. The mid-round quiz operation information 44h3 indicates that a normal press (single press) of the enter button 81 confirms the option, a normal press of the left selection button 82 moves the option down, and a normal press of the right selection button 83 moves the option up.

As shown in (d), once a predetermined time (e.g., 10 to 20 seconds) has passed since mid-round quiz information 44h2, mid-round quiz answer information 44h4 is displayed. Mid-round quiz answer information 44h4 indicates whether the option selected by the player is correct or incorrect. If the answer is incorrect, low volume may be the cause, so mid-round volume change suggestion information 44h5 is displayed as shown in (e). Mid-round volume change suggestion information 44h5 is text information encouraging the player to change the volume, such as "Try changing the volume." After mid-round volume change suggestion information 44h5 is displayed for a short period of time, such as three seconds, the second question and subsequent questions are displayed as shown in (f) and (i).

When the frame button 80 is pressed and held for two seconds or more, the screen switches to the specific operation screen 44b. In this embodiment, the specific operation screen 44b displays mid-round volume change suggestion information 44h5, a reduced quiz information display area 44h6, and an operation method display area 44d showing volume control, as shown in (g). When a volume change operation is performed using the left selection button 82 or right selection button 83, the intro or chorus audio corresponding to the quiz question is output at the changed volume, as shown in (h).

This allows the player to change the volume while listening to sounds related to the jackpot round display effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in changing the volume. Furthermore, if the jackpot round display effect changes to a different display effect when the volume is changed (for example, if the display effect changes from the song that appears as the first question to the song that appears as the second question in a song title guessing quiz), the operation sound will be a sound related to the changed display effect (for example, the intro or chorus of the second song). This allows the player to change the volume while listening to sounds related to the jackpot round display effect that is being displayed at the time of the change, allowing the player to set the optimal volume when changing the volume.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 12 is equipped with a third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying the jackpot round display effect, a sound output unit 24 that outputs sound in accordance with the jackpot round display effect, a frame button 80 that can be operated by the player, and an audio output control device 46 that can change the volume of the sound output from the sound output unit 24 based on operation of the frame button 80. The audio output control device 46 can change the operation sound when changing the volume to a sound related to the jackpot round display effect that is displayed during the volume change period (for example, if a song title guessing quiz display effect is being executed during the jackpot round display effect, it can change the sound of the intro or chorus of the song being played. This allows the player to change the volume while listening to the sound related to the jackpot round display effect, thereby improving the enjoyment of the player's operation to change the volume. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D1).

In addition, if the jackpot round display effect changes to a different display effect when the volume is changed (for example, if the display effect changes from the song that was the first question in a song title guessing quiz to the song that is the second question), the operation sound is a sound related to the changed display effect (for example, the intro or chorus sound of the second song). This allows the player to change the volume while listening to the sound related to the jackpot round display effect that is being displayed at the time of the change operation, allowing the player to set the optimal volume when making the change operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D2).

In the above-described embodiment, a volume change operation has been used as an example of a specific operation of the present invention, but the specific operation may be an operation other than a volume change operation, such as a character selection operation in a duel-type reach display presentation. This point will be explained with reference to Figure 70. Figure 70 is a diagram illustrating the display mode during a specific operation period during a reach display presentation in Example 13.

When the display effect displayed on the third pattern display device 42 transitions from a predetermined state to the next state, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes a transition display effect in which a predetermined image is displayed on the third pattern display device 42 from a predetermined timing of the predetermined state to a predetermined timing of the next state. Specifically, when the reach display effect displayed on the third pattern display device 42 transitions from a player's character selectable state in a battle-type reach development effect to a battle execution state in a battle-type reach development effect, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes a player's character selection effect in which a player's character selection effect image is displayed on the third pattern display device 42 as shown in (a) to (c) from the player's character selection start timing in the player's character selection state shown in (a) to the battle start timing in the battle execution state shown in (d).

The player character selection effect is a display effect in which the first player PY1, second player PY2, and third player PY3 are displayed as player characters selectable by the player, and each player is introduced in turn while issuing a message highlighting their own characteristics. Specifically, the player character selection effect first displays the first player PY1 issuing first player information PYA, saying "I'll make a big splash," as shown in (a), then the second player PY2 issuing second player information PYB, saying "I'll make a quiet splash," as shown in (b), and finally the third player PY3 issuing third player information PYC, saying "I'll make a moderate splash," as shown in (c).

The first player information PYA suggests to the player that if the first player PY1 is selected, the subsequent reach display effects will have more flashy lights, sounds, and movable role effects. The second player information PYA indicates to the player that if the second player PY2 is selected, the subsequent reach display effects will have more quiet effects. The third player information PYC indicates to the player that if the third player PY3 is selected, the subsequent reach development display effects will have a well-controlled balance of these effects.

The first player information PYA through the third player information PYC are displayed in order within the selection time. If the player does not perform a selection operation after the selection time has elapsed, as shown in (d), a battle reach with the enemy character TK will be initiated using a character (e.g., the first player PY1) automatically selected by lottery within the gaming machine.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 notifies the player of non-arrival indication information during the execution of the transition display effect, which indicates to the player that the timing to start the next state has not yet arrived. Specifically, as shown in (a) to (c), the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 notifies the player of specific operation period information 44a and specific operation period end approach information 44e during the execution of the transition display effect, which indicates to the player that the timing to start the showdown execution state has not yet arrived.

Specific operation period information 44a displays, for example, text information such as "Player can be selected with button," indicating that pressing any of the frame buttons 80 will allow the player to select their own character in a duel-type reach. Specific operation period end proximity information 44e is displayed as a seek bar or indicator image indicating the remaining time for accepting operation of the frame buttons 80 for the player's character selection performance as a valid operation.

When the frame button 80 is operated effectively, the change information display section 44c is displayed as shown in (e), (f), and (h). The change information display section 44c displays the first player PY1, second player PY2, and third player PY3 that the player can select. The player operates the left selection button 82 and the right selection button 83 to select the desired character. The period during which the selection operation is possible is notified to the player by the specific operation period end proximity information 44e described above. After selecting the desired character, if the player waits until the start timing of the showdown reach, the showdown performance will begin with the selected character. Alternatively, if the decision button 81 is operated, a waiting image such as "Please wait a moment" will be displayed, and then the showdown performance will begin with the selected character.

This makes it easier for players to recognize that the current time when the player character selection effect is being executed is a state in which the player character can be selected; in other words, the current time when the player character selection effect is being executed is not yet the next battle execution state. This therefore reduces the disadvantages that can arise from mistakenly believing that the current time when the player character selection effect is being executed is the next battle execution state (or that the start timing of the next battle execution state is immediately approaching) (for example, the disadvantage of selecting an unintended character and seeing a reach development effect that is different from the player's preference).

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 13, when the game state transitions from a predetermined state (a state in which the player's character can be selected in a battle-type reach development presentation) to the next state (for example, a battle execution state in a battle-type reach development presentation), the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has an execution function that executes a transition display presentation (player's character selection presentation) that displays a player's character selection presentation image on the third pattern display device 42 from a predetermined timing of the player's character selection state (player's character selection start timing) to a predetermined timing of the next battle execution state (for example, the battle start timing), and a notification function of the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 that notifies the player of non-arrival suggestion information (for example, specific operation period end approach information 44e that indicates the remaining time of the player's character selection presentation) that indicates to the player that the start timing of the next battle execution state has not arrived during the execution of the player's character selection presentation. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the current time when the player's character selection effect is being executed is a state in which the player's character can be selected; in other words, the current time when the player's character selection effect is being executed is not yet the next battle execution state. This therefore reduces the disadvantages that can arise from mistakenly believing that the current time when the player's character selection effect is being executed is the next battle execution state (or that the start timing of the next battle execution state is immediately approaching) (for example, the disadvantage of selecting an unintended character and seeing a reach development effect that is different from the player's preference).

In the above-mentioned Example 13, the players PY displayed in the battle-type reach display effect were a fixed pattern of first player PY1, second player PY2, and third player PY3, but the players PY may change to different patterns depending on the results of the jackpot lottery. This point will be explained with reference to Figure 71. Figure 71 is a diagram explaining the display mode for a specific operation period during the reach display effect in Example 14.

When the display effect displayed on the third pattern display device 42 transitions from a predetermined state to the next state, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes a transition display effect in which multiple types of images are successively displayed in a predetermined combination on the third pattern display device 42 from a predetermined timing of the predetermined state to a predetermined timing of the next state. If the result of the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, the predetermined combinations are displayed in different combinations depending on the type of jackpot result. If the result is a miss, the predetermined combinations are displayed in different combinations depending on the type of reach display effect that leads to the miss result. In other words, the transition display effect in this embodiment is displayed in different combinations depending on the type of jackpot result that the player is hoping for.

For example, in the case of a reach display effect that anticipates a normal jackpot, three players PY1 to PY3 are displayed in succession as in Example 13, and first player information PYA to third player information PYC are displayed in succession. In the case of a reach display effect that anticipates a special jackpot, four players PY1 to PY4 are displayed in succession, and first player information PYA to fourth player information PYD are displayed in succession. In addition, the display mode for a specific player may be different between a reach display effect that anticipates a normal jackpot and a reach display effect that anticipates a special jackpot.

The specific operation period end proximity information 44e is a seek bar or indicator image that indicates to the player that the start of the next competition execution state has not yet arrived until the timing at which multiple types of images have been displayed in succession in a predetermined combination has finished. The first player information PYA through the fourth player information PYD are displayed in order within the selection time indicated by the specific operation period end proximity information 44e.

As a result, during the player's character selection presentation, the specific operation period end approach information 44e indicates that the start timing of the next showdown execution state has not yet arrived until the time when multiple types of images have been displayed in succession in a predetermined combination, thereby reducing the risk of suffering disadvantages caused by mistakenly believing that the start timing of the next showdown execution state (or that the start timing of the next showdown execution state is immediately approaching) (for example, the disadvantage of selecting an unintended character and seeing a reach development presentation that is different from the player's preference).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 14, the player's character selection presentation involves multiple types of images (e.g., first player PY1 to fourth player PY4, first player information PYA to fourth player information PYD) being displayed in succession in a predetermined combination, and the predetermined combinations are displayed in different combinations depending on the type of jackpot result that the player is expected to receive as a result of the jackpot lottery (e.g., in the case of a special jackpot, first player information PYA to fourth player information PYD are displayed, and in the case of a regular jackpot, first player information PYA to third player information PYC are displayed). The specific operation period end approach information 44e indicates to the player that the start time for the next showdown execution state has not yet arrived until the multiple types of images have been displayed in succession in the predetermined combinations (e.g., in the case of a special jackpot, until first player information PYA to fourth player information PYD are displayed within the selected time, and in the case of a regular jackpot, until first player information PYA to third player information PYC are displayed within the selected time). As a result, during the player's character selection presentation, the specific operation period end approach information 44e indicates that the start of the next battle execution state has not yet arrived until the specified combination of multiple types of images has been displayed in succession, thereby reducing the risk of suffering a disadvantage caused by mistakenly believing that the start of the next battle execution state (or that the start of the next battle execution state is immediately approaching) (for example, the disadvantage of selecting an unintended character and seeing a reach development presentation that is different from the player's preference). This is an example of the gaming machine described in (A21).

In the above-described embodiment, one pattern was determined for one type of jackpot ending display effect, but in this embodiment, a pattern that is displayed for a shorter time is determined for one type of jackpot ending display effect. This point will be explained with reference to Figure 72. Figure 72 is a diagram illustrating the display mode for a specific operation period after the end of a jackpot round game in Example 15.

After the jackpot round game state shown in (a) ends, the display control device 45 controls the display of a jackpot ending display effect in a predetermined pattern on the third symbol display device 42. In this embodiment, the jackpot round game state shown in (a) is a jackpot round game state for a special 1-character probability jackpot (16R), and the jackpot ending display effect is a pattern in which next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal reminder information 44y, and bonus video 44n are displayed.

The predetermined patterns include a first pattern in which predetermined display information (e.g., predetermined ending information 44j consisting of next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal forget prevention information 44y) is displayed for a predetermined display time (e.g., 25 seconds) and in a predetermined display format (display order of next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal forget prevention information 44y), and a second pattern in which this predetermined ending information 44j is displayed for a display time shorter than the predetermined display time (e.g., 10 seconds) and in a display format different from the predetermined display format. The first pattern is a display pattern in the order shown in Figure 66 of Example 9 above. The second pattern is a jackpot ending display presentation pattern shown in (b) and subsequent pages. Details of the second pattern will be described later.

In this way, in this embodiment, the jackpot ending display effect can be executed in a variety of variations, with different display times and display modes for displaying the specified ending information 44j. As a result, the entertainment value of the jackpot ending display effect can be improved.

The first and second patterns may be selected internally by the gaming machine, for example, by lottery held by the display control device 45 (a lottery held by obtaining a random number based on the reception of a display variable pattern command). This configuration allows different patterns of ending presentations to be executed even for the same type of jackpot. Furthermore, the player may be able to select whether the jackpot round display presentation will be executed using the first or second pattern early in the jackpot ending display presentation. This configuration allows the jackpot ending display presentation to be tailored to the player's preferences. Furthermore, the jackpot ending display presentation may be executed using only the second pattern. This configuration allows the player to see a jackpot ending display presentation that has never been seen before.

The second pattern will be explained in more detail. The first pattern is a pattern in which the above-mentioned predetermined ending information 44j is displayed in a predetermined order, while the second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined ending information 44j that was displayed in a predetermined order is displayed in a combined state (a simultaneous display state in which the information is displayed simultaneously). Specifically, the second pattern is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal prevention information 44y, which were displayed in order in the first pattern, are simultaneously displayed as shown in (b).

This allows for increased variation in the jackpot ending display effects without compromising the consistency of the content of the jackpot ending display effects between the first and second patterns.

The overall display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the overall display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern. Specifically, for a 16R jackpot, the overall display period is 35 seconds in both cases. As a result, by shortening the display time for displaying the above-mentioned specified ending information 44j in the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern, the excess time generated before displaying the bonus video 44n displayed at the end of the jackpot ending display effect can be used to execute a new display effect.

The new display effect is, for example, ending quiz display effect 44p1. Ending quiz display effect 44p1 displays text information saying "Take the quiz. If you get it right, you'll see a special video," as shown in (c). The quiz is displayed as ending quiz information 44p2, as shown in (d) to (f). Operations during the quiz are displayed as ending quiz operation information 44p3. These are the same as mid-round quiz information 44p2 and mid-round quiz operation information 44p3 shown in Figure 69 of Example 12.

The answer time for the ending quiz is displayed as specific operation period end approach information 44e. If the player does not answer within the answer time, it is assumed that they have selected a preset option, and it is determined whether or not they answered correctly. Whether or not the answer to the quiz is correct is displayed as ending quiz answer information 44p4, as shown in (g) and (k). If the quiz is answered correctly, ending quiz correct answer bonus information 44p5 (special live music video) is displayed as a special bonus video 44n, and if the quiz is answered incorrectly, ending quiz incorrect answer bonus information 44p7 (normal live music video) is displayed as a regular bonus.

When one of the frame buttons 80 is pressed and held during the quiz in accordance with the specific operation period information 44a ("Volume can be changed by pressing and holding for 2 seconds or more"), the ending quiz information 44p2 is reduced and displayed in the reduced ending quiz information display area 44p6, as shown in (i) and (j), and the change information display area 44c and operation method display area 44d are also reduced and displayed, allowing the volume to be changed while watching the quiz. If the volume is changed during the quiz, the intro or chorus of the song being played will be output, as in Example 12.

In this way, the new display effects that can be displayed by executing the second pattern of jackpot round display effects allow for volume adjustment during the quiz, the content of the subsequent bonus video 44n changes depending on whether the quiz is answered correctly, or the content is related to the subsequent bonus video 44n. This increases the variety of ending display effects that will attract the player's attention.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of Example 15 includes a third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying jackpot ending display effects related to a game, and a display control device 45 that controls the display of the jackpot ending display effects on the third symbol display device 42 in a predetermined pattern. The predetermined pattern includes a first pattern in which predetermined display information (e.g., predetermined ending information 44j consisting of next game state indication information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal forgetting prevention information 44y) is displayed for a predetermined display time (e.g., 25 seconds) and in a predetermined display manner (the display order of next game state indication information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal forgetting prevention information 44y), and a second pattern in which the predetermined ending information 44j is displayed for a shorter display time (e.g., 10 seconds) and in a display manner different from the predetermined display manner. This allows for a variety of jackpot ending display effects with different display times and display manners for displaying the predetermined ending information 44j. As a result, the entertainment value of the jackpot ending display effects can be enhanced. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (E1).

Furthermore, the first pattern is a pattern in which the above-mentioned predetermined ending information 44j is displayed in a predetermined order, and the second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined ending information 44j that was displayed in a predetermined order is displayed in a combined state (a simultaneous display state in which the information is displayed simultaneously). This allows for an increase in the variety of jackpot ending display effects without compromising the consistency of the content of the jackpot ending display effects between the first and second patterns. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (E3).

Furthermore, the overall display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the overall display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern (e.g., 35 seconds). This shortens the display time for displaying the above-mentioned predetermined ending information 44j in the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern, allowing a new display effect (ending quiz display effect 44p1) to be executed using the extra time generated before displaying the bonus video 44n displayed at the end of the jackpot ending display effect. This new display effect allows for volume adjustment during the quiz, changes the content of the subsequent bonus video 44n depending on whether the quiz is answered correctly or incorrectly, or is related to the content of the subsequent bonus video 44n. This increases the variety of ending display effects. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (E4).

Furthermore, the predetermined ending information 44j is ending presentation information after a jackpot round. This allows for increased variety in the ending presentation after a jackpot round. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (E5).

In the above-described Example 15, new ending information (ending quiz display effect 44p1) was displayed before the final ending information (bonus video 44n) by executing the second pattern of jackpot round display effect. However, in this example, the final ending information (bonus video 44n) is changed to a longer version by executing the second pattern of jackpot ending display effect. This point will be explained with reference to Figure 73. Figure 73 is a diagram illustrating the display mode for a specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game in Example 16.

Specifically, by executing the second pattern of jackpot ending display presentation, predetermined ending information 44j (next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal prevention information 44y) is displayed in a combined state for, for example, 10 seconds as shown in (b), and then bonus video 44n is displayed for the remaining ending time (25 seconds) as shown in (c) through (h). At the beginning of bonus video 44n, specific operation period information 44a is displayed. The specific operation period information 44a displays text information such as "You can change the volume, light intensity, and sound quality by pressing and holding during music." The specific operation period information 44a may be removed after being pressed and held. When frame button 80 is pressed and held, bonus video n is reduced in size and displayed in bonus video split display section 44n1 as shown in (d), and a change information display section 44c is displayed, allowing the user to select whether to change the volume, light intensity, sound quality, or "back." If volume is selected, a volume change information display section 44c1 is displayed, allowing the user to change the volume, as shown in (e) and (i). If light intensity is selected, a light intensity change information display section 44c2 that allows the light intensity to be changed is displayed as shown in (f) and (j). If sound quality is selected, a sound quality change information display section 44c3 that allows the sound quality to be changed is displayed as shown in (g) and (k). After operating the left selection button 82 and right selection button 83 to change the volume, light intensity, or sound quality, pressing the confirm button 81 will return to the change information display section 44c. Selecting "Back" in the change information display section 44c will return to the state in which the bonus video 44n is displayed full screen as shown in (h). Note that it may also be configured so that after returning to the change information display section 44c and a predetermined number of seconds have elapsed, the bonus video 44n will return to the state in which it is displayed full screen.

In this way, in the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern, the display time for displaying the specified ending information 44j is shortened, and the resulting excess time is used to extend the display time of the bonus video 44n. Furthermore, by making it possible to display the change information display section 44c for changing the volume, light intensity, and sound quality during the display time of the bonus video 44n, it is possible to secure a longer period for adjusting the volume, etc., while also increasing the variety of display effects.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of Example 16, the display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern. As a result, in the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern, the display time for displaying predetermined ending information 44j (e.g., ending countdown information 44v, next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal reminder information 44y) is shortened, thereby utilizing the resulting excess time to extend the display time of the bonus video 44n. Furthermore, by making it possible to display a change information display section 44c for changing the volume, light intensity, and sound quality during the display time of the bonus video 44n, it is possible to increase the variety of display effects while ensuring a long period for adjusting the volume, etc. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (E4).

In the above-mentioned Examples 15 and 16, the jackpot ending display presentation using the second pattern (composite display) was performed internally by the gaming machine, but in this example, the jackpot ending display presentation using the second pattern (composite display) is performed based on the player's operation. This point will be explained with reference to Figure 74. Figure 74 is a diagram explaining the display mode for a specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round play in Example 17.

The display control device 45 controls the display of an operation request image requesting the player to operate the frame button 80 during the jackpot ending display presentation shown in (b) to (f). Specifically, as shown in (b) and (c), the operation request image is specific operation period information 44a accompanied by the text information "Volume, light intensity, sound quality change acceptance time." The specific operation period information 44a is a seek bar or indicator image that indicates the elapsed time (remaining time) of the volume, etc. change acceptance time (10 seconds).

The display control device 45 controls the display of operation display effects (display effects for changing volume, light intensity, and sound quality) using the frame buttons 80 during the jackpot ending display effect, triggered by the player's operation in response to the operation request image. If the player does not operate the frame buttons 80 in response to the operation request image, and a special chart 1 probability jackpot (16R) is achieved by Super Reach C or D, the game will transition to the next game state after the display of the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and addiction prevention information 44z has ended.

The predetermined patterns include a first pattern in which, if an operation request image is displayed and the player does not perform an operation in response to the operation request image, predetermined ending information 44j (for example, for a special chart 1 probability jackpot (16R) due to Super Reach C or D, manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and addiction prevention information 44z) is displayed for a predetermined display time (for example, 25 seconds) and in a predetermined display format (one by one in sequence); and a second pattern in which, if an operation request image is displayed and the player performs an operation in response to the operation request image, this predetermined ending information 44j is displayed for a shorter display time (for example, 5 seconds) than in the first pattern and in a display format different from the first pattern (all simultaneously), and a display effect for changing the volume, etc. is executed after the display of the predetermined ending information 44j has ended.

As a result, when the frame button 80 is effectively operated in response to the operation request image, the entertainment value of the jackpot ending display presentation can be enhanced by allowing the player to enjoy changes to the volume and other display effects without significantly compromising the entertainment value of the jackpot ending display presentation.

The first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined ending information 44j (e.g., manufacturer information 44x, information to prevent forgetting to remove the card 44y, and information to prevent addiction 44z) is displayed in a predetermined order for a predetermined display time (e.g., 25 seconds), and the second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined ending information 44j that was displayed in a predetermined order is displayed in a combined state with a shortened predetermined display time (e.g., all at the same time for 5 seconds).

In more detail, if the player operates the operation request image during the volume change time, post-specific operation waiting information 44a3, which displays text information saying "Please wait a moment before operating to change the volume," as shown in (g), is displayed until the end of the volume change time. The predetermined ending display 44j displayed using the second pattern is displayed after the post-specific operation waiting information 44a3 has finished displaying.

This allows for increased variety in the volume and other change display effects without compromising the consistency of the content of the jackpot ending display effects between the first and second patterns.

Furthermore, the display period for the jackpot ending display effect executed in the first pattern and the display period for the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern are the same length (35 seconds). As a result, by shortening the display time for displaying the specified ending information 44j in the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern (to 5 seconds), the resulting excess time (20 seconds) can be used to create a period (10 seconds) for displaying the volume and other change operation effects and a period (10 seconds) for displaying the bonus video 44n. The period for displaying the volume and other change operation effects is displayed as specific operation period end approach information 44e, which is accompanied by the text information "Volume, light intensity, and sound quality changeable time." The specific operation period end approach information 44e is a seek bar or indicator image that shows the elapsed time (remaining time) for volume and other changeable time (10 seconds). In this way, the period for adjusting volume and other settings can be secured, while increasing the variety of volume and other change display effects.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 17 is equipped with a third symbol display device 42 that displays display effects related to the game, including a jackpot ending display effect, a frame button 80 that can be operated by the player in accordance with the display effects, and a display control device 45 that controls the display of display effects on the third symbol display device 42, including displaying the jackpot ending display effect in a predetermined pattern. The display control device 45 has an operation request execution function that controls the display of an operation request image (specific operation period information 44a) that requests the player to operate the frame button 80 during the jackpot ending display effect, and an operation display effect that controls the display of an operation display effect (a display effect that changes the volume, light intensity, and sound quality) using the frame button 80 during the jackpot ending display effect in response to the player's operation of the operation request image. The predetermined patterns include a first pattern in which, when an operation request image is displayed and the player does not perform an operation on the operation request image, predetermined ending information 44j (e.g., manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and addiction prevention information 44z) is displayed for a predetermined display time (e.g., 25 seconds) and in a predetermined display manner (one by one in sequence), and a second pattern in which, when an operation request image is displayed and the player performs an operation on the specific operation period information 44a and the operation request image, the predetermined ending information 44j is displayed for a shorter display time (e.g., 5 seconds) than the first pattern and in a display manner different from the first pattern (all simultaneously), and a volume change display effect is executed after the display of the predetermined ending information 44j has ended. This allows the player to enjoy the volume change display effect without significantly impairing the interest of the jackpot ending display effect when the frame button 80 is effectively operated on the operation request image, thereby improving the interest of the jackpot ending display effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F1).

Furthermore, the first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined ending information 44j (e.g., manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and addiction prevention information 44z) is displayed in a predetermined order for a predetermined display time (e.g., 25 seconds), while the second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined ending information 44j that was displayed in a predetermined order is displayed in a combined state with a shortened predetermined display time (e.g., all simultaneously for 5 seconds). This allows for an increase in the variety of change display effects such as volume without compromising the consistency of the content of the jackpot ending display effects between the first and second patterns. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F3).

In addition, the display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern. As a result, by shortening the display time for displaying the specified ending information 44j in the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern, the resulting excess time can be used to ensure a period in which volume, etc. can be adjusted, and the variety of display effects for changing volume, etc. can be increased. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F4).

The predetermined ending information 44j is ending presentation information after a jackpot round. This allows for increased variety in the volume and other display changes that occur during the ending presentation after a jackpot round. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F5).

In the above-mentioned Example 17, the jackpot round display presentation according to the second pattern was a pattern in which the display time of the predetermined ending information 44j was shortened by simultaneously displaying this predetermined ending information 44j, but in this example, the display time is shortened using a different display mode. This point will be discussed with reference to Figure 75. Figure 75 is a diagram explaining the display mode of the specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game in Example 18.

The first pattern, as shown in (b) and (c), is a pattern in which predetermined ending information 44j (e.g., manufacturer information 44x, information to prevent forgetting to remove the card 44y, and information to prevent addiction 44z) is displayed in a predetermined order (one by one) for a predetermined display time (e.g., 25 seconds). The second pattern, as shown in (f) to (h), is a pattern in which, when the player performs an operation in response to an operation request image, the predetermined ending information 44j is displayed in a shortened state with the predetermined display time shortened while remaining in the predetermined order.

In detail, in the second pattern, the predetermined ending information 44j is displayed in order over a 5-second period, with manufacturer information 44x (1 second), card removal prevention information 44y (2 seconds), and addiction prevention information 44z (2 seconds) displayed one by one.

This allows for an increased variety of display effects for changing volume, etc., without compromising the consistency of the content and appearance of the display effects between the first and second patterns.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 18, the first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined ending information 44j (e.g., manufacturer information 44x, card removal reminder information 44y, and addiction prevention information 44z) is displayed in a predetermined order (one by one) for a predetermined display time (e.g., 25 seconds), and the second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined ending information 44j is displayed in a shortened state with the predetermined display time remaining the same (e.g., manufacturer information 44x, card removal reminder information 44y, and addiction prevention information 44z are displayed in order for 5 seconds). This allows for increased variation in display effects, such as volume changes, without compromising the consistency of the content and appearance of the display effects between the first and second patterns. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F2).

In the above-described Examples 17 and 18, control using the second pattern was performed in the jackpot ending display presentation, but control using the second pattern may also be performed in other display presentations, such as reach display presentations. This will be explained with reference to Figures 76 and 77. Figure 76 is a diagram illustrating the display mode during a specific operation period during a reach display presentation in Example 19. Figure 77 is a diagram illustrating a display mode different from that of Figure 76 during a specific operation period during a reach display presentation.

First, refer to Figure 76. The display control device 45 controls the display of display effects, including reach display effects in a predetermined pattern, on the third pattern display device 42. As shown in (a), the third pattern display device 42 displays an advanced reach display screen 43g, and a showdown-type reach advanced effect is being executed, in which the player's character PY and the enemy character TK face off against each other.

In the reach development effect of this embodiment, as shown in (b), a developed reach suggestion image 43g2 is displayed, suggesting the possibility that the reach will be a win. The developed reach suggestion image 43g2 displays a frame containing four hidden letters, and by revealing the letters one by one, suggests in a predetermined manner the possibility that the reach will be a win, for example, at the timing when the last letter is revealed (or at a timing earlier than that). The predetermined manner is, for example, a manner in which the letters are displayed in a color suggesting a win (for example, the same color as the other letters if the probability of a win is low, red if the probability of a win is high, or rainbow if a win is confirmed). To suggest this, the developed reach suggestion image 43g2 displays text information such as "If a rainbow pattern appears, is it likely to be a win?" The developed reach suggestion image 43g2 is designed to reveal one letter every two seconds, so the presentation time is usually eight seconds.

The display control device 45 controls the display of an operation request image requesting the player to operate the frame button 80 during the reach development effect. The operation request image is specific operation period information 44a, which is displayed simultaneously with the display of the development reach suggestion image 43g2. The specific operation period information 44a displays text information such as "This effect will last 8 seconds. If you want to know sooner, press the button." This suggests that by operating the frame button 80, the 8-second development reach suggestion effect can be shortened and the result can be known. The valid period for operating the frame button 80 is the 8 seconds during which the development reach suggestion image 43g2 changes. The elapsed time of the valid period of the frame button 80 is displayed by displaying specific operation period end approach information 44e simultaneously with the display of the specific operation period information 44a.

The display control device 45 controls the display of an operation display effect (fast-forward display effect) using the frame buttons 80 during the reach display effect, triggered by the player's operation of the frame buttons 80 in response to the operation request image. This allows the player to shorten the 8-second development reach suggestion effect and know the outcome.

This extended reach suggestion effect is displayed in a predetermined pattern. The predetermined patterns include a first pattern that is displayed when an operation request image is displayed and the player does not perform an operation in response to the operation request image, and a second pattern that is displayed when an operation request image is displayed and the player performs an operation in response to the operation request image.

The first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed for a predetermined display time in a predetermined display mode. Specifically, the first pattern is a pattern in which the four characters that make up the development reach suggestion image 43g2, first development reach suggestion information g2a, second development reach suggestion information g2b, third development reach suggestion information g2c, and fourth development reach suggestion information g2d, are revealed one by one in sequence at two-second intervals (for a total of eight seconds).

The second pattern is a fast-forward display effect in which predetermined display information is displayed for a shorter display time than the first pattern and in a different display format than the first pattern, and the result display of the effect is displayed after the display of the predetermined display information has finished. Specifically, in the second pattern, the four characters that make up the development reach suggestion image 43g2, the first development reach suggestion information g2a to the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d, are displayed one by one at one-second intervals (for a total of four seconds), and the result display of the fast-forward display effect is displayed when the display content of the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d is revealed.

The first and second patterns will now be described in more detail.
In the first pattern, at the timing of 6 seconds remaining as shown in (c), the first developed reach suggestion information g2a of the first character is revealed to be "ge," at the timing of 4 seconds remaining as shown in (d), the second developed reach suggestion information g2b of the second character is revealed to be "ki," at the timing of 2 seconds remaining as shown in (e), the third developed reach suggestion information g2c of the third character is revealed to be "a," and at the timing of 0 seconds remaining as shown in (f), the fourth developed reach suggestion information g2d of the fourth character is revealed to be "tsu," and the pattern ends with this. If the pattern around the fourth developed reach suggestion information g2d is rainbow-colored as shown in (f), it is suggested that there is an extremely high expectation that the reach in question will be a hit.

After the rainbow color appears, as shown in (g), in the confrontation-type reach development presentation, the attack image 43g4 that the player's character PY issues to the enemy character TK is displayed in rainbow color, suggesting a high probability of victory, and as shown in (h), the player's character PY wins, and a winning symbol is displayed statically in the reach development presentation. On the other hand, as shown in (i), if the pattern surrounding the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d is the same as the other characters, it suggests that the likelihood of the reach being a winning one is not that high. In this case, as shown in (j), the attack image 43g4 is displayed in normal color, and as shown in (k), the player's character PY loses to the enemy character TK, and a losing symbol is displayed statically in the reach development presentation in many cases.

See Figure 77 for the second pattern. In the second pattern, the suggestive effect of the first pattern is fast-forwarded to 4 seconds. When the frame button 80 is pressed while the specific operation period information 44a is displayed, the specific operation period end approaching information 44e changes from, for example, "8 seconds remaining" to "Fast-forwarding, 3 seconds remaining," indicating that the fast-forward effect has been selected.

At the timing shown in (b) with 3 seconds remaining, the first character of the first development reach suggestion information g2a "ge" is revealed; at the timing shown in (c) with 2 seconds remaining, the second character of the second development reach suggestion information g2b "ki" is revealed; at the timing shown in (d) with 1 second remaining, the third character of the third development reach suggestion information g2c "a" is revealed; and at the timing shown in (e) with 0 seconds remaining, the fourth character of the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d "tsu" is revealed, ending the game. In the second pattern of suggestion presentation, the result is displayed earlier than in the first pattern of suggestion presentation, and so a bonus image is inserted using this extra time in the showdown-type reach development presentation after the suggestion presentation has ended.

As shown in (f), the bonus image is a defense image 43g5 in which the player's character PY defends against an attack launched by the enemy character TK. If the fourth advanced reach suggestion information g2d is rainbow-colored, the defense image 43g5 is displayed in rainbow color, suggesting that the relevant reach is sure to be a winning combination. In this case, the fourth advanced reach suggestion information g2d may be displayed in red, and the defense image 43g5 may be displayed in rainbow color for the first time, thereby timing the player's surprise to coincide with the display of this bonus image. Then, as shown in (g), an attack image 43g4 (rainbow-colored) is displayed, and as shown in (h), a winning symbol in the reach-development effect is displayed statically. On the other hand, if the pattern surrounding the fourth advanced reach suggestion information g2d is the same as the other characters, as shown in (i), it suggests that the likelihood of the relevant reach being a winning combination is not particularly high. In this case, as shown in (j), the defense image 43g5 is displayed in the normal color even in the bonus image, as shown in (k), the attack image 43g4 is displayed in the normal color, and as shown in (l), the player's character PY loses to the enemy character TK, and in many cases a missing symbol is displayed in the reach development performance.

This allows the enjoyment of the reach display effects to be enhanced by allowing the enjoyment of the fast-forward display effects without significantly reducing the enjoyment of the reach display effects, whether the frame button 80 is effectively operated in response to the operation request image or not.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 19 is equipped with a third symbol display device 42 that displays display effects related to the game, including reach display effects; a frame button 80 that can be operated by the player in accordance with the display effects; and a display control device 45 that controls the display of display effects, including displaying reach display effects in a predetermined pattern, on the display means. The display control device 45 is equipped with an operation request execution function that controls the display of an operation request image (specific operation period information 44a) that requests the player to operate the frame button 80 during the reach display effect, and an operation display effect execution function that controls the display of an operation display effect (fast-forward display effect) using the frame button 80 during the reach display effect in response to the player's operation on the operation request image. The predetermined pattern is a pattern in which an operation request image is displayed and a corresponding operation is performed in response to the operation request image. and a second pattern in which, when an operation request image is displayed and the player performs an operation on the operation request image, the predetermined development reach suggestion image 43g2 is displayed for a shorter display time (for example, 4 seconds) than in the first pattern and in a display mode different from that of the first pattern (for example, the first development reach suggestion information g2a to the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d are displayed one by one at 1 second intervals), and the result of the fast-forward display effect is displayed after the display of the predetermined development reach suggestion image 43g2 has ended. This allows the enjoyment of the reach display effect to be enhanced by allowing the enjoyment of the fast-forward display effect without significantly reducing the enjoyment of the reach display effect when the frame button 80 is effectively operated in response to the operation request image. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F1).

Furthermore, the first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined development reach suggestion images 43g2 are displayed in a predetermined order for a predetermined display time (e.g., 8 seconds) (e.g., the first development reach suggestion information g2a through the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d are displayed in order at 2-second intervals), while the second pattern is a pattern in which predetermined development reach suggestion images 43g2 are displayed in the predetermined order but for a shortened predetermined display time (e.g., 4 seconds at 1-second intervals). This allows for increased variation in fast-forward display effects without compromising the consistency of the content and presentation of the reach display effects between the first and second patterns. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F2).

Furthermore, the specified reach development suggestion image 43g2 is suggestion presentation information (first reach development suggestion information g2a to fourth reach development suggestion image g2d) displayed during the reach development presentation. This allows for an increased variety of fast-forward display presentations performed during the suggestion presentations displayed during the reach development presentation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F6).

In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot ending display effect was not connected in terms of its content to the reach display effect that led to that jackpot ending display effect. However, in this embodiment, the reach display effect and the jackpot ending display effect are linked in terms of their content. This point will be explained using Figures 78 to 81.

Figure 78 (a) is a table for drawing the special chart 1 jackpot in Example 20, and (b) is a table for drawing the special chart 2 jackpot. Figure 79 is a table for selecting the main decorative symbol variation pattern for Special Chart 1 in Example 20. Figure 80 is a table for determining the ending performance pattern in Example 20.

The display control device 45 can control the display of information related to a specific effect executed during a display effect in the ending effect. This associates the ending effect with the display effects leading up to that ending effect through the specific effect, and the entertainment value of the display effects continues into the ending effect through the specific effect, thereby increasing the entertainment value of the ending effect.

The display effect that executes the specific effect is a variable display effect of identification information that makes it possible to identify whether the result of the lottery will be a specific result, such as a variable display effect of the main decorative pattern SZ or the development pattern HZ. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect along with the variable display effect, thereby increasing the interest of the ending effect.

The display effect that executes the specific effect is a reach display effect of the identification information, such as a reach display effect of the main decorative pattern SZ or the development pattern HZ. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect along with the reach display effect, thereby increasing the interest of the ending effect.

A specific effect is a specific suggestion effect that suggests that the possibility of a specific result is higher than if the specific effect is not executed. Examples of specific suggestion effects include a confrontation between the player's character PY and the enemy character TK, or a mission clear effect by the player's character PY. This makes it easier for players who understand the meaning of the suggestion (that it appears less frequently than normal reaches A and B or super reaches A and B, and therefore more likely to result in a win when it does appear than normal reaches A and B or super reaches A and B) to remember the specific suggestion effect, thereby increasing the interest of the ending effect.

As shown in Figure 78, the Special Chart 1 Jackpot Lottery Table and the Special Chart 2 Jackpot Lottery Table differ from the above-mentioned embodiment in that in the case of a 16R special jackpot, the special jackpot continuation and support count continue until the next jackpot. In other words, in this embodiment, the special jackpot continuation and support count obtained by a 16R special jackpot are distinguished so that they are greater than other special jackpots (100 times).

As shown in Figure 79, the table for selecting the main decorative symbol variation pattern for special chart 1 is set so that in the case of a 16R probability jackpot (jackpot symbol counter C2 is 0-9), jackpot super reach E (120 seconds) is selected. The presentation system for Super Reach E is a battle system. In the case of an 8R probability jackpot (jackpot symbol counter C2 is 10-49), jackpot super reach C or D is selected. The presentation system for Super Reach C or D is a battle system. In the case of an 8R normal jackpot (jackpot symbol counter C2 is 50-99), jackpot normal reach A or B or jackpot super reach A or B is selected. In other words, in this embodiment, the reach presentation is distinguished by the type of reach presentation: a reach presentation that has the potential to result in a 16R probability jackpot, an 8R probability jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot. The same is true for the table for selecting the main decorative symbol variation pattern for special chart 2.

As shown in Figure 80, the ending presentation pattern determination table corresponds to the main decorative symbol variation pattern selection table described above. The ending presentation pattern for 16R probability variation (Special 1) is a pattern in which next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, combined information including card removal prevention information 44y and light-emitting gazing prevention information 44o are displayed in sequence, followed by EF victory rush entry information 44α1 as a special presentation. EF victory rush entry information 44α1 is information that indicates to the player that this jackpot round game state occurred after passing through Super Reach E and F (by defeating enemy characters TKE and TKF, described below), and that a rush presentation is about to begin in which the probability variation will continue and the number of support rounds will continue until the next jackpot. Similarly, for 16R probability variation (Special 2), next game state suggestion information 44w, combined information including card removal prevention information 44y and light-emitting gaze prevention information 44o are displayed in sequence, followed by EF victory rush entry information 44α1. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the relationship between the reach display effect that caused the ending display and the type of advantageous game state that will occur from now on.

The ending presentation pattern for 8R Probability Change (Special 1) is a pattern in which the combined information of next game state suggestion information 44w and manufacturer information 44x, and manufacturer information 44x are displayed in sequence, followed by CD rush entry information 44α2. CD rush entry information 44α2 informs the player that this jackpot round game state occurred after passing through Super Reach C and D (by defeating enemy characters TKC and TKD, described below), and that a rush presentation with 100 support rounds and a continuation of the probability change will now begin. Similarly, for 8R Probability Change (Special 2), the combined information of next game state suggestion information 44w and manufacturer information 44x is displayed, followed by CD rush entry information 44α2. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the relationship between the reach display presentation that caused this ending presentation and the advantageous game state that will now occur.

The ending presentation pattern for 8R normal (special 1) based on normal reaches A and B is a pattern in which a combination of next game state suggestion information 44w and card removal forget prevention information 44y, and manufacturer information 44x are displayed in sequence, followed by chance mode entry information 44α3. The ending presentation pattern for 8R normal (special 1) based on super reaches A and B is a pattern in which a combination of next game state suggestion information 44w and card removal forget prevention information 44y, and manufacturer information 44x are displayed in sequence, followed by chance mode entry information 44α3. The chance mode entry information 44α3 is information that indicates to the player that a chance presentation with 100 support attempts is about to begin. Note that in the ending presentation pattern for 8R normal (special 1) based on super reaches A and B, mission clear mode entry information indicating that the mission presentation in super reaches A and B has been cleared may be displayed instead of chance mode entry information 44α3.

Next, referring to Figure 81, the display mode of the third pattern display device 42 will be explained.
FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating the display modes from the reach display effect to the big win round display effect.

The display control device 45 executes specific effects during reach development effects, for example, in the case of Super Reach C, a showdown effect between the player's character PY and enemy character TKC; in the case of Super Reach D, a showdown effect between the player's character PY and enemy character TKD; in the case of Super Reach E, a showdown effect between the player's character PY and enemy character TKE; and in the case of Super Reach F, a showdown effect between the player's character PY and enemy character TKF. Here, a jackpot Super Reach E is determined as the reach development effect, and a specific effect is executed in which the player's character PY wins as a result of the showdown between the player's character PY and enemy character TKE.

As shown in (a), the display control device 45 controls the display of a selection request image that requests the player to make a predetermined selection (selection of the player's character PY) during the reach development presentation. As in Example 13 above, there are three types of player characters PY: first character PY1, second character PY2, and third character PY3. The selection request image is specific operation period information 44a ("Player can be changed by long press"). The player's character PY can be selected by deciding on the first character PY1 as is (remaining as first character PY1) without operating the frame button 80, or by operating the frame button 80 to change to the second character PY2 or third character PY3.

As shown in (b), it is assumed that the first character PY1 is selected as a result of the selection of the player's character PY. The confrontation between the player's character PY and the enemy character TKE is executed when the player's character PY is selected as requested by the selection request image. This makes it easier to remember the specific selection requested by the operation request image and the specific presentation, thereby improving the interest of the ending presentation.

As a result of the battle performance, as shown in (c), the player's character PY (first character PY1) defeats the enemy character TKE, and the development symbols HZ are displayed as a stopped jackpot combination of "777." After that, as shown in (d), after the 16R jackpot round play ends, the jackpot ending performance begins.

The display control device 45 is capable of controlling the display of information related to the specific effects executed during the reach development effect in the ending effect. The information related to the specific effect is EF victory rush entry information 44α1 if the effect is either jackpot super reach E or F, and is CD victory rush entry information 44α2 if the effect is either jackpot super reach C or D. This associates the ending effect with the display effects leading up to that ending effect through the specific effect, and the excitement of the display effects continues into the ending effect through the specific effect, thereby increasing the interest of the ending effect.

The jackpot ending presentation displays the next game state suggestion information 44w shown in (e), manufacturer information 44x shown in (f), and a combination of the card removal prevention information 44y and light-emitting stare prevention information 44o shown in (g) in sequence, followed by the EF victory rush entry information 44α1 shown in (h). The EF victory rush entry information 44α1 is displayed, for example, as text information saying, "Enter rush after player character A defeats enemy character E!" After the EF victory rush entry information 44α1 finishes displaying as shown in (i), a high probability state screen 43k is displayed as shown in (j), and the game transitions to the "Rush after player character A defeats enemy character E" state, in which the high probability and support state continues until the next jackpot. Player character A refers to the first character PY1.

The information related to the specific effect (EF victory rush entry information 44α1) is information indicating the components of the specific effect, for example, "Rush begins after player character A defeats enemy character E!" indicating the components of the showdown effect between player character PY1 and enemy character TKE. However, it may also be information indicating the player's character selected by the player, such as "Rush begins after player character A wins!", or information indicating the enemy character selected as the player's opponent, such as "Rush begins after enemy character E is defeated!", or information indicating that a showdown reach has been reached, such as "Rush begins after breaking through the EF showdown zone!". Displaying the components of the specific effect in this way makes it easier to remember the displayed effect, further increasing the interest of the ending effect.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 20 is equipped with a third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying a display effect triggered by a lottery based on the establishment of a start condition, and a display control device 45 that controls the display of the display effect on the third symbol display device 42. The display control device 45 has a specific effect execution function that controls the execution of a specific effect during the display effect, and a round that is executed a predetermined number of times, with one round being the time from when the variable winning device 32 is set to an open state where a game ball can enter, to when it is set to a closed state where a game ball cannot enter, based on the result of the lottery being a specific result. and an ending performance execution function that controls the display of an ending performance that displays specified information during the ending period from the end of a round game to the start of the next game. The ending performance execution function can control the display of information (EF victory rush entry information 44α1, CD victory rush entry information 44α2) related to a specific performance (e.g., a performance in which the player's character PY faces off against specific enemy characters TKC, TKD, TKE, or TKF) that was executed during a display performance (e.g., a reach development performance) in the ending performance. This associates the ending performance with the display performance leading up to the ending performance through the specific performance, and the excitement of the display performance continues into the ending performance through the specific performance, thereby increasing the interest of the ending performance.

In addition, the information related to the specific effect is information that indicates the components of the specific effect (for example, information such as "After your character A defeats enemy character E, a rush begins!" that indicates the components of the confrontation between your character PY and enemy character TKE). By displaying the components of the specific effect, it becomes easier to remember the displayed effect, further increasing the interest of the ending effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G2).

The display effect that triggers the special effect is a variable display effect of identification information (e.g., a variable display effect of the main decorative pattern SZ or the development pattern HZ) that allows players to identify whether the lottery result will be a special result. This makes it easier to remember the special effect along with the variable display effect, thereby increasing the interest of the ending effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G4).

The display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a reach display effect for the identification information (for example, a reach display effect for the main decorative pattern SZ or the development pattern HZ). This makes it easier to remember the specific effect along with the reach display effect, thereby increasing the interest of the ending effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G5).

The specific effect is a specific suggestion effect (for example, a confrontation between the player's character PY and specific enemy characters TKC, TKD, TKE, or TKF) that suggests that the possibility of a specific result is higher than if the specific effect is not executed. This makes it easier for players who understand the meaning of the suggestion to remember the specific suggestion effect, thereby increasing the interest of the ending effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G7).

The display control device 45 also has a selection request execution function that controls the display of a selection request image (specific operation period information 44a) that requests the player to make a specific selection during the display effect (either select the current state without operating the frame button 80, or operate the frame button 80 to select a changed version), and the specific effect is executed when the specific selection requested by the selection request image is made. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect along with the fact that the specific selection requested by the operation request image was made, thereby increasing the interest of the ending effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G9).

The selection request image is displayed during the variable display of identification information (during the reach development display using the HZ development pattern), which allows users to determine whether the lottery result will be a specific outcome. This makes it easier for the specific display to leave a strong impression along with the variable display display, increasing the interest of the ending display. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G10).

In the above-described Example 20, the jackpot ending display effect was used to review (playback) the display of a specific reach display effect as a specific effect executed during the display effect, but it is also possible to review an effect other than the specific reach display effect. This point will be explained with reference to Figures 82 to 85.

Figure 82 is a flowchart explaining the auxiliary effect determination process performed by the display control device 45 in Example 21. Figure 83 (a) is a flowchart explaining the one-shot announcement lottery process performed by the display control device 45, and (b) is a flowchart explaining the one-shot announcement display process performed by the display control device 45. Figures 84 (a) and (b) are diagrams explaining the ending effect pattern determination table.

In this embodiment, the specific effect is a specific notification effect that notifies players that the possibility of a specific result is higher than if the specific effect is not executed. The specific notification effect is a one-shot notification effect, for example, by activating a one-shot notification device IP arranged around the third pattern display device 42 and causing it to appear in front of the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42. This makes it easier for players who see, hear, or experience the notification to remember the specific notification effect, thereby increasing the interest of the ending effect.

The specific notification effect may be an effect that causes the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42 to emit strong light, as long as it is an effect that notifies that a specific result is more likely to occur than if the specific effect is not executed. Alternatively, the specific notification effect may be an effect in which a specific pattern that is normally difficult to see, formed on a transparent light guide plate arranged in front of the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42, is displayed as a visible pattern by emitting light from an LED arranged on the side of the transparent light guide plate. Alternatively, the specific notification effect may be an effect in which a specific image appears during a reach display effect, or an effect in which the image displayed during a reach display effect changes to a specific form.

The auxiliary effect determination process will now be described. As shown in FIG. 82, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs processing to display various suggestive images in step S3401. The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the one-shot announcement lottery process described below in step S3402, and performs the one-shot announcement display process described below in step S3403.

The one-shot announcement lottery process will now be described. As shown in FIG. 83(a), in step S3411, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a jackpot variation pattern command has been received. Specifically, if a display jackpot variation pattern designation command has been received from the sub-control device 262, the process proceeds to step S3412; if not, the process terminates. In step S3412, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 reads the value of the one-shot announcement lottery counter, which is used internally to determine whether or not to execute a one-shot announcement in the event of a jackpot result, and in step S3413 determines whether or not the value indicates a win in the execution of the one-shot announcement effect. If the execution of the one-shot announcement effect has been won, the process proceeds to step S3414, where the one-shot announcement flag is set from 0 to 1. If the result is unsuccessful, the one-shot announcement flag remains set to 0 and the process terminates.

The single-shot notification display processing will now be described. As shown in FIG. 83(b), in step S3421, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the single-shot notification flag is 1. If the single-shot notification flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S3422; if not, the process terminates. In step S3422, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether the single-shot notification is enabled. If the single-shot notification is enabled, the process proceeds to step S3423, where a single-shot notification effect is executed at a predetermined timing. After the single-shot notification effect is executed, the process returns the single-shot notification flag from 1 to 0 in step S3424, and the process terminates. On the other hand, if the single-shot notification is disabled, the process proceeds to step S3424, where the single-shot notification flag is reset from 1 to 0, and the process terminates. The setting for whether or not to enable a single-shot notification may be selectable by the player, as described below, or may be selected internally within the gaming machine. If the player can select the setting, the player's preference regarding single-shot notifications can be reflected. If the selection can be made within the gaming machine, it will be possible to reduce the disadvantages that players may experience from continuing to look at the one-shot announcements (eye fatigue, disinterest in anything other than the one-shot announcements) or the disadvantages that players may experience from not continuing to look at the one-shot announcements (lack of excitement due to the one-shot announcements).

The ending presentation pattern determination table will now be explained. Figure 84 (a) shows the content corresponding to 16R special chance (special 1) in the ending presentation pattern determination table shown in Figure 58, and (b) shows the content corresponding to 8R special chance (special 1) in the ending presentation pattern determination table shown in Figure 58. The following explanation also applies to the other cases.

When jackpot super reach A or B shown in (a) is executed and the one-shot announcement is disabled, the jackpot ending display effect displays the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information 44y, and bonus video 44n in that order, similar to the case shown in FIG. 58. When jackpot super reach A or B is executed and the one-shot announcement is enabled, the jackpot ending display effect displays the combined information of the light-emitting gazing prevention information 44o and one-shot announcement effect change suggestion information 44γ, manufacturer information 44x, the combined information of the next game state suggestion information 44w and card removal prevention information 44y, and bonus video 44n in that order. The one-shot announcement effect change suggestion information 44γ is information that suggests whether to change the setting for the one-shot announcement effect. The same applies when jackpot super reach C to F is executed.

When the jackpot super reach A or B shown in (b) is executed and no one-shot notification is set, the jackpot ending display presentation displays the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal prevention information 44y in that order, as in the case shown in FIG. 58. When the super reach A or B is executed and one-shot notification is set, the jackpot ending display presentation displays the combined information of the light-emitting gazing prevention information 44o and one-shot notification presentation change suggestion information 44γ, manufacturer information 44x, the combined information of the next game state suggestion information 44w and card removal prevention information 44y, and bonus video 44n in that order. The same applies when normal reach A or B and jackpot super reach C or D are executed.

Next, the display mode of the third symbol display device 42 will be explained with reference to Figure 85. Figure 85 is a diagram explaining the display mode from the reach display effect to the jackpot ending display effect.

As shown in (a), the display control device 45 controls the display of a selection request image that requests the player to make a predetermined selection (select whether or not to display a one-shot announcement effect) during a reach development effect (for example, a mission clear effect based on Super Reach A). The selection request image is specific operation period information 44a ("Press and hold to change whether or not to display a one-shot announcement effect"). Specific operation period end approach information 44e is displayed together with specific operation period information 44a, and counts the time (for example, 10 seconds) during which the player can select whether or not to display a one-shot announcement effect. If 10 seconds pass without operating the frame button 80, it is determined that a one-shot announcement effect will be displayed.

As described above, you can select whether or not to have a one-shot announcement effect by leaving the status quo (with the one-shot announcement effect) unchanged without operating the frame button 80, or by operating the frame button 80 as shown in (b) to change to no one-shot announcement effect. Operating the frame button 80 displays the change information display section 44c, and you can select no one-shot announcement effect by operating the left selection button 82 or right selection button 83. Pressing the confirm button 81 will confirm the selected mode.

As a result of the selection, it is assumed that a one-shot announcement effect is selected. The mission clear effect is executed when the selection required by the selection request image is made, with or without a one-shot announcement effect. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect, along with the fact that the specified selection required by the operation request image has been made, thereby increasing the interest of the ending effect.

During the mission clear effect, as shown in (d), the one-shot announcement device IP falls from the top of the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42, and the numerous LEDs arranged in front of the one-shot announcement device IP and the light-emitting devices arranged around the display screen 42a light up to create a one-shot announcement effect. The one-shot announcement effect may output a sound to emphasize the one-shot announcement in conjunction with the light emission. The light emission eventually ends, and the one-shot announcement device IP is stored above the display screen 42a. In the mission clear effect in which the one-shot announcement effect is performed, as shown in (e), the player's character PY clears the mission, and the development symbol HZ is displayed stopped in a winning combination, for example, "666." After that, as shown in (f), after the 8R jackpot round play ends, the jackpot ending effect begins.

When no one-shot notification is selected, the jackpot ending presentation displays next game state suggestion information 44w shown in (g), manufacturer information 44x shown in (h), and card removal prevention information 44y shown in (i). When one-shot notification is selected, a combination of light-emitting stare prevention information 44o shown in (j) (text information stating "Please be careful not to stare at a strong light") and one-shot notification presentation change suggestion information 44γ ("Those who get eye strain easily can also choose not to have one-shot notifications"), next game state suggestion information 44w shown in (k), manufacturer information 44x and card removal prevention information 44y shown in (l) is also displayed. Next game state approach information 44l6, which displays the remaining time for the jackpot ending presentation, is also displayed.

In this way, the display control device 45 can control the display of information related to the specific effect (the light-emitting gaze prevention information 44o described above) executed during the reach development effect in the ending effect. Information related to the specific effect is information indicating the components of the specific effect, for example, the information "Please be careful not to continue looking at the strong light" in the light-emitting gaze prevention information 44o, which indicates the light that constitutes the one-shot announcement effect. In addition, information related to the specific effect may be information that reminds the player of the specific color when a one-shot announcement device IP capable of emitting light of multiple colors emits a specific light, indicating the confirmed jackpot. This information reminds the player of the specific color that constitutes the one-shot announcement effect, such as "What color was the light in the one-shot announcement effect?" This makes it easier to remember the displayed effect by displaying the components of the specific effect, further increasing the interest of the ending effect.

In addition, information related to the special effects is information indicating the impact that the special effects have had on the player, such as the above-mentioned one-shot announcement effect change suggestion information 44γ, "Those who get eye strain easily can choose not to have one-shot announcements." This is information that suggests to the player that if there is another opportunity to choose whether or not to have one-shot announcements for the next or subsequent reach development effects, they should choose the option they did not choose this time (no one-shot announcements). This can appeal to players whose eyes are affected by the strong light from the special effects to rest their eyes, further increasing the interest of the ending effects.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 21, the information related to the special effect is information indicating the components of the special effect (for example, "strong light" in the light gazing prevention information 44o "Please be careful not to stare at a strong light for long periods of time"). This makes it easier to remember the displayed effect by displaying the components of the special effect, further increasing the interest of the ending effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G2).

In addition, the information related to the special effects is information indicating the impact that the special effects have had on the player (for example, one-shot notification effect change suggestion information 44γ "If your eyes get tired easily, please choose B next time"). This makes it possible to appeal to players who have been affected by the special effects, further increasing the interest of the ending effects. This is an example of a gaming machine described in (G3).

The special effect is a special notification effect (a one-shot notification effect using a one-shot notification device IP) that notifies players that the possibility of a special result is higher than if the special effect is not executed. This makes it easier for players who see, hear, or experience the notification to remember the special notification effect, thereby increasing the interest of the ending effect. This is an example of a gaming machine described in (G8).

The display control device 45 also has a selection request execution function that controls the display of a selection request image (change information display section 44c) that requests the player to make a specified selection (whether or not to make a one-shot announcement) during the reach development presentation, and the specific presentation (one-shot announcement presentation) is executed when the specified selection requested by the selection request image is made. This makes it easier to remember the specific presentation along with the fact that the specified selection requested by the operation request image was made, thereby increasing the interest of the ending presentation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G9).

In the above-mentioned Example 21, it was possible to select whether or not to execute a one-shot announcement effect during a reach display effect, but the selection of whether or not to execute a one-shot announcement effect may also be made during other display effects. This point will be explained with reference to Figures 86 and 87. Figure 86 is a diagram illustrating a table for determining the ending effect pattern in Example 22. Figure 87 is a diagram illustrating another display mode of the jackpot ending display effect.

In other words, the selection request image is displayed during the ending performance, simultaneously with, for example, information related to a specific performance (e.g., light-emitting gazing prevention information 44o). This allows the player to reconsider whether to make a specific selection after viewing the information related to the specific performance, thereby increasing the interest of the ending performance.

The table for determining ending presentation patterns will be explained. (a) corresponds to the 16R probability change (special 1) shown in Figure 84, and (b) corresponds to the 8R probability change (special 1) shown in Figure 84.

When the jackpot super reach A or B shown in (a) is executed, when the one-shot announcement is set, and when no operation to change the one-shot announcement presentation change proposal information 44γ1 described below is performed to enable or disable the one-shot announcement presentation, the jackpot ending display presentation will display a combination of the light-emitting gazing prevention information 44o and the one-shot announcement presentation change proposal information 44γ1, the manufacturer information 44x, the next game state suggestion information 44w and the card removal forget prevention information 44y, and the bonus video 44n in that order. When jackpot super reach A or B is executed, one-shot announcement is enabled, and an operation to change the one-shot announcement effect on or off has been performed using the one-shot announcement effect change proposal information 44γ1 (described below), the jackpot ending display effect will sequentially display the combined information of the light emission gaze prevention information 44o and the one-shot announcement effect change proposal information 44γ1, the combined information of the manufacturer information 44x and the next game state suggestion information 44w, the one-shot announcement effect change operation information 44γ2, and the bonus video 44n. The same applies when jackpot super reach C to F is executed.

The single-shot announcement effect change proposal information 44γ1 is information that proposes a change operation to change the setting for whether or not the single-shot announcement effect is to be displayed in this jackpot ending display effect. The single-shot announcement effect change operation information 44γ2 is information that indicates the content of the change operation to change whether or not the single-shot announcement effect is to be displayed when a change operation is performed by operating the frame button 80 on the single-shot announcement effect change proposal information 44γ1.

When the jackpot super reach A or B shown in (b) is executed, the one-shot announcement is set to on, and no change operation has been made to the one-shot announcement effect change proposal information 44γ1 to enable or disable the one-shot announcement effect, the jackpot ending display presentation will sequentially display the combined information of the light-emitting gazing prevention information 44o and the one-shot announcement effect change proposal information 44γ1, the manufacturer information 44x, the next game state suggestion information 44w, and the card removal forget prevention information 44y. When the jackpot super reach A or B is executed, the one-shot announcement is set to on, and a change operation has been made to the one-shot announcement effect change proposal information 44γ1, the jackpot ending display presentation will sequentially display the combined information of the light-emitting gazing prevention information 44o and the one-shot announcement effect change proposal information 44γ1, the manufacturer information 44x, the next game state suggestion information 44w, and the card removal forget prevention information 44y, and the one-shot announcement effect change operation information 44γ2. The same applies when jackpot normal reach A or B or jackpot super reach C or D is executed.

Next, the display mode of the third symbol display device 42 will be explained with reference to Figure 87. Figure 87 is a diagram explaining the display mode from the reach display effect to the jackpot ending display effect. Note that the display mode from the reach display effect to the jackpot round display effect is the same as Figure 85, so the explanation will begin with the start of the jackpot ending display effect.

When the one-shot announcement setting is enabled and the one-shot announcement effect is executed during the reach effect leading to this jackpot ending display effect, combined information is displayed, as shown in (a), consisting of the light-emitting gazing prevention information 44o and the one-shot announcement effect change proposal information 44γ1. When the one-shot announcement setting is enabled, the one-shot announcement effect change proposal information 44γ1 is text information stating, "If your eyes get tired easily, press the button to select no one-shot announcement." Furthermore, while the one-shot announcement effect change proposal information 44γ1 is displayed, specific operation period end approach information 44e is displayed, indicating the time during which the one-shot announcement effect change operation will be accepted. Throughout the display period of the ending display effect, next game state approach information 44l6 is displayed, indicating the remaining time of the ending display effect.

If the frame button 80 is not pressed to change the display of the one-shot announcement effect suggestion information 44γ1 (10 seconds after the start of the ending effect), in other words, if the player does not wish to change whether or not the one-shot announcement effect is displayed, the jackpot ending display effect will sequentially display the manufacturer information 44x (5 seconds) shown in (b) and the combined information (10 seconds) of the next game state suggestion information 44w and card removal prevention information 44y shown in (c).

If a change operation is performed while the one-shot announcement effect change proposal information 44γ1 is being displayed, that is, if the player wishes to change whether or not the one-shot announcement effect is on, the jackpot ending display effect will display a composite (5 seconds) of manufacturer information 44x and next game state suggestion information 44w, as shown in (d). Also, while this composite information is being displayed, post-specific operation wait information 44a3 is displayed to inform the player that they are waiting until the operation to change the one-shot announcement effect begins. The post-specific operation wait information 44a3 is text information stating, "Please wait a moment until the operation to change the one-shot announcement effect is performed."

After the display of manufacturer information 44x and next game state suggestion information 44w has finished, as shown in (e), one-shot announcement effect change operation information 44γ2 (10 seconds) is displayed, prompting the player to change the one-shot announcement effect. The one-shot announcement effect change operation information 44γ2 displays a change information display section 44c that indicates whether or not the one-shot announcement effect is enabled, and an operation method display section 44d that shows how to change whether or not the one-shot announcement effect is enabled. It also displays specific operation period end approach information 44e, which indicates the remaining time for this change operation.

As shown in (f), when the player operates the left selection button 82 or the right selection button 83 to select no one-shot announcement effect and presses the decision button 81, the one-shot announcement effect will be set to no longer be displayed in the next game state.

If the one-shot announcement setting is enabled and the one-shot announcement effect is executed during the reach effect leading to the jackpot ending display effect, only the one-shot announcement effect change proposal information 44γ1 may be displayed in (a), and text information such as "If you would like to see the one-shot announcement effect this time, press the button to select one-shot announcement enabled" may be displayed. If the player presses the button, the one-shot announcement effect change operation information 44γ2 is displayed, as in (e) to (f). After the change operation is completed, the remaining ending information 44j is displayed, as shown in (g), and the game transitions to the next game state. In this way, by the player selecting one-shot announcement enabled during the ending display effect, the one-shot announcement effect can be displayed in the next game state. This stimulates the player's desire to see the one-shot announcement effect this time in the ending effect, thereby maintaining their enthusiasm for the game.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 22, the selection request image (one-shot announcement effect change suggestion information 44γ) is displayed during the ending display effect. This makes it easier for the specific effect (one-shot announcement effect) to leave a strong impression along with the ending display effect, thereby increasing the interest of the ending effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G11).

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 23 is configured so that the third decorative illumination unit (top lamp) 303 can be replaced with another third decorative illumination unit (another top lamp) 604 of a different size and shape. Furthermore, even when the third decorative illumination unit 303 is replaced with another third decorative illumination unit 604, the decorative effect can be optimized. Specific configurations are described below.

Figure 88 is a front view of a pachinko machine of Example 23 with an illuminated cover of a different size attached to it than that shown in Figure 1. Figure 89 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 88, showing the CC cross section when an illuminated cover of a different size is attached. Figure 90 is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 88, showing the DD cross section when an illuminated cover of a different size is attached. Figures 91(a) and (b) are diagrams explaining the adjustment of the light-emitting area when an illuminated cover of a different size is attached.

The third decorative illumination unit 303 consists of a configuration that is fixed to the front frame set 14 and a configuration that is detachable from the front frame set 14.

Specifically, the third illumination unit 303 is configured to be fixed to the front frame set 14 and includes a light irradiation device 607 that emits light and a control mechanism 608 that controls the manner of light emitted from the light irradiation device 607, and is configured to be detachable from the front frame set 14 and includes a third illumination cover 609 that covers the front side of the light irradiation device 607. The third illumination cover 609 can be replaced with a different third illumination cover 610 of a different size and shape than the third illumination cover 609.

The third illuminated cover 609 is made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin. The third illuminated cover 609 may be colorless or colored, and may have a frosted surface treatment. The third illuminated cover 609 may be equipped with a diffusion member (diffusion plate) with irregularities to diffuse the light from the light irradiation device 607, or the inner surface of the third illuminated cover 609 may have irregularities to diffuse the light from the light irradiation device 607. This allows the third illuminated cover 609 to make the light irradiation device 607 less visible to the player. Note that not only the third illuminated cover 609 (i.e., the third illuminated unit 303), but also the separate third illuminated cover 610, the first illuminated unit 301, and the second illuminated unit 302 are configured in a similar manner.

The third illuminated cover 609 forms a cover for the third illuminated unit 303 and is attached to the location sandwiched between the sound output unit 24 of the front frame set 14. Its upper end is formed horizontally along the inside of the upper edge of the inner frame 12, and its front end protrudes slightly forward beyond the sound output unit 24. The third illuminated cover 609 is formed as a first light-emitting area 605, with its front surface as the center and the left and right side surfaces, top surface, bottom surface, etc. emitting light.

The separate third decorative illumination cover 610 forms a cover for the separate third decorative illumination unit 604 and is attached to the location sandwiched between the sound output unit 24 of the front frame set 14. However, its upper end is formed above the upper edge of the inner frame 12, and its front end protrudes slightly further forward than when the third decorative illumination cover 609 is attached. In other words, the separate third decorative illumination cover 610 can be attached to the same location as the third decorative illumination cover 609, but is formed as a larger decorative illumination cover than the third decorative illumination cover 609. The separate third decorative illumination cover 610 is formed with a second light-emitting area 606 that is wider than the first light-emitting area 605 on the left and right sides, top, and bottom, centered on its front. The second light-emitting area 606 of the separate third decorative illumination cover 610 changes depending on its shape.

The separate third illuminated cover 610 is attached to the location sandwiched between the sound output unit 24 of the front frame set 14 by a slide mechanism 602 that slides the separate third illuminated cover 610 in the forward and backward directions. The slide mechanism 602 is composed of slide grooves 603 formed on the upper and lower sides of the inner surface of the cover for the sound output unit 24.

The slide grooves 603 are formed at the front and back so that the third illuminated cover 609 and the separate third illuminated cover 610 can be attached vertically to the front frame set 14, but the third illuminated cover 609 and the separate third illuminated cover 610 may also be attached by inserting them diagonally downward into the front frame set 14. The slide grooves 603 may also be designed so that the third illuminated cover 609 and the separate third illuminated cover 610 can be attached and removed vertically to the front frame set 14.

When the third illuminated cover 609 is attached (i.e., when the front surface of the third illuminated cover 609 is located in the first position), the control mechanism 608 executes a first control that causes the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 to illuminate the front surface of the third illuminated cover 609 located in the first position as the first light-emitting area 605. The first control is control of the tilt, position, light-emitting intensity, light-emitting area, etc. of the light irradiation device 607 so that the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 appropriately illuminates the first light-emitting area 605. In this embodiment, the first control is posture control that maintains or changes the posture of the light irradiation device 607 to a vertical position.

When the separate third illumination cover 610 is attached (i.e., when the front surface of the separate third illumination cover 610 is located in the second position), the control mechanism 608 executes a second control that causes the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 to illuminate the front surface of the separate third illumination cover 610 located in the second position as the second light-emitting area 606. The second control is control of the tilt, position, light-emitting intensity, light-emitting area, etc. of the light irradiation device 607 so that the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 appropriately illuminates the second light-emitting area 606. In this embodiment, the second control is posture control that maintains or shifts the light irradiation device 607 to a posture tilted slightly upward.

As a result, whether the light emitted from the light-emitting device 607 illuminates the first light-emitting area 605 (i.e., the third illuminated cover 609) or the light emitted from the light-emitting device 607 illuminates the second light-emitting area 606 (i.e., the separate third illuminated cover 610), the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately by optimizing the light emitted from the light-emitting device 607. Even if the third illuminated cover 609 arranged on the front frame set 14 of the gaming machine main body is replaced with the separate third illuminated cover 610, the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately. Even if the shape of the separate third illuminated cover 610 changes from the shape of the previous third illuminated cover 609, the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately.

The control mechanism 608 changes the light irradiation device 607 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed (or from a state in which the second control can be executed to a state in which the first control can be executed; the same applies below) during the process of attaching the separate third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illumination cover 609. This allows the light-emitting area to be suitably changed during the process of replacing the third illumination cover 609 arranged on the front frame set 14 of the gaming machine body with the separate third illumination cover 610.

The third illuminated cover 609 and the separate third illuminated cover 610 are equipped with a locking mechanism 622 that allows them to be locked to and replaced on the front frame set 14 without the use of tools. The locking mechanism 622 is composed, for example, of a claw portion 623 provided on the front frame set plate 14a and a claw hole portion 624 provided on the third illuminated cover 609 and the separate third illuminated cover 610. The locking mechanism 622 has a claw portion 623 that fits firmly into the claw hole portion 624, so it cannot be easily removed by players or cheaters during business hours.

The control mechanism 608 changes the light irradiation device 607 from a state in which the first control can be performed to a state in which the second control can be performed in conjunction with the replacement of the third illumination cover 609 and the separate third illumination cover 610. This makes it easy to perform replacement work to suitably change the light-emitting area.

Next, we will explain in detail the first control and second control performed by the control mechanism 608.

The light irradiation device 607 includes a light-emitting substrate 611 on which an LED 612 is mounted, and a substrate support part 613 that supports the light-emitting substrate 611. The substrate support part 613 is rotatably supported by a main body side fixing part 620 that is fixed to the front frame set 14.

The light irradiation device 607 is configured so that the light-emitting substrate 611 can be tilted using the substrate support part 613 and the main body side fixing part 620. By tilting the light-emitting substrate 611, the control mechanism 608 changes the light irradiation device 607 from a state in which it can perform the first control to a state in which it can perform the second control. This makes it easy to adjust the irradiation angle.

The control mechanism 608 includes an input unit 614 that inputs the force generated in the process of attaching the separate third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illumination cover 609, in order to configure the light-emitting substrate 611 to be tiltable, and an output unit 615 that changes the form of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 based on the input force.

The input unit 614 is a mechanism that pushes the light irradiation device 607 into the separate third illumination cover 610 during the process of attaching the separate third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illumination cover 609. Specifically, the input unit 614 includes a push-in portion 616 provided on the separate third illumination cover 610 and a push-in receiving portion 617 provided on the light irradiation device 607.

The push-in portion 616 is a protruding portion arranged on the inner surface of the left end portion of the separate third illuminated cover 610 when viewed from the front. The protrusion of the push-in portion 616 is formed so that, during the process of attaching the separate third illuminated cover 610 to the front frame set 14, it comes into contact with the push-in receiving portion 617 provided at the upper left end portion of the board support portion 613 when viewed from the front, tilting the board support portion 613 toward the back before it is attached to the attachment location.

The push-in portion 616 is made difficult for players to see by the uneven portion formed on the inside of the separate third illuminated cover 610, but to make the push-in portion 616 even more difficult to see, it may be formed on the side of the separate third illuminated cover 610. In this case, the push-in receiving portion 617 is also formed on the side of the light irradiation device 607.

Depending on the structure for attaching the separate third illuminated cover 610, the push-in portion 616 and the push-in receiving portion 617 may be disposed in different locations on the separate third illuminated cover 610 and the light irradiation device 607. If the above-mentioned slide groove 603 is configured to attach the third illuminated cover 609 and the separate third illuminated cover 610 by inserting them diagonally downward relative to the front frame set 14, the push-in receiving portion 617 may be protruded from the back side of the light irradiation device 607, and the push-in portion 616 may be formed at a location (the inner surface of the separate third illuminated cover 610) where the push-in receiving portion 617 protruding from the back side of the light irradiation device 607 can be pushed in. As a result, when the third illumination cover 609 is attached, the push-in receiving portion 617 is hidden behind the light irradiation device 607, and when the separate third illumination cover 310 is attached, both the push-in portion 616 and the push-in receiving portion 617 are hidden behind the light irradiation device 607, so not only are they not visible to the player, but the light-emitting area of the light irradiation device 607 can be made larger.

The output unit 615 is a mechanism that tilts the light-emitting substrate 611 by tilting the light-emitting device 607 based on the force input from the input unit 614, thereby changing the light-emitting device 607 from a state in which the first control can be performed to a state in which the second control can be performed. Specifically, the output unit 615 is composed of a substrate support unit 613, a main body side fixing unit 620, a shaft 618, a coil spring 619 attached to the shaft 618, and an attitude regulation unit 621 that regulates the attitude of the substrate support unit 613.

The shaft 618 connects the board support part 613 and the main body side fixed part 620 so that the board support part 613 can tilt relative to the main body side fixed part 620. The coil spring 619 generates a biasing force between the board support part 613 and the main body side fixed part 620 when attached to the shaft 618. The coil spring 619 increases its biasing force as the pushing part 616 comes into contact with the pushing receiving part 617 and tilts the board support part 613 toward the rear during the process of attaching the separate third illumination cover 610, until the biasing force is greatest at the position where the pushing of the pushing part 616 ends.

The posture restriction portion 621 is a stopper provided on the board support portion 613. When the third illumination cover 609 is attached, the biasing force of the coil spring 619 is restricted by the posture restriction portion 621 to keep the board support portion 613 in a vertical position.

This allows the light-emitting area to be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated during the process of attaching the separate third lighting cover 610 to the front frame set 14 in place of the third lighting cover 609. This allows the light-emitting area to be suitably changed by utilizing the force with which the separate third lighting cover 610 presses the light irradiation device 607 during the process of attaching the separate third lighting cover 610 to the front frame set 14 in place of the third lighting cover 609. This allows the irradiation angle to be easily adjusted by utilizing the force input during the process of attaching the separate third lighting cover 610 to the front frame set 14 in place of the third lighting cover 609.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of Example 23 is equipped with a third illumination unit 303 (third illumination cover 609) disposed on the front side of the gaming machine body, and a light irradiation device 607 that irradiates light toward the back side of the third illumination unit 303. The pachinko machine 10 is capable of shifting a predetermined surface (e.g., the front surface) of the third illumination unit 303, which receives light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607, to different positions using the shifting mechanism 602, so that the impression of the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed depending on the change in the position of the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303. The control mechanism 608 executes a first control in which, when the predetermined surface is located in a first position, the light emitted from the light emitting device 607 causes the predetermined surface located in the first position to emit light as a first light-emitting area 605, and when the predetermined surface is located in a second position, the light emitted from the light emitting device 607 causes the predetermined surface located in the second position to emit light as a second light-emitting area 606. Therefore, by optimizing the light emission direction in accordance with the movement of the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H1) above.

Furthermore, the third illumination unit 303 is a replaceable third illumination cover 609 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 body, the first light-emitting area 605 is provided on a predetermined surface of the third illumination cover 609, and the second light-emitting area 606 is provided on a predetermined surface of a separate third illumination cover 610 that is replaced with the third illumination cover 609. Therefore, even if the third illumination cover 609 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 body is replaced with the separate third illumination cover 610, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H2) above.

In addition, the light irradiation device 607 is a light-emitting substrate 611 mounted on the front frame set 14. This allows the light-emitting area to be suitably changed even when the third decorative cover 609 arranged on the front frame set 14 of the gaming machine main body is replaced with a different third decorative cover 610, and the light-emitting substrate 611 is provided on the front frame set 14 side rather than the third decorative cover 609 side. This is also an example of the gaming machine described above in (H3).

The first control involves setting the angle of light emitted from the light-emitting device 607 relative to the first light-emitting area 605 at a right angle (first illumination angle) and setting the illumination area of the light emitted from the light-emitting device 607 relative to the first light-emitting area 605 to a first illumination area (the front surface of the third illuminated cover 609). The second control involves setting a second illumination angle different from the first illumination angle (more inclined than the first illumination angle) and setting a second illumination area different from the first illumination area (wider than the first illumination area). This allows the light-emitting area to be suitably changed by changing the illumination angle and illumination area. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H4) above.

Furthermore, the second light-emitting area 606 of the separate third illuminated cover 610 changes depending on its shape. This allows the light-emitting area to be suitably changed even if the shape of the separate third illuminated cover 610 changes from the shape of the previous third illuminated cover 609. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H5) above.

Furthermore, the third illumination cover 609 and the separate third illumination cover 610 can be replaced without the use of tools. This makes it easy to perform replacement work to suitably change the light-emitting area. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H6) above.

The light irradiation device 607 is also tiltable. This allows the irradiation angle to be easily adjusted whether the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is illuminating the first light-emitting area 605 or the second light-emitting area 606. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H7) above.

Furthermore, in the process of replacing the third illuminated cover 609 with the alternative third illuminated cover 610, the control mechanism 608 changes the light irradiation device 607 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed, so that the light-emitting area can be suitably changed in the process of replacing the third illuminated cover 609 with the alternative third illuminated cover 610. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H9) above.

The control mechanism 608 also includes an input unit 614 that inputs the force generated in the process of replacing the third illuminated cover 609 with the alternative third illuminated cover 610, and an output unit 615 that changes the light irradiation device 607 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed based on the input force. Therefore, the force generated in the process of replacing the third illuminated cover 609 with the alternative third illuminated cover 610 can be used to suitably change the light-emitting area. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H10) above.

In addition, the input unit 614 is a push-in unit 616 and a push-in receiving unit 617 that push the light irradiation device 607 into the separate third illumination cover 610 during the process of replacing the third illumination cover 609 with the separate third illumination cover 610. Therefore, the force with which the separate third illumination cover 610 pushes the light irradiation device 607 during the process of replacing the third illumination cover 609 with the separate third illumination cover 610 can be used to suitably change the light-emitting area. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H11) above.

In addition, the output unit 615 tilts the light irradiation device 607 based on the input force, thereby changing the light irradiation device 607 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed. This makes it possible to easily adjust the irradiation angle by utilizing the force input during the process of attaching the separate third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illumination cover 609. This is also an example of the gaming machine described above in (H12).

The pachinko machine 10 main body comprises an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 main body, an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be able to open and close relative to the outer frame 11 with one side of the outer frame 11 as an opening and closing axis, and a front frame set 14 that is attached so as to be able to open and close relative to the inner frame 12 with one side of the inner frame 12 as an opening and closing axis. The inner frame 12 comprises a resin base 12a that forms its outer shape, and a game board 30 that is attached to the resin base 12a and has a game area 30a through which game balls flow down. The game board 30 has a third symbol The pachinko machine 10 includes a pattern display device 42 having a display screen 42a that displays the display effects during a jackpot game state, which occurs when the variable display of the first symbol and the variable display of the third symbol result in a jackpot, and an opening that makes the display screen 42a visible. The front frame set 14 includes a glass frame portion 23 that surrounds a glass plate 137 that makes the game area 30a and the display screen 42a visible, and the third illumination portion 303 is visible from the front side of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 main body. This facilitates the shifting of the light-emitting area on the front side of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 main body, and by optimizing the light irradiation direction in accordance with the shifting of the light-emitting area, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I2) above.

Furthermore, because the third illumination unit 303 is attached to the glass frame portion 23 of the front frame of the pachinko machine body, it facilitates the shifting of the light-emitting area in the glass frame portion 23 of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine body 10, and by optimizing the light irradiation direction in accordance with the shifting of the light-emitting area in the glass frame portion 23, it is possible to suitably change the light-emitting area in the glass frame portion 23. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I3) above.

Furthermore, the third illumination unit 303 is made of a transparent resin material and is configured to make the control mechanism 608 less visible, making it possible to make the control mechanism 608 less noticeable. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J4) above.

In addition, the control mechanism 608 is positioned so as not to overlap the front of the light-emitting unit mounting surface of the light irradiation device 607, so the light-emitting area can be suitably changed without blocking the light-emitting unit mounting surface. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J4) above.

In the above-described Example 23, the control mechanism 608 changes the mode of light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 by tilting the light irradiation device 607. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which the mode of light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is changed while the light irradiation device 607 remains fixed. Specific configurations are described below.

Figures 92(a) and (b) are diagrams explaining the adjustment of the light-emitting area in Example 24.

In this embodiment, the light irradiation device 607 is fixed to the front frame set 14 and includes a light-transmitting section 630 that transmits light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 to the first light-emitting area 605 or the second light-emitting area 606. The light-transmitting section 630 includes a light-transmitting plate 631 that transmits light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 and outputs it to the front side, a light-transmitting plate support section 632 that supports the light-transmitting plate 631, and a control mechanism 608 similar to that of Example 23. The light-transmitting plate 631 may be colorless or colored and transparent, or may have the property of diffusing light.

The configuration of the light-transmitting plate support portion 332 is the same as the configuration of the substrate support portion 613 that tilts the light-emitting substrate 611 in Example 23. In other words, when the third illumination cover 609 is attached by the control mechanism 608, the light-transmitting plate support portion 632 remains in a vertical position, transmitting light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 and outputting it to the front side where the first light-emitting area 605 is located. However, when the third illumination cover 610 is replaced, the light-transmitting plate support portion 632 assumes a tilted position, refracting the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 diagonally upward where the second light-emitting area 606 is located and transmitting it.

This makes it possible to easily adjust the irradiation angle and suitably change the light-emitting area, not only when the light irradiation device 607 is tiltable, but also when the light-transmitting section 630 is tiltable.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of Example 24, the light irradiation device 607 is fixed to the front frame and includes a light-transmitting portion 630 that transmits light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 to the first light-emitting area 605 or the second light-emitting area 606, and the light-transmitting portion 630 is tiltable. This makes it possible to easily adjust the irradiation angle not only when the light irradiation device 607 is tiltable, but also when the light-transmitting portion 630 is tiltable. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H8) above.

In the above-described Examples 23 and 24, the input unit 614 and output unit 615 of the control mechanism 608 tilt the light-emitting substrate 313 by the force with which the pusher unit 616 pushes the light-emitting substrate 313, but the input unit 614 and output unit 615 of the control mechanism 608 may have a different configuration. Below, specific configurations that differ from Examples 23 and 24 are described.

Figure 93 is a front view of a pachinko machine of Example 25. Figure 94 is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 93, showing the state in which an illumination cover is attached in an E-E cross section. Figure 95 is a front view of a pachinko machine in a state in which an illumination cover of a different size is attached. Figure 96 is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 95, showing the state in which an illumination cover of a different size is attached in an F-F cross section. Figures 97(a) and (b) are diagrams explaining the adjustment of the light-emitting area when an illumination cover of a different size is attached. Figure 98 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the sub-control device.

The control mechanism 608 is equipped with a separate cover detection sensor 641 that detects when the separate third illuminated cover 610 has been attached to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illuminated cover 609, and a tilting motor 642 that changes the manner of light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 based on the detection of the separate cover detection sensor 641. This allows the light-emitting area to be suitably changed by detecting that the separate third illuminated cover 610 has been attached to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illuminated cover 609.

The separate cover detection sensor 641 is attached in a location facing the inner surface of the third illuminated cover 609, for example, in the upper left of the main body fixed part 620 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The separate cover detection sensor 641 is, for example, a limit switch. When the third illuminated cover 609 is attached, the hinge does not press the contacts, so the separate cover detection sensor 641 detects that the separate third illuminated cover 610 is not attached. When the separate third illuminated cover 610 is replaced, the hinge is pressed into a part of the separate third illuminated cover 610 (for example, the separate cover detection protrusion 643 described below), pressing the switch and detecting that the separate third illuminated cover 610 has been attached.

The separate third illuminated cover 610 has a separate cover detection protrusion 643 at a position corresponding to the separate cover detection sensor 641 on the inner surface on the right side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The separate cover detection protrusion 643 reliably contacts the separate cover detection sensor 641 when the separate third illuminated cover 610 is attached to the front frame set 14. Note that the configuration of the separate cover detection sensor 641 is not limited to the above configuration and may be, for example, a non-contact sensor.

When the third decorative cover 609 is installed in place of the separate third decorative cover 610, the separate cover detection sensor 641 detects that the separate third decorative cover 610 has been removed because the hinge separates from the switch when the separate third decorative cover 610 is removed. This allows the light-emitting area to be suitably changed by detecting that the third decorative cover 609 has been installed on the front frame set 14 in place of the separate third decorative cover 610.

The separate cover detection sensor 641 and tilting motor 642 are electrically connected to the sub-controller 262. When the separate cover detection sensor 641 detects that the separate third illuminated cover 610 has been attached, the sub-controller 262 rotates the tilting motor 642 to a predetermined angle, tilting the board support part 613 so that the light irradiation device 607 changes from a vertical position to a tilted position. When the separate cover detection sensor 641 detects that the separate third illuminated cover 610 has been removed, the sub-controller 262 reversely rotates the tilting motor 642 to a predetermined angle, raising the board support part 613 so that the light irradiation device 607 changes from a tilted position to a vertical position. The tilting motor 642 may be controlled by detecting the rotation angle using a potentiometer or encoder, or by applying a pulse voltage equivalent to the predetermined rotation angle using a stepping motor.

Next, we will explain the normal processing performed by the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262, focusing on differences from the above-described embodiment. In step S2103A, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 performs the power-on notification in step S2103, and then adjusts the light-emitting area. Specifically, when the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 receives an ON signal (a detection signal indicating that the separate third illuminated cover 610 has been attached) from the separate cover detection sensor 641, it rotates the tilting motor 642 to a predetermined angle, adjusting the light-emitting area by tilting the board support portion 613 so that the light-emitting device 607 changes from a vertical position to a tilted position. After performing this light-emitting area adjustment, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 performs the customer waiting effect in step S2104. Note that the power-on notification, light-emitting area adjustment, and customer waiting effect steps may be performed in a different order or simultaneously. This means that when the separate third illumination cover 610 is attached, changes to the light-emitting area can be confirmed before play begins, reducing problems during play and allowing the light-emitting area to be changed appropriately.

In step S2107, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a process to edit a lamp lighting pattern that corresponds to (synchronizes with) the variable pattern presentation of the decorative pattern on the third pattern display device 42 of that model. This lamp lighting pattern may be different when the third decorative cover 609 is attached and when the separate third decorative cover 610 is attached. The trigger for adopting a different lighting pattern is not limited to replacement of the separate third decorative cover 610, but may also be replacement of the main control device 261 and sub-control device 262 accompanying the installation of the separate third decorative cover 610. In this way, when the separate third decorative cover 610 is attached, a lamp lighting pattern different from that when the third decorative cover 609 is attached can be displayed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of Example 25 includes a third illumination unit 303 (third illumination cover 609) disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 body, and a light irradiation device 607 that irradiates light onto the third illumination unit 303. The pachinko machine 10 is capable of shifting a predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303, which is illuminated by light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607, between a first position and a second position using a shift mechanism 602, thereby enabling the impression of the front side of the gaming machine to be changed depending on changes in the position of the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303. The pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a separate cover detection sensor 614 that can detect shifts in the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303, and is therefore able to recognize the shifts in the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303. The pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a control mechanism 608 that, when it detects that the predetermined surface has shifted to a first position, executes a first control to illuminate the predetermined surface located at the first position as a first light-emitting area 605 with light emitted from the light-emitting device 607, and, when it detects that the predetermined surface has shifted to a second position, executes a second control to illuminate the predetermined surface located at the second position as a second light-emitting area with light emitted from the light-emitting device 607. Therefore, by recognizing the shift in the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303 and optimizing the light irradiation direction in accordance with the shift in the predetermined surface, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J1) above.

The control mechanism 608 also includes an input unit 614 that receives input of the force generated when the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303 transitions from the first position to the second position; a contact-type separate cover detection sensor 641 that can detect the transition of the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303 from the first position to the second position based on the input force; and an output unit 615 that changes the light irradiation device 607 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed when the transition of the predetermined surface from the first position to the second position is detected. Therefore, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated when the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303 transitions from the first position to the second position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J2) above.

In addition, the input unit 614 is a separate cover detection protrusion 643 that receives the force generated when a predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303 transitions from the first position to the second position, and pushes in the contact-type separate cover detection sensor 641. Therefore, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by receiving the force generated when a predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303 transitions from the first position to the second position, and using the force to push in the contact-type separate cover detection sensor 614. This is also an example of the gaming machine described above in (J3).

Furthermore, the third illumination unit 303 is made of a transparent resin material and is configured to make the control mechanism 608 less visible, making it possible to make the control mechanism 608 less noticeable. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J4) above.

In addition, the control mechanism 608 is positioned so as not to overlap the front of the light-emitting unit mounting surface of the light irradiation device 607, so the light-emitting area can be suitably changed without blocking the light-emitting unit mounting surface. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J5) above.

In addition, because the control mechanism 608 is located on the rear side of the light irradiation device 607, the light-emitting area can be changed appropriately without blocking the shifting light-emitting area, while ensuring sufficient light-emitting area on the front side of the control mechanism 608. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J8) above.

In the above-described Examples 23 to 25, when the illumination cover is replaced with an illumination cover of a different size, the angle of the light-emitting substrate 613 or the light-transmitting plate 631 is adjusted, but other elements may also be adjusted. Below, specific configurations that differ from the above-described examples are explained.

Figure 99 is a front view of a pachinko machine of Example 26. Figure 100 is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 99, showing the state in which an illuminated cover is attached in the GG cross section. Figure 101 is a front view of a pachinko machine in a state in which an illuminated cover with a different light-emitting area is attached. Figure 102 is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 101, showing the state in which an illuminated cover of a different size is attached in the HH cross section. Figure 103 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the sub-control device.

The separate third illuminated cover 650 in Examples 23 to 25 includes a second illuminated area 606A that is the same width as but taller than the first illuminated area 605 of the third illuminated cover 609. However, the second illuminated area 606A of the separate third illuminated cover 650 in this example includes a partial illuminated area 651 that partially illuminates within the area corresponding to the first illuminated area 605, and a non-illuminated area 652 that does not illuminate. For example, the partial illuminated area 651 is formed from a light-transmitting resin, while the non-illuminated area 652 is formed from a light-blocking resin. This allows the separate third illuminated cover 650 to be used in decorations such as a lit partial illuminated area 651 that evokes treasure in the middle of a non-illuminated area 652 that evokes the underwater world, or a lit partial illuminated area 651 that evokes the moon in the middle of a non-illuminated area 652 that evokes the night sky.

The control mechanism 608 includes a separate cover detection sensor 641 and a mechanism for changing the illumination area of the light illumination device 607 based on the detection of the separate cover detection sensor 641. When the third illuminated cover 609 is attached, the light illumination device 607 illuminates the entire area of the light-emitting substrate 611 corresponding to the first light-emitting area 605. Furthermore, when the separate third illuminated cover 650 is attached, the control mechanism 608 illuminates the area of the light-emitting substrate 611 corresponding only to the partial light-emitting area 651 as the second light-emitting area 606A.

This allows the light-emitting area to be appropriately changed even when the illumination area is changed by detecting whether the separate third illumination cover 650 has been attached to the front frame set 14 instead of the third illumination cover 609. The object of change is not limited to the illumination area, but may also be the illumination intensity or the color of the light. The difference in the illumination effect between the third illumination cover 609 and the separate third illumination cover 650 can also be used to express differences in the type of gaming machine, such as the probability of a jackpot or whether or not it has a setting.

Next, in the normal processing performed by the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262, similar to FIG. 98 described above, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 adjusts the light-emitting and non-light-emitting areas (step S2103B) in response to the attachment of the separate third illuminated cover 650. For example, if the detection signal received from the separate cover detection sensor 641 is an OFF signal, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines that the third illuminated cover 609 is attached, and sets all LEDs 612 on the light-emitting board 611 corresponding to the first light-emitting area 605 as light-emitting targets. Furthermore, if the detection signal received from the separate cover detection sensor 641 is an ON signal, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines that the separate third illuminated cover 650 is attached, and sets the LEDs 612 in the center of the light-emitting board 611 corresponding to the second light-emitting area 606A as light-emitting targets. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the selected LED 612 to emit light in a predetermined pattern when the power is turned on. This allows the player to check the lighting status of the luminous and non-luminous areas corresponding to the attachment of the separate third illumination cover 650 before starting play, making it possible to change the luminous areas as desired.

In addition, in step S2107, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a process of editing the lamp lighting pattern corresponding to the attachment of the separate third illumination cover 610 in response to (synchronization with) the variable pattern presentation. For example, if the detection signal received from the separate cover detection sensor 641 is an OFF signal, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines that the third illumination cover 609 is attached, and edits the lamp lighting pattern for when all LEDs 612 on the light-emitting board 611 corresponding to the first light-emitting area 605 are set as light-emitting targets. In addition, if the detection signal received from the separate cover detection sensor 641 is an ON signal, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines that the separate third illumination cover 650 is attached, and edits the lamp lighting pattern for when the LEDs 612 in the center of the light-emitting board 611 corresponding to the second light-emitting area 606A are set as light-emitting targets. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the selected LED 612 to light up in the edited lamp lighting pattern in response to the variable pattern presentation. This reduces unnecessary power consumption caused by continuing to light up unnecessary parts even after the separate third illumination cover 650 is attached.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 26, the control mechanism 608 is equipped with a separate cover detection sensor 641 that detects when the separate third illuminated cover 610 has been attached to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illuminated cover 609, and means for changing the irradiation area, light emission intensity, and light emission color of the light irradiation device 607 based on the detection of the separate cover detection sensor 641. This allows the light emission area to be suitably changed even when the irradiation area, light emission intensity, and light emission color are changed by detecting whether the separate third illuminated cover 650 has been attached to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illuminated cover 609.

In the above-described Examples 23 to 26, the illumination unit (third illumination unit 303) that controls the light mode was provided in the glass frame unit 23, but in this example, the illumination unit that controls the light mode is disposed on the game board 30, which is different from the above-described Examples 23 to 26. The pachinko machine 10 of Example 27 is equipped with, for example, a movable illumination unit 703 as the illumination unit disposed on the game board 30. The movable illumination unit 703 is configured so that when the movable illumination unit 703 operates, the decorative effect can be optimized at the position before and after that operation. The specific configuration is described below.

Figure 104 is a front view of the gaming board of Example 27. Figure 105 is a cross-sectional view II of the gaming board shown in Figure 104, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illumination unit. Figure 106 is a front view of the gaming board with the movable illumination unit protruding. Figure 107 is a cross-sectional view JJ of the gaming board shown in Figure 106, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illumination unit.

The movable illumination unit 703 consists of a component that moves passively within the center frame 47A and a component that moves actively within the center frame 47A.

Specifically, the movable illumination unit 703 has, as its passively moving components, a light irradiation device 707 that emits light and a control mechanism 708 that controls the manner of light emitted from the light irradiation device 707, and, as its actively moving components, a movable illumination unit cover 709 that covers the front side of the movable illumination unit 703 and a drive mechanism 710 that operates the movable illumination unit cover 709.

The movable illumination cover 709 is made of a light-transmitting resin. In the illustration, the movable illumination cover 709 is flat, but it may also be a three-dimensional model that resembles a specific person, animal, or tool. The movable illumination cover 709 receives light from the back side and emits light on the front side to highlight the person, animal, or tool.

The movable illumination unit cover 709 is made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin. The movable illumination unit cover 709 may be colorless or colored, and may have a frosted surface treatment. The movable illumination unit cover 709 may be equipped with a diffusion member (diffusion plate) with irregularities to diffuse the light from the light irradiation device 707 located behind it, or the inner surface of the movable illumination unit cover 709 may have irregularities to diffuse the light from the light irradiation device 707. This allows the movable illumination unit cover 709 to make the light irradiation device 707 less visible to the player.

The drive mechanism 710 is a displacement mechanism that displaces a predetermined surface (e.g., the front surface) of the movable illumination unit cover 709, which is illuminated by light emitted from the light irradiation device 707. Specifically, the drive mechanism 710 may be a solenoid, a mechanism that converts the rotational motion of a motor into linear motion using a ball screw, or any other mechanism, as long as it moves the front surface of the movable illumination unit cover 709 in a linear direction.

When viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the front surface of the movable illumination unit cover 709 is located behind the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A (i.e., the first position) when the drive mechanism 710 is not in operation, and is moved to a position exposed from the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A (i.e., the second position) when the drive mechanism 710 is in operation. The right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A is also formed of a transparent resin, just like the movable illumination unit 703. The right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A and the movable illumination unit cover 709 may be shaped to form a single illumination device. For example, such an illumination device may be hidden behind the right edge of the center frame 47A when not in operation, but may be operated to appear from behind the right edge of the center frame 47A emitting strong light when in operation. This allows the movable illumination unit 703 to appear as an illuminated decoration that creates different impressions depending on the intensity of the light emitted when in operation and when not in operation.

In the above-described configuration, the front surface of the movable illumination unit cover 709 (or the movable illumination unit cover 709 and the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A) located behind the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A (first position) is designated as the first light-emitting area 705, and the front surface of the movable illumination unit cover 709 located in a position exposed from the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A (second position) is designated as the second light-emitting area 706.

The right edge of the opening in the center frame 47A may be formed from a non-light-transmitting resin. In this case, the movable illumination unit cover 709 may be operated so that it is positioned in a location that is invisible or difficult to see for the player when inactive, and in a location that is easily visible for the player when active. This also allows the movable illumination unit 703 to display illumination decorations that emit different amounts of light when inactive and when active.

When the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 is moved to a first position by the drive mechanism 710, the control mechanism 708 executes a first control to cause the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 to illuminate the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 located at the first position as a first light-emitting area 705, and when the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 is moved to a second position by the drive mechanism 710, the control mechanism 708 executes a second control to cause the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 to illuminate the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 located at the second position as a second light-emitting area 706.

This makes it easy to shift the light-emitting location, whether the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 causes the first light-emitting region 705 to emit light or the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 causes the second light-emitting region 706 to emit light, and by optimizing the light irradiation direction in accordance with the shift in the light-emitting location, the light-emitting region can be suitably changed.

Next, we will explain in detail how the control mechanism 708 controls the light behavior.

The light irradiation device 707 includes a light-emitting substrate 711 on which an LED 712 is mounted, and a substrate support portion 713 that supports the light-emitting substrate 711. The substrate support portion 713 supports the light-emitting substrate 711 so that it can rotate, with one end fixed to the center frame 47A.

The light irradiation device 707 is configured so that the light-emitting substrate 711 can be rotated by the substrate support part 713. The control mechanism 708 controls the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 from a first mode to a second mode by rotating the light-emitting substrate 711. This makes it easy to adjust the irradiation angle.

The control mechanism 708 changes the light irradiation device 707 from a state in which the first control can be performed to a state in which the second control can be performed by moving the movable illumination unit 703 from a position on the back side of the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A (first position) to a position in which the movable illumination unit 703 is exposed from the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A (second position). This allows the light-emitting area to be suitably changed by moving the movable illumination unit 703 to the second position.

The control mechanism 708 includes an input unit 714 that inputs the force generated by the action of moving the movable illumination unit 703 to the second position, and an output unit 715 that changes the state of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 based on the input force. This makes it possible to suitably change the light-emitting area by utilizing the force generated by the action of moving the movable illumination unit 703 to the second position.

The input unit 714 is a mechanism that causes the movable illumination unit cover 709 to push (i.e., rotate) the light irradiation device 707 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position when the movable illumination unit 703 moves to the second position. Specifically, the input unit 714 includes a push-in portion 716 provided on the movable illumination unit cover 709 and a push-in receiving portion 717 provided on the light irradiation device 707.

The push-in portion 716 is disposed on the upper surface of the movable illumination unit cover 709 and protrudes from the rear side of the movable illumination unit cover 709. The push-in portion 716 is formed so that, during the process of moving the movable illumination unit cover 709 to the second position, it comes into contact with a push-in receiving portion 717 disposed on the upper surface of the board support portion 713, causing the board support portion 713 to rotate toward the second rotation position. For example, the push-in receiving portion 717 includes a rotating body (roller), and the push-in portion 716 includes an inclined surface that rolls the rotating body in accordance with the rotation of the board support portion 713. This allows the light-emitting area to be suitably changed by utilizing the force of the movable illumination unit cover 709 pushing the light irradiation device 707 (i.e., rotating it to the second rotation position) when the movable illumination unit 703 moves to the second position.

The output unit 715 is a mechanism that rotates the light-emitting substrate 711 by rotating the light-emitting device 707 based on the force input from the input unit 714, thereby changing the form of light emitted from the light-emitting device 707. Specifically, the output unit 715 is composed of a substrate support unit 713, an axis 718, a coil spring 719 attached to the axis 718, and an attitude restriction unit 721 that restricts the attitude of the substrate support unit 713. This makes it possible to easily adjust the irradiation angle by utilizing the force generated by the movement of the movable illumination unit 703 to the second position.

The input section 714 (push-in section 716 and push-in receiving section 717) are disposed on the upper surfaces of the movable illumination section cover 709 and the board support section 713, respectively, and the output section 715 is disposed around the axis 718 of the board support section 713. Neither section overlaps the front of the light-emitting section mounting surface of the light irradiation device 707, so the light-emitting area can be suitably changed without obstructing the light-emitting section mounting surface.

Axis 718 connects board support portion 713 to center frame 47A so that board support portion 713 can rotate. Coil spring 719, attached to axis 718, generates a biasing force on board support portion 713. In the process of moving movable illumination unit cover 709 to the second position, coil spring 719 increases its biasing force as push-in portion 716 contacts push-in receiving portion 717 and board support portion 713 rotates toward the second pivot position, reaching its greatest biasing force at the position where push-in portion 716 stops pushing. When movable illumination unit cover 709 returns from the second position to the first position, this biasing force causes board support portion 713 to return from the second pivot position to its original first pivot position.

The position restriction portion 721 is a stopper provided on the board support portion 713. When the movable illumination portion 703 is positioned on the back surface of the right edge of the opening in the center frame 47A, the biasing force of the coil spring 719 restricts the position of the board support portion 713 so that it faces the movable illumination portion 703 head-on.

This allows the light-emitting area to be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated by the movable illumination unit 703 moving to the second position. The light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force with which the movable illumination unit cover 709 presses the light irradiation device 707 when the movable illumination unit 703 moves to the second position. The irradiation angle can be easily adjusted by utilizing the force generated by the movable illumination unit 703 moving to the second position.

Next, we will explain how to operate the movable illumination unit 703. The movable illumination unit 703 can be operated by pressing a frame button 80 (e.g., the OK button 81) in response to an operation request image displayed on the third pattern display device 42, requesting operation of the frame button 80. The operation request image is displayed, for example, when the third pattern display device 42 is displaying a customer waiting display (standby display). The displayed content of the operation request image is, for example, an image such as "Make character A stand out? (If you want to make it stand out, press the frame button.)" Here, character A is a decoration representing a character applied to the movable illumination unit 703. When the frame button 80 is pressed in response to the operation request image, the movable illumination unit 703, which resembles character A, is moved from a less noticeable position (first position) on the back side of the right edge of the opening in the center frame 47A to a more noticeable position (second position) exposed from the right edge of the opening in the center frame 47A.

This allows the illuminated area to be appropriately changed in response to the movement of the movable illumination unit 703 based on the player's operation, making it easier to create decorations on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 body that suit the player's preferences.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of Example 27 is equipped with a movable illumination unit 703 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 body, and a light irradiation device 707 that irradiates light toward the back side of the movable illumination unit 703. The pachinko machine 10 is capable of shifting the front side of the movable illumination unit 703, which receives light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707, to different positions, and therefore the impression of the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed depending on the change in the position of the front side of the movable illumination unit 703. The control mechanism 708 executes a first control when the front of the movable illumination unit 703 is in a first position, causing the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 to illuminate the front of the movable illumination unit 703 in the first position as a first light-emitting area 705, and executes a second control when the front of the movable illumination unit 703 is in a second position, causing the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 to illuminate the front of the movable illumination unit 703 in the second position as a second light-emitting area 706. By optimizing the light irradiation direction in accordance with the movement of the front of the movable illumination unit 703, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H1) above.

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of Example 27 is equipped with a movable illumination unit 703 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 body, and a light irradiation device 707 that irradiates light onto the movable illumination unit 703. The pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a drive mechanism 710 that can move a predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703, which is illuminated by light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707, between a first position and a second position. Therefore, the light-emitting location of the movable illumination unit 703 is not uniform, and the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 can be easily moved. The pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a control mechanism 708 that, when the predetermined surface is moved to a first position by the drive mechanism 710, executes a first control to cause the predetermined surface located at the first position to emit light as a first light-emitting area 705 using light emitted from the light-emitting device 707, and, when the predetermined surface is moved to a second position by the drive mechanism 710, executes a second control to cause the predetermined surface located at the second position to emit light as a second light-emitting area 706 using light emitted from the light-emitting device 707. This facilitates the shifting of the light-emitting location, and by optimizing the light irradiation direction in accordance with the shifting of the light-emitting location, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I1) above.

The pachinko machine 10 main body comprises an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 main body, an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be able to open and close relative to the outer frame 11 with one side of the outer frame 11 as an opening and closing axis, and a front frame set 14 that is attached so as to be able to open and close relative to the inner frame 12 with one side of the inner frame 12 as an opening and closing axis. The inner frame 12 comprises a resin base 12a that forms its outer shape, and a game board 30 that is attached to the resin base 12a and has a game area 30a through which game balls flow down. The game board 30 is The pachinko machine 10 includes a third symbol display device 42 having a display screen 42a that displays the display effects during a jackpot game state that occur when the variable display of the third symbol results in a jackpot, and an opening that makes the display screen 42a visible. The front frame set 14 includes a glass frame portion 23 with a glass plate 137 attached to the back side that makes the game area 30a and display screen 42a visible when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The movable illumination unit 703 is visible from the front side of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 main body. This facilitates the shifting of the light-emitting area on the front side of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 main body, and by optimizing the light irradiation direction in accordance with the shifting of the light-emitting area, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I2) above.

In addition, the movable illumination unit 703 is attached behind the glass plate 137 of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 body and is visible through the glass plate 137, making it easy to shift the light-emitting point behind the glass plate 137 of the pachinko machine 10 body, and by optimizing the light irradiation direction in accordance with the shifting of the light-emitting point behind the glass plate 137, it is possible to suitably change the light-emitting area behind the glass plate 137. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I4) above.

In addition, since the movable illumination unit 703 is located on the right side of the play area 30a of the game board 30, the illuminated area can be appropriately changed even on the right side of the play area 30a of the game board 30. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I5) above.

In addition, since the movable illumination unit 703 is located on the right side of the opening of the gaming board 30, the illuminated area can be appropriately changed even on the right side of the opening of the gaming board 30. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I6) above.

The light irradiation device 707 also includes a light-emitting substrate 711 and a drive mechanism 710 that changes the position of the light-emitting substrate 711 relative to a predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703, allowing the light-emitting area to be appropriately changed at each position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I7) above.

Furthermore, the first control sets the illumination angle of light emitted from the light-emitting device 707 onto the first light-emitting area 705 to a first illumination angle, and the second control sets the illumination angle of light emitted from the light-emitting device 707 onto the second light-emitting area 706 to a second illumination angle different from the first illumination angle. This allows the light-emitting area to be suitably changed by changing the illumination angle in a configuration in which the movable illumination unit 703 operates. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I8) above.

In addition, the device is equipped with a frame button 80 (e.g., a decision button 81) that is operated by the player, and the movable illumination unit 703 operates in response to the operation of the frame button 80. Therefore, even when the movable illumination unit 703 operates in response to the operation of the frame button 80, the illuminated area can be appropriately changed at each position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I9) above.

In addition, the movable illumination unit 703 operates in response to the operation of the frame button 80 while the display effect is being displayed on the third pattern display device 42. Therefore, even when the movable illumination unit 703 operates while the display effect is being displayed on the third pattern display device 42, the light-emitting area can be appropriately changed at each position in response to the operation. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I11) above.

In addition, the light irradiation device 707 rotates in response to the operation of the movable illumination unit 703. Therefore, depending on the operation of the movable illumination unit 703, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted by rotating the light irradiation device 707, whether the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 illuminates the first light-emitting area 705 or the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 illuminates the second light-emitting area. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I12) above.

Furthermore, the control mechanism 708 changes the light irradiation device 707 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed as the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 transitions from the first position to the second position, thereby enabling the light-emitting area to be suitably changed as the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 transitions from the first position to the second position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I13) above.

The control mechanism 708 also includes an input unit 714 that inputs the force generated when a predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 transitions from a first position to a second position, and an output unit 715 that changes the light irradiation device 707 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed based on the input force. Therefore, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated when the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 transitions from the first position to the second position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I14) above.

In addition, the input unit 714 is a push-in unit 716 and a push-in receiving unit 717 that apply a force to rotate the light-emitting device 707 as the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 transitions from the first position to the second position. Therefore, the force applied to the light-emitting device 707 as the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 transitions from the first position to the second position can be used to suitably change the light-emitting area. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I15) above.

Furthermore, the output unit 715 rotates the light irradiation device 707 based on the input force, thereby changing the light irradiation device 707 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed. Therefore, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted using the force input during the process in which the specified surface of the movable illumination unit 703 moves from the first position to the second position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described above in (I16).

Furthermore, the movable illumination unit 703 is made of a transparent resin material and is configured to make the control mechanism 708 difficult to see. Although the movable illumination unit 703 is made of a transparent resin material, it is configured to make the control mechanism 708 difficult to see, so the control mechanism 708 does not stand out. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J4) above.

In addition, the control mechanism 708 is positioned so as not to overlap the front of the light-emitting unit mounting surface of the light irradiation device 707, so the light-emitting area can be suitably changed without blocking the light-emitting unit mounting surface. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J5) above.

Furthermore, when the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 is shifted left or right as viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the input unit 714 is located on the upper surface (top) of the light irradiation device 707, making it less likely to block the light-emitting area that shifts left and right, allowing the light-emitting area to be changed appropriately. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J7) above.

In the above-described Example 27, the control mechanism 708 changes the mode of light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 by tilting the light irradiation device 707. However, as in Example 24, a configuration may be adopted in which the mode of light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 is changed while the light irradiation device 707 remains fixed.

Figure 108 shows the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illumination unit in Example 28.

In this embodiment, the light irradiation device 707 is fixed to the front side of the variable display unit 35, which is attached to the back side of the game board 30 on the back side of the center frame 47A, and includes a light-transmitting section 730 that transmits light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 to the first light-emitting area 705 or the second light-emitting area 706. The light-transmitting section 730 includes a light-transmitting plate 731 that transmits light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 and outputs it to the front side, a light-transmitting plate support section 732 that supports the light-transmitting plate 731, and a control mechanism 708 similar to that of Example 27.

The configuration of the light-transmitting plate support portion 432 is the same as the configuration of the substrate support portion 713 that tilts the light-emitting substrate 711 in Example 23. In other words, when the movable illumination unit cover 709 is located in the first position, the control mechanism 708 causes the light-transmitting plate support portion 732 to remain in a position corresponding to the back surface of the right side of the opening in the center frame 47A, transmitting light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 and outputting it to the front side where the first light-emitting area 705 is located. However, when the movable illumination unit cover 709 is moved to the second position, the light-transmitting plate support portion 732 is oriented toward the part exposed from the right side of the opening in the center frame 47A, refracting and transmitting light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707 in the diagonal direction where the second light-emitting area 706 is located.

This makes it possible to easily adjust the irradiation angle and suitably change the light-emitting area, not only when the light irradiation device 707 is rotatable, but also when the light-transmitting section 730 is rotatable.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of Example 28, the light irradiation device 707 is fixed to the variable display unit 35 and includes a light-transmitting portion 730 that transmits light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 to the first light-emitting area 705 or the second light-emitting area 706, and the light-transmitting portion 730 is rotatable. This makes it possible to easily adjust the irradiation angle not only when the light irradiation device 707 is rotatable, but also when the light-transmitting portion 730 is rotatable. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H8) above.

In the above-described Examples 27 and 28, the input unit 714 and output unit 715 of the control mechanism 708 rotate the light irradiation device 707 by the force with which the pusher unit 716 pushes the light irradiation device 707, but the input unit 714 and output unit 715 of the control mechanism 708 may have a different configuration. Specific configurations are described below.

Figure 109 is a front view of the gaming board of Example 29. Figure 110 is a K-K cross-sectional view of the gaming board shown in Figure 109, illustrating the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illumination unit. Figure 111 is a K-K cross-sectional view of the gaming board shown in Figure 109, illustrating the adjustment of the light-emitting area when the movable illumination unit is protruding.

The control mechanism 708 includes a displacement detection sensor 741 that detects when the movable illumination unit 703 moves from a position on the back side of the right edge of the opening in the center frame 47A (first position) to a position where the movable illumination unit 703 is exposed from the right edge of the opening in the center frame 47A (second position), and a rotation motor 742 that changes the mode of light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 based on the detection of the displacement detection sensor 741. This allows the light-emitting area to be appropriately changed by detecting that the movable illumination unit 703 has moved from the first position to the second position.

When viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the displacement detection sensor 741 is attached to the upper back side of the right edge of the opening in the center frame 47A. The displacement detection sensor 741 is, for example, a limit switch. When the movable illumination unit 703 (movable illumination unit cover 709) is in the first position, the hinge is not pushed in (the switch is not pressed), so the displacement detection sensor 741 detects that the movable illumination unit 703 has not moved to the second position. When the movable illumination unit 703 moves to the second position, the hinge is pushed into the movable illumination unit 703 in the process, pressing the switch, and detecting that the movable illumination unit 703 has moved to the second position. Note that the configuration of the displacement detection sensor 741 is not limited to the above configuration and may be, for example, a non-contact sensor.

When the movable illumination unit 703 moves from the second position to the first position, the displacement detection sensor 741 detects that the movable illumination unit 703 has moved to the first position because the hinge separates from the switch as the movable illumination unit 703 returns to the first position. This allows the light-emitting area to be appropriately changed by detecting that the movable illumination unit 703 has moved from the second position to the first position.

The displacement detection sensor 741 and the rotation motor 742 are electrically connected to the sub-controller 262. When the displacement detection sensor 741 detects that the movable illumination unit 703 has moved from the first position to the second position, the sub-controller 262 rotates the rotation motor 742 to a predetermined angle, thereby rotating the substrate support unit 713 so that the light irradiation device 707 changes from a position facing forward at the first position to a position facing the second position. When the displacement detection sensor 741 detects that the movable illumination unit 703 has moved from the second position to the first position, the sub-controller 262 reversely rotates the rotation motor 742 to a predetermined angle, thereby reversely rotating the substrate support unit 713 so that the light irradiation device 707 changes from a position facing forward at the second position to a position facing forward at the first position. The rotation motor 742 may be controlled by detecting the rotation angle using a potentiometer or encoder, or by applying a pulse voltage equivalent to the predetermined rotation angle using a stepping motor.

The movable illumination unit cover 709 and the hinge of the displacement detection sensor 741 that contacts it correspond to the input unit 714 in the above-mentioned embodiment. Furthermore, the rotation motor 742 corresponds to the output unit 715 in the above-mentioned embodiment.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of Example 29 includes a movable illumination unit 703 (e.g., movable illumination unit 703) disposed on the front side of the main body of the pachinko machine 10, and a light irradiation device 707 that irradiates light onto the movable illumination unit 703. The pachinko machine 10 is capable of shifting a predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703, which is illuminated by light irradiated from the light irradiation device 707, between a first position and a second position, thereby enabling the impression of the front side of the pachinko machine 10 to be changed according to changes in the position of the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703. The pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a displacement detection sensor 741 that can detect shifts in the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703, and therefore is able to recognize the shifts in the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703. The pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a control mechanism 708 that, when it detects that the predetermined surface has shifted to a first position, executes a first control to illuminate the predetermined surface located at the first position as a first light-emitting area 705 with light emitted from a light-emitting device 707, and, when it detects that the predetermined surface has shifted to a second position, executes a second control to illuminate the predetermined surface located at the second position as a second light-emitting area 706 with light emitted from the light-emitting device 707. Therefore, by recognizing the shift in the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 and optimizing the light irradiation direction in accordance with the shift in the predetermined surface, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J1) above.

The control mechanism 708 also includes an input unit 714 that receives input of the force generated when the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 transitions from the first position to the second position; a contact-type displacement detection sensor 741 that can detect the transition of the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 from the first position to the second position based on the input force; and an output unit 715 that changes the light irradiation device 707 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed when the transition of the predetermined surface from the first position to the second position is detected. Therefore, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated when the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 transitions from the first position to the second position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J2) above.

In addition, the input unit 714 is a hinge for the movable illumination unit cover 709 and displacement detection sensor 741, which accepts the force generated when a predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 transitions from the first position to the second position and pushes in the contact-type displacement detection sensor 741. Therefore, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed by accepting the force generated when a predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 transitions from the first position to the second position and using the force that pushes in the contact-type displacement detection sensor 741. This is also an example of the gaming machine described above in (J3).

In the above-described Examples 27 to 29, the output 715 of the control mechanism 708 adjusted the irradiation angle of the light irradiation device 707, but it may also adjust a different element related to the irradiation of the light irradiation device 707. This is explained in detail below.

Figure 112 is a front view of the gaming board of Example 30. Figure 113 is an LL cross-sectional view of the gaming board shown in Figure 112, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illumination unit. Figure 114 is a front view of the gaming board with the movable illumination unit protruding. Figure 115 is an MM cross-sectional view of the gaming board shown in Figure 114, showing the adjustment of the light-emitting area of the movable illumination unit.

The movable illumination unit 750 in this embodiment is a light guide plate that has been processed to illuminate a specified pattern or letter on a transparent resin acrylic panel, and a light guide plate light-emitting portion 753 is provided on the side of the light guide plate. The light-emitting area of the movable illumination unit 750 comprises a partial light-emitting area 751, where a portion of it emits light, and a non-light-emitting area 752, where the remaining portion does not emit light. The light-emitting area of the movable illumination unit 750 is divided into, for example, six sections, each configured to emit letters ("ge," "ki," "a," "tsu," "i," and "!"). The light guide plate light-emitting portion 753 is also divided into six sections accordingly, and is controlled so that some of it emits light as partial light-emitting portions 754, and the remaining portion does not emit light as non-light-emitting portions 755.

The control mechanism 708 includes a displacement detection sensor 741 and a mechanism that changes the illumination area of the light illumination device 707 based on the detection of the displacement detection sensor 741. Specifically, when the displacement detection sensor 741 detects that the movable illumination unit 750 is located in the first position, the control mechanism 708 causes the light guide plate light emitting unit 753 to become the non-light emitting unit 755, which does not illuminate any of the six characters.

In addition, when the displacement detection sensor 741 detects that the movable illumination unit 750 is in the second position, the control mechanism 708 causes the light guide plate light emitting unit 753 to illuminate areas corresponding to four characters ("a", "tsu", "i", "!") and five characters ("ge", "ki", "a", "tsu", "!") as partial light emitting units 754 in accordance with the player's operation, and causes the characters other than the illuminated areas to become non-light emitting units 755.

This allows the light-emitting area to be appropriately changed even when the illumination area is changed by detecting whether the movable illumination unit 750 has moved to the second position. The object of change is not limited to the illumination area, but may also be the light-emitting intensity or light color. The difference in the illumination effect between the first and second positions can also represent the difference in the likelihood of a jackpot lottery result.

Next, we will explain how to drive the movable illumination unit 703. The movable illumination unit 703 can be driven by pressing a frame button 80 (e.g., the decision button 81, the left selection button 82, or the right selection button 83) in response to an operation request image requesting operation of the frame button 80 displayed on the third pattern display device 42. The operation request image is displayed, for example, during a display effect related to the variable display of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 42. The display content of the operation request image is an image with options prompting the player to predict the outcome of the variable display during a specified reach effect, such as "Is this reach hot or very hot?". Other options may also be options that ask the player's preference, such as "Which is your favorite character, A or B?" When the player presses the right selection button 83 to select "super hot" in response to the operation request image and presses the decision button 81 to confirm, the movable illumination unit 750 transitions from the first position to the second position, and when it is detected that the movable illumination unit 750 is located at the second position, the light guide plate light emitting unit 753 illuminates the areas corresponding to the five characters ("ge," "ki," "a," "tsu," and "!") as partial light emitting units 754, and sets the characters other than the illuminated areas to non-light emitting units 755. When the player presses the left selection button 82 to select "atsui" in response to the operation request image and presses the decision button 81 to confirm, the movable illumination unit 750 transitions from the first position to the second position, and when it is detected that the movable illumination unit 750 is located at the second position, the light guide plate light emitting unit 753 illuminates the areas corresponding to the four characters ("a," "tsu," "i," and "!") as partial light emitting units 754, and sets the characters other than the illuminated areas to non-light emitting units 755.

This allows the illumination area to be appropriately changed in response to the movement of the movable illumination unit 703 based on the player's operation, making it easier to create decorations on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 body that suit the player's preferences.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment 30, the control mechanism 708 is equipped with a displacement detection sensor 741 that detects when the movable illumination unit 750 has moved to the second position, and a mechanism that changes the illumination area of the light irradiation device 707 based on the detection of the displacement detection sensor 741. This makes it possible to suitably change the light-emitting area even when the illumination area is changed by detecting whether the movable illumination unit 750 has moved to the second position.

In the above-described Examples 23 to 26, the third illumination unit 303 and the separate third illumination unit 604 are configured to be attached and detached in the front-to-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, but they may also be configured to be attached and detached in a diagonal direction of the pachinko machine 10. The following explanation will be given with reference to Figure 116.

Figures 116(a) and (b) are diagrams explaining the installation direction of the illumination cover 609 and the separate illumination cover 610 of Example 31.

When viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the illumination cover 609 and separate illumination cover 610 of this embodiment have roughly the same shape as the illumination cover 609 and separate illumination cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26. However, the attachment and removal structure of the illumination cover 609 and separate illumination cover 610 of this embodiment differs from that of the illumination cover 609 and separate illumination cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26.

The third decorative illumination section 603 and the separate third decorative illumination section 604 are attached by a slide mechanism 602 that slides the third decorative illumination cover 609 and the separate third decorative illumination cover 610 diagonally. The slide mechanism 602 is composed of a slide groove 603 formed on the main body of the pachinko machine 10 that slopes upward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, and portions formed on the third decorative illumination cover 609 and the separate third decorative illumination cover 610 that fit into this slide groove 603. Note that the shapes of the various parts that make up the slide mechanism 602 have been omitted from the illustration.

The illumination cover 609 and separate illumination cover 610 of this embodiment also differ in the structure of the control mechanism 608 from the illumination cover 609 and separate illumination cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26. That is, while the input portion 614 is the same as the illumination cover 609 and separate illumination cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26, the installation location and shape of the pressing portion 616 and the pressing portion 617 are different.

The protrusion of the push-in portion 616 is disposed on the inner surface of the top surface that is inclined diagonally toward the tip end of the separate illumination cover 610 in the insertion direction. The shape of the protrusion of the push-in portion 616 may be a small piece, or a flat plate extending laterally from the pachinko machine 10. The push-in receiving portion 617 differs significantly from Examples 23 to 26 in that it extends from the back surface of the light irradiation device 607 to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. The shape of the push-in receiving portion 617 only needs to correspond to the shape of the push-in portion 616, and may be rod-shaped or flat.

When attaching the third illumination unit 303 to the glass frame 23, the peripheral wall of the opening of the third illumination cover 609 is guided by the diagonally formed slide mechanism 602 and is attached between the sound output units 24. Because the third illumination cover 609 does not have a push-in portion 616, the light irradiation device 607 remains in a vertical position, forming the first light-emitting area 605. When attaching the separate third illumination unit 604 to the glass frame 23, the base of the periphery of the opening side of the separate third illumination cover 610 is guided by the diagonally formed slide mechanism 602 and is attached between the sound output units 24. Because the separate third illumination cover 610 has a push-in portion 616, it comes into contact with the push-in receiving portion 617 on the back of the light irradiation device 607, tilting the light irradiation device 607 toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and forming the second light-emitting area 606 above the first light-emitting area 605.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of Example 31 is equipped with a third illumination unit 303 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 body, and a light irradiation device 607 that irradiates light toward the back side of the third illumination unit 303. The pachinko machine 10 is capable of shifting the front side of the third illumination unit 303, which receives light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607, to different positions, so that the impression of the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed depending on the change in the position of the front side of the third illumination unit 303. The control mechanism 608 executes a first control when the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 is in the first position, causing the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 to illuminate the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 located in the first position as a first light-emitting area 605, and executes a second control when the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 is in the second position, causing the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 to illuminate the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 located in the second position as a second light-emitting area 606. By optimizing the light irradiation direction in accordance with the changes in the front surface of the third illumination unit 303, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H1) above.

Furthermore, when the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 is shifted vertically when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the input unit 614 is located on either the left or right side of the light irradiation device 607, making it less likely to block the light-emitting area that shifts vertically, allowing the light-emitting area to be changed appropriately. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J6) above.

Furthermore, when the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 is shifted diagonally, sloping upward as it approaches the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, the input unit 614 is located on the rear side of the light irradiation device 607, in a position that can input the force generated as the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 shifts diagonally. Therefore, the input unit 614 does not interfere with the shift of the third illumination unit 303, and can suitably change the light-emitting area without blocking the shifting light-emitting area. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J9) above.

In the above-described Examples 23 to 26, the light-emitting area is changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of replacing the third decorative illumination unit 303 with another third decorative illumination unit 604. However, it is also possible to change the light-emitting area of the third decorative illumination unit 303 while keeping it as is. This is explained below with reference to Figure 117.

Figures 117(a) and (b) are diagrams illustrating the state before and after the change in the light-emitting area of the illumination cover 609 in Example 32. The front view of the pachinko machine 10 in this example is the same as Figure 1, so please refer to Figure 1. Note that the third illumination section 303 in Figure 1 corresponds to the third illumination cover 609 before the movable illumination section 305 shown in Figure 117(a) changes in this example, and the other third illumination section 604 in Figure 1 corresponds to the third illumination cover 609 after the movable illumination section 305 changes in this example, as shown in Figure 117(b).

When viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the third illumination unit 303 of this embodiment has roughly the same shape as the third illumination unit 303 of Examples 23 to 26. However, the third illumination unit 303 of this embodiment differs from the third illumination unit 303 of Examples 23 to 26 in that it is configured as a movable illumination unit 305 that can operate part of the illumination without requiring replacement with a separate third illumination unit 604.

The third decorative illumination unit 303 (movable decorative illumination unit 305) has a third decorative illumination cover 609 divided into a tip end 658 and a base end 659, and is equipped with a sliding drive mechanism 660 that allows the tip end 658 to extend and retract diagonally from the base end 659. As with Example 31, the sliding mechanism has a slide groove 603 formed in the base end 659 of the third decorative illumination cover 609, which slopes upward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. The tip end 658 of the third decorative illumination cover 609 has a portion formed to fit into this slide groove 603, and the tip end 658 of the third decorative illumination unit 303 is attached to the base end 659 of the third decorative illumination unit 303.

The drive mechanism 660 includes a rack 661 formed at the tip 658 of the third illuminated cover 609, and a pinion (circular gear) 662 formed at the base end 659 of the third illuminated cover 609. A motor 663 fixed to a predetermined location on the base end 659 is connected to this pinion 662. By driving the motor 663, the tip 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 is configured to protrude and retract. The position when the tip 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 protrudes to the uppermost position is referred to as the second position, and the position when the tip 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 is retracted to the lowermost position is referred to as the first position.

The illumination cover 609 of this embodiment also differs in the structure of the control mechanism 608 from the illumination cover 609 and separate illumination cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26. That is, while the input portion 614 is the same as the illumination cover 609 and the separate illumination cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26, the structures of the input portion 614 and the separate illumination cover 610 are different.

The push-in portion 616 is composed of a protrusion (shaft) 664 protruding from the inner surface of the tip portion 658 of the third illumination cover 609 (the inner surface of the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10), and a slide member (slider) 665 with one end rotatably fitted to this shaft 664. A long hole 666 is formed on the other end of the slider 665, and a protrusion (shaft) 667 protruding from the left side of the light irradiation device 607 is slidably connected to this long hole 666. The push-in receiving portion 617 corresponds to the shaft 667 protruding from the left side of this light irradiation device 607.

To protrude the tip 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 to the second position, the motor 663 is rotated in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise on the page if the motor 663 is connected coaxially with the pinion 662), and as the tip 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 rises to the second position, the slider 665 pushes the light irradiation device 607, tilting the light irradiation device 607 toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and a second light-emitting area 606 is formed in front of the tip 658 and base end 659. To retract the tip 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 to the first position, the motor 663 is rotated in the opposite direction (for example, clockwise on the page), and as the tip 659 of the third illuminated cover 609 descends to the first position, the slider 665 lifts the light irradiation device 607, causing the light irradiation device 607 to stand up at the front of the pachinko machine 10, and a first light-emitting area 605 is formed in front of the tip 658 (which is also the front of the base end 659 overlapping at the front).

The control mechanism 608 is equipped with a displacement detection sensor 668 that detects when the tip 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 moves from the first position to the second position. The displacement detection sensor 668 may be a limit switch that detects whether the tip 658 is in the first or second position, or a potentiometer or encoder that detects the rotation angle of the motor 663 when the tip 658 is in the first or second position. This allows the light-emitting area to be appropriately changed by detecting when the tip 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 moves from the first position to the second position, and when it moves from the second position to the first position.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of Example 32 is equipped with a third illumination unit 303 (a movable illumination unit 305 with a split drive type, consisting of a tip end 658 and a base end 659) disposed on the front side of the main body of the pachinko machine 10, and a light irradiation device 607 that irradiates light onto the third illumination unit 303. The pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a drive mechanism 660 that can move the front surface of the tip end 658 of the third illumination unit 303, which is illuminated by light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607, between a first position and a second position. Therefore, the light-emitting portion of the third illumination unit 303 is not uniform, and the light-emitting portion of the third illumination unit 303 can be easily moved. The gaming machine includes a control mechanism 608 that, when the front surface of the tip portion 658 is moved to a first position by the drive mechanism 660, executes a first control to cause the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 to illuminate the front surface of the tip portion 658 located at the first position as a first light-emitting region 605, and when the front surface of the tip portion 658 is moved to a second position by the drive mechanism 660, executes a second control to cause the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 to illuminate the front surfaces of the tip portion 658 and base end portion 659 located at the second position as a second light-emitting region 606. This facilitates the shifting of the light-emitting location and optimizes the light irradiation direction in accordance with the shifting of the light-emitting location, thereby enabling the light-emitting region to be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I1) above.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of Example 32 includes a third illumination unit 303 (a movable illumination unit 305 with a split drive type, consisting of a tip end 658 and a base end 659) disposed on the front side of the main body of the pachinko machine 10, and a light irradiation device 607 that irradiates light onto the third illumination unit 303. The pachinko machine 10 is capable of shifting the front surface of the tip end 658 of the third illumination unit 303, which is illuminated by light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607, between a first position and a second position, thereby enabling the impression of the front side of the gaming machine to be changed according to changes in the position of the front surface of the tip end 658 of the third illumination unit 303. The pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a displacement detection sensor 668 that can detect shifts in the front surface of the tip end 658 of the third illumination unit 303, and therefore is able to recognize shifts in the front surface of the tip end 658 of the third illumination unit 303. The pachinko machine 10 includes a control mechanism 608 that, when it detects that the front surface of the tip portion 658 has shifted to a first position, executes a first control to illuminate the front surface of the tip portion 658 at the first position as a first light-emitting area 605 with light emitted from the light-emitting device 607, and, when the front surface of the tip portion 658 has shifted to a second position, executes a second control to illuminate the front surfaces of the tip portion 658 and base end portion 659 at the second position with light emitted from the light-emitting device 607 as a second light-emitting area 606. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can recognize the shift in the front surface of the tip portion 658 of the third illumination unit 303 and optimize the light irradiation direction in accordance with the shift in the front surface of the tip portion 658, thereby suitably changing the light-emitting area. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J1) above.

In the above-described Examples 23 to 26, the light-emitting area is changed in the process of replacing the third decorative illumination unit 303 with the separate third decorative illumination unit 604. However, the light-emitting area may be changed without replacing the third decorative illumination unit 303 or the separate third decorative illumination unit 604. This will be explained below with reference to Figure 118. The separate third decorative illumination unit 604 will be used as an example.

Figures 118(a) and (b) are diagrams illustrating the state before and after the change in the light-emitting area of the third decorative cover 610 of Example 33.

The separate third decorative cover 610 has the same shape as the separate decorative cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26, but differs from the separate decorative cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26 in that the light-emitting area on the front surface of the separate third decorative cover 610 can be changed by changing a predetermined area (light-receiving area) on the front surface of the separate third decorative cover 610 that receives light irradiated from the light irradiation device 607.

The structure of the control mechanism 608 of the separate third illumination cover 610 differs from that of the separate third illumination cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26. Specifically, the structures of the push-in portion 616 and the push-in receiving portion 617 are different, and in particular, the push-in portion 616 is designed so that the amount of pushing can be adjusted.

The protrusion 616a of the push-in portion 616 is divided into a tip portion 671 and a base portion 672. The base portion 672 is attached to the inner surface of the separate third illuminated cover 610 so that it can move in the front-to-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. The tip portion 671 is configured to slide up and down from the base portion 672. Specifically, the base portion 672 of the push-in portion 616 is attached to a front-to-rear slide rail 673 formed on the inner surface of the separate third illuminated cover 610, so that it can slide in the front-to-rear direction. The tip portion 671 of the push-in portion 616 is attached to a vertical slide rail 674 formed on the outer surface of the base portion 672, so that it can slide in the front-to-rear direction. This allows the protrusion amount (height) and front-to-rear position of the protrusion 616a of the push-in portion 616 to be changed (adjusted) by a worker at the parlor or other facility before installing the separate third illuminated cover 610.

The push-in receiving portion 617 is also configured to be able to receive the push-in of the push-in portion 616 over a wider range than in Example 23, depending on the amount of protrusion of the protrusion 616a of this changeable push-in portion 616 and its position in the front-to-back direction. As a result, as the amount of protrusion of the protrusion 616a of the push-in portion 616 is increased and the position in the front-to-back direction is adjusted further rearward, the tilt angle of the light irradiation device 607 increases, and the position of the second light-emitting area 606 becomes higher.

As a result, when using the separate third illumination cover 610, if it is desired in a certain hall to have the light emitted from a higher point on the front side of the separate third illumination cover 610, the protrusion amount of the push-in portion 616 of the separate third illumination cover 610 can be increased or the position in the front-to-rear direction can be adjusted further rearward, thereby increasing the tilt angle of the light irradiation device 607 and raising the position of the second light-emitting area 606, thereby meeting the specific requirements of each hall.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of Example 33 is equipped with a separate third illumination unit 604 arranged on the front side of the main body of the pachinko machine 10, and a light irradiation device 607 that emits light toward the back side of the separate third illumination unit 604. The pachinko machine 10 is capable of shifting the predetermined area (light-receiving area) of the separate third illumination unit 604 that receives light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 to different positions, so that the impression of the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed depending on the change in the position of the predetermined area of the separate third illumination unit 604. The control mechanism 608 executes a first control to illuminate the predetermined area located at the first position as a first light-emitting area 605 using light emitted from the light-emitting device 607 when the predetermined area is located at the first position, and executes a second control to illuminate the predetermined area located at the second position as a second light-emitting area 606 using light emitted from the light-emitting device 607 when the predetermined area is located at the second position. Therefore, by optimizing the light emission direction in accordance with the transition of the predetermined area (light-receiving area) of the third illumination unit 604, the light-emitting area can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H00) above.

This invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations that achieve similar effects may be used, such as the following modifications:

[1] In the first embodiment described above, the ending countdown information 44v is displayed descriptively, such as "Ending time: X seconds remaining," but this is not limited to this. Another example of ending countdown information 44v is a timer image that displays numerical information. Since the player can tell that the ending period has begun by looking at the ending screen 44j, simply displaying the timer image allows the player to know that the ending time is counting down. This allows the ending screen 44j to be displayed in a cohesive manner. Another example is to represent the ending time as a bar graph, and replace it with a seek bar that visually indicates the remaining time in the ending time by indicating the current position on the bar graph-like bar.

In addition, in Example 1, the countdown information 44v counted down the ending time, but it may also count down the time of the jackpot round game state, including the ending period. In other words, it may count down from the start of the jackpot round game or a point in the middle of it, to the end timing of the ending period.

[2] In the above-mentioned Example 1, an example was given in which the right-hit-during-ending information 44k, the next game state approach information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v are displayed together as the "not-yet-arrival suggestion information" of the present invention, but each of them may be displayed alone as the "not-yet-arrival suggestion information," or the two may be displayed in combination as the "not-yet-arrival suggestion information."

[3] In the above-described first embodiment, the "predetermined gaming state" of the present invention was a jackpot round gaming state, and the "next gaming state" was a high probability/support state after the jackpot round gaming state, but the "predetermined gaming state" and "next gaming state" may be other gaming states. For example, the "predetermined gaming state" may be an advantageous gaming state such as a high probability/support state for a limited number of plays, and the "next gaming state" may be the gaming state after the advantageous gaming state ends (for example, the normal gaming state).

[4] In the above-described first embodiment, the "specific operation" of the present invention was a volume adjustment operation, but the "specific operation" may also be another operation. For example, if the player can select a character image to appear in the display performance, and the period during which the selection is possible is set during high-speed fluctuations or a jackpot round game state, the operation of selecting a character image is also included in the "specific operation" of the present invention.

[5] In the above-described first embodiment, the specific operation period information 44a was displayed during the period in which the "specific operation" of the present invention was permitted. However, it is also possible to display the specific operation period end approaching information 44e at a predetermined timing without displaying the specific operation period information 44a.

[6] In the above-described first embodiment, pressing the confirm button 81 on the normal screen 43a, demo screen 43b, high-speed variable screen 43c, opening screen 43h, round screen 43i, ending screen 43j, etc., switches these screens to the specific operation screen 44b. However, these screens may also be configured to switch to the specific operation screen 44b by pressing the left selection button 82 or right selection button 83, which are separate from the confirm button 81. In this case, the player is informed in advance that a specific operation can be performed by pressing one of the frame buttons 80 while the specific operation period information 44a ("Volume can be changed") is displayed. This is intuitive and easy to understand, and reduces the chances of failing to perform a specific operation.

Furthermore, by bringing a hand close to a predetermined area of the display screen 42a at the same time that the specific operation period information 44a ("Volume can be changed") is displayed on the display screen 42a, these screens may be switched to the specific operation screen 44b. For example, information such as "Bring your hand close to the screen to change the volume" may be displayed on the display screen 42a. This makes it even more intuitive and easy to understand, reducing the chance of missing a specific operation.

[7] In the above-described embodiment, for example, as in the ending presentation pattern shown in FIG. 58, the display time for each piece of ending information (next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, addiction prevention information 44z) was the same, such as 5 or 10 seconds, but it may be different times. For example, next game state suggestion information 44w is 6 seconds, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y is 8 seconds, and addiction prevention information 44z is 10 seconds. Furthermore, even for the same type of ending information, the display time of the ending information may be changed for each specified condition. For example, the display time of the ending information may be changed depending on the length of the fluctuation time.

[8] In the above-described embodiment, for example, as in the ending presentation pattern shown in Figure 58, each piece of ending information was displayed in a fixed order (roughly in the order of next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forget prevention information 44y, and addiction prevention information 44z). However, a pattern may be created in which the display order of ending information with the same display time is changed, for example, by displaying next game state suggestion information 44w last or card removal forget prevention information 44y first.

Note that ending information with the same display time does not necessarily have to have exactly the same display time; it can have similar display times as long as they are within the range allowed by the production. In this case, the display order of the ending information can be changed by extending the missing display time or reducing the excess display time within the range allowed by the production.

[9] In the above-mentioned Examples 23 to 26, a top lamp such as the third decorative lighting unit 304 was used as an example of the light-emitting area of the decorative cover arranged on the front side of the gaming machine main body, but it may also be a side lamp such as the first decorative lighting unit 301 or the second decorative lighting unit 302. It may also be another lamp that constitutes the front frame set 14.

[10] In the above-described Examples 27 to 30, the movable illumination unit 305 was described as being disposed on the rear side of the right edge of the opening of the center frame 37 as the light-emitting area of the decorative cover of the movable illumination unit 305. However, the movable illumination unit 305 may be disposed on the rear side of the left edge of the opening of the center frame 37, or may be disposed on the upper edge of the opening of the center frame 37. Furthermore, the movable illumination unit 305 may be one that is always fully or partially exposed at the right, left, or upper edge of the opening of the center frame 37.

[11] In the above-described Examples 27 to 30, the movable illumination unit 305 was arranged on the center frame 37, but the movable illumination unit 305 may be arranged at a location other than the center frame 37 of the gaming board 30 and be visible, or may be arranged on the inner frame 12 or the movable display unit 35 and be visible through an opening in the center frame 37.

[12] In the above-described Examples 27 to 30, the light irradiation device 707 that irradiates light onto the movable illumination unit 305 is a light-emitting substrate, but it is also possible to use something other than a light-emitting substrate to irradiate light. For example, it is also possible to use light irradiated from the third pattern display device 42 to illuminate the decorative cover of the movable illumination unit 305.

[13] In the above-described Examples 23 to 26, the control of the light irradiation device 607 was attitude control to set the irradiation angle of the light irradiated from the light-emitting substrate 611 to the first irradiation angle, or irradiation area control to set the irradiation area of the light irradiated from the light-emitting substrate 611 to the first irradiation area. However, it may also be irradiation distance control to change the irradiation distance between a predetermined point (e.g., center point) of the first light-emitting region 605 or second light-emitting region 606 and a predetermined point (e.g., center point) of the light-emitting substrate 611.

[14] In the above-described Examples 23 to 33, the irradiation means rotates (turns), tilts, and moves left and right. However, it may also be capable of at least one of bending, curving, stretching and contracting, and moving forward and backward. Furthermore, the irradiation area can be easily adjusted by bending the irradiation means if it has a structure that can be bent using a hinge or the like, bending the irradiation means if it is a flexible substrate, or stretching and contracting the irradiation means if it has a structure that can be stretched and contracted using a sliding mechanism or the like. It may also be possible to easily adjust the irradiation distance by moving the irradiation means forward and backward.

[15] In the above-described Examples 23 to 26, with regard to the input portion of the control means, the push-in portion 616 is a protrusion and the push-in receiving portion 617 is a surface that receives it. However, conversely, the push-in portion 616 may be a surface and the push-in receiving portion 617 may be a protrusion that contacts that surface.

[16] In the above-mentioned Examples 24 and 28, the light-transmitting plates 631 and 731 were used as examples of a configuration for controlling the state of light using something other than a light irradiation means. However, the state of light may also be controlled by tilting or rotating a reflecting member that reflects light.
[17] The present invention may be implemented in various types of gaming machines (e.g., Type 1, Type 3, etc.), or in pachinko machines and the like of types different from those described in the above embodiments. For example, the present invention may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly referred to as a "two-time right machine" or "three-time right machine") in which, once a jackpot is hit, the expected value of the jackpot increases until multiple jackpot states (e.g., two or three times) occur, including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that enters a special game state when a ball enters a predetermined area after a jackpot symbol is displayed. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that enters a special game state when a ball enters a predetermined winning slot. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in various gaming machines that use game balls, such as arranged ball pachinko machines and mahjong ball machines.

[18] The various means for carrying out the invention, the inventions described in the examples, and the inventions described in the variations described above may be modified, substituted, deleted, or combined as appropriate, provided that they are not contradictory to each other.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

30... Game board 30a Game area 70 Main control device (main control device)
30 Game board 32 Variable winning device 32a Big winning port 33a Starting winning device for special symbol 1 33b Starting winning device for special symbol 2 34 Starting port for normal symbol 35 Variable display device unit 36 Out port 40 First symbol display device 41 Second symbol display device 42 Third symbol display device 43a Normal screen 43b Demo screen 43c High-speed fluctuation screen 43d Left symbol stop screen 43e All symbols stop screen 43f Normal reach display screen 43g Development reach display screen 43g-1 Strong light flashing screen 43h Opening screen 43i Round screen 43j Ending screen 43k High probability state screen 43l Reach display screen during high probability state 44a Information during specific operation period 44b Specific operation screen 44c Change information display section 44d Operation method display section 44e Information about approaching the end of a specific operation period 44e1 Information about approaching the end of a first specific operation period 44e2 Information about approaching the end of a second specific operation period 44f Opening information 44g Information explaining right-hand hits during opening 44h Information about right-hand hits during a round 44i Information about the number of rounds 44j Ending information 44k Information about right-hand hits during ending 44l Information about approaching the next game state 44l1 Information about approaching the first next game state 44l2 Information about approaching the second next game state 44l3 Information about approaching the third next game state 44l4 Information about approaching the fourth next game state 44l5 Information about approaching the fifth next game state 44m Information about right-hand hits during high probability/support state 44n Bonus video 44o Information about preventing gazing at light emission 44p Bonus information 44q Information with setting suggestion 44v Ending countdown information 44w Information about suggesting next game state 44x Manufacturer information 44y Card removal forget prevention information 44z Sinking prevention information 44z1 First sinking prevention information 44z2 Second sinking prevention information 300 Illumination unit 301 First illumination unit 302 Second illumination unit 303 Third illumination unit 305 Movable illumination unit 602 Transition mechanism 603 Slide groove 604 Separate third illumination unit 605 First light-emitting area (first light-emitting area)
606 Second light-emitting region (second light-emitting region)
607 Light irradiation device (irradiation means)
608 Control mechanism (control means)
609 Third decorative cover (decorative cover)
610 Separate third decorative cover (separate decorative cover)
611 Light-emitting substrate (light-emitting substrate)
612 LED
613 Substrate support part 614 Input part (input means)
615 Output unit (output means)
616 Push-in portion 617 Push-in receiving portion 618 Shaft 619 Coil spring 620 Main body side fixing portion 621 Attitude regulating portion 630 Light transmitting portion (light transmitting means)
631: Light-transmitting plate 632: Light-transmitting plate support portion 641: Separate cover detection sensor (detection means)
642 Tilting motor 643 Separate cover detection protrusion 650 Separate third illumination cover 651 Partial light-emitting area 642 Non-light-emitting area 703 Movable illumination part 705 First light-emitting area (first light-emitting area)
706 Second light-emitting region (second light-emitting region)
707 Light irradiation device (irradiation means)
708 Control mechanism (control means)
709 Movable illumination cover (decorative cover)
710 Driving mechanism 711 Light emitting substrate 712 LED
713 Substrate support part 714 Input part (input means)
715 Output unit (output means)
716 Push-in portion 717 Push-in receiving portion 718 Shaft 719 Coil spring 721 Attitude regulating portion 730 Light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting means)
731: Light-transmitting plate 732: Light-transmitting plate support portion 741: Displacement detection sensor (detection means)
742 Rotation motor 750 Movable illumination unit (light guide plate)
751 Partial light-emitting region 752 Non-light-emitting region 753 Light guide plate light-emitting portion 754 Partial light-emitting portion 755 Non-light-emitting portion

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a front frame attached to the inner frame so as to be openable and closable ,
The gaming machine includes:
a cover portion disposed forward of the irradiating means so as to cover the irradiating means and capable of transmitting the irradiated light;
The light is irradiated from the irradiating means onto the cover portion, and the irradiated light is transmitted through the cover portion and is visible to a player positioned on the front side of the front frame,
The gaming machine includes:
a driving means capable of moving at least the cover portion between a first position and a second position;
In a situation where the cover portion is moved to the first position, the cover portion moved to the first position by the light irradiated from the irradiating means is irradiated in a first irradiated manner, and in a situation where the cover portion is moved to the second position, the cover portion moved to the second position by the light irradiated from the irradiating means is irradiated in a second irradiated manner different from the first irradiated manner,
The gaming machine, wherein the first position and the second position are different positions when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.